Macro Express Help

Macro Express 3
Manual of Instruction
Copyright Insight Software Solutions, Inc.
Table of Contents
Introduction
About Macro Express ........................................................................................................... 8
Program Overview............................................................................................................... 9
Program Navigation ............................................................................................................. 10
Installing Macro Express

Installing Macro Express ...................................................................................................... 11
Advanced Installation .......................................................................................................... 12
Advanced License Information ............................................................................................. 15
Uninstalling Macro Express .................................................................................................. 16
Tutorial
Tutorial - Introduction ......................................................................................................... 17
Creating a HotKey Macro ..................................................................................................... 18
Creating a Shortkey Macro ................................................................................................... 20
Creating a Scheduled Macro ................................................................................................. 23
Capture a Macro - HotKey First ............................................................................................ 27
Capture a Macro - HotKey Last............................................................................................. 30
Create a Popup Menu .......................................................................................................... 32
Quick Wizard Capture .......................................................................................................... 35
Macro Scopes...................................................................................................................... 41
Sample Macros.................................................................................................................... 44
Advanced - Using Controls ................................................................................................... 46
Advanced - Copy and Paste Routine ..................................................................................... 50
Advanced - Using Text String Variables ................................................................................ 52
Playing Back Macros

Macro Activation ................................................................................................................. 54
HotKey Activation ................................................................................................................ 57
Shortkey Activation ............................................................................................................. 59
Scheduled Macros
Schedule Activation ......................................................................................................... 60
Scheduling - At Startup .................................................................................................... 62
Scheduling - Once ........................................................................................................... 63
Scheduling - Hourly ......................................................................................................... 64
Scheduling - Daily ........................................................................................................... 65
Scheduling - Weekly ........................................................................................................ 66
Scheduling - Monthly ....................................................................................................... 67
Scheduling - Time Out ..................................................................................................... 68
Scheduling - Other .......................................................................................................... 70
Scheduling - At File Load ................................................................................................. 71
Window Title....................................................................................................................... 72
No Activation ...................................................................................................................... 73
Popup Menu ....................................................................................................................... 74
Mouse Activation ................................................................................................................. 75
Floating Menu ..................................................................................................................... 76
Control Activation ................................................................................................................ 77
Stopping a Macro ................................................................................................................ 79
Using the Macro Explorer

Macro Explorer .................................................................................................................... 80
System Macros .................................................................................................................... 82
Menu Commands
File
File Menu .................................................................................................................... 84
Import/Export Macros
Importing Macros .................................................................................................... 86
Import Text Files ..................................................................................................... 87
Import Playable Macro ............................................................................................. 88
Exporting Macros..................................................................................................... 89
Output Macro Information........................................................................................ 90
Export Playable Macro ............................................................................................. 91
Macros
Add Macros ................................................................................................................. 92
Copy Macro ................................................................................................................. 97
Run Macro Now ........................................................................................................... 98
Recapture Macro ......................................................................................................... 99
Enable or Disable Macro .............................................................................................. 100
Search Explorer ........................................................................................................... 101
Delete Macro............................................................................................................... 102
Place on Desktop......................................................................................................... 103
Macro Properties ......................................................................................................... 104
Category
Categories .................................................................................................................. 106
Options
Sort Macros ................................................................................................................ 108
View ........................................................................................................................... 110
Preferences
Appearance ............................................................................................................. 111
Backup Preferences ................................................................................................. 113
Caching .................................................................................................................. 115
Capture .................................................................................................................. 116
Delays .................................................................................................................... 118
Dialogs ................................................................................................................... 119
Email Settings ......................................................................................................... 121
Email Recipients ...................................................................................................... 122
File Paths ................................................................................................................ 123
Miscellaneous .......................................................................................................... 124
Miscellaneous - Advanced ........................................................................................ 127
Network .................................................................................................................. 128
Passwords............................................................................................................... 129
Playback ................................................................................................................. 130
Scheduler ............................................................................................................... 132
Shortkeys................................................................................................................ 133
Startup ................................................................................................................... 136
Tools
Mouse Locator ............................................................................................................ 137
Remap Keyboard ......................................................................................................... 138
Remap - Select Character ............................................................................................ 140
Error Log Viewer ......................................................................................................... 141
Restore Program Defaults ............................................................................................ 142

Import Program Configuration ...................................................................................... 143
Export Program Configuration ...................................................................................... 144
Restore File Associations .............................................................................................. 145
Restore Keyboard Hooks .............................................................................................. 146
Restore Mouse Hooks .................................................................................................. 147
Building Macros with the Editors

Scripting vs Direct Editor ..................................................................................................... 148
Scripting Editor ................................................................................................................... 149
Direct Editor ....................................................................................................................... 152
Direct Editor Tips ................................................................................................................ 154
Editor Menu Items

Editor Menu Items ........................................................................................................... 155
Editor Menu - File ............................................................................................................ 158
Editor Menu - Edit ........................................................................................................... 159
Editor Menu - Debug ....................................................................................................... 161
Properties ........................................................................................................................... 162
Scope ................................................................................................................................. 164
Security .............................................................................................................................. 168
Notes ................................................................................................................................. 170
Macro Command Categories

CD-ROM
CD-ROM ......................................................................................................................... 171
Clipboard
Clipboard ........................................................................................................................ 173
Debug
Log Messages ................................................................................................................. 176
Desktop
Desktop .......................................................................................................................... 177
Dialogs
Multiple Choice................................................................................................................ 178
Text Box Display ............................................................................................................. 181
Explorer
Open Explorer To ............................................................................................................ 184
Open Folder in Explorer ................................................................................................... 185
Open Folder using My Computer ...................................................................................... 186
Files/Folders
Convert File Name ........................................................................................................... 187
File Manipulation ............................................................................................................. 188
Get File Version ............................................................................................................... 190
Process an ASCII Delimited Text File ................................................................................ 191
Process a Text File .......................................................................................................... 195
Set File Attributes ............................................................................................................ 197
Internet
Dial-Up Commands .......................................................................................................... 198
Get IP Address ................................................................................................................ 200
FTP ChMod Command ..................................................................................................... 201
FTP Connect ................................................................................................................... 202
FTP Directories................................................................................................................ 203

FTP Directory Commands................................................................................................. 204
FTP File Commands ......................................................................................................... 205
FTP Keep Alive ................................................................................................................ 206
FTP Send File .................................................................................................................. 207
FTP Site .......................................................................................................................... 208
FTP Site Command .......................................................................................................... 209
Ping Site ......................................................................................................................... 210
Send Email ..................................................................................................................... 211
Web Site ......................................................................................................................... 215
Keyboard
Keys Up or Down ............................................................................................................ 216
Toggle Keys .................................................................................................................... 217
Logic
AND/OR/XOR Logic ......................................................................................................... 218
If Commands .................................................................................................................. 220
If Control ........................................................................................................................ 224
If Message ...................................................................................................................... 225
If OS Version .................................................................................................................. 227
If Ping Successful ............................................................................................................ 228
If Registry....................................................................................................................... 229
If Variable ....................................................................................................................... 230
Switch / Case Commands ................................................................................................ 231
Macro Control
Load Macro Text File ....................................................................................................... 234
Load New Macro File ....................................................................................................... 235
Macro Commands............................................................................................................ 236
Macro Control Commands ................................................................................................ 238
Password Protection ........................................................................................................ 239
Remarks ......................................................................................................................... 241
Macro Express
Macro Express Commands ............................................................................................... 242
Restart Macro Express ..................................................................................................... 243
Mouse
Mouse Click on Control .................................................................................................... 244
Mouse Commands ........................................................................................................... 245
Move Mouse to Tray Icon ................................................................................................ 249
Multimedia
Audio Controls ................................................................................................................ 250
Set Sound ....................................................................................................................... 251
Video Clip ....................................................................................................................... 252
Network
Map a Drive .................................................................................................................... 254
Registry
Create Registry Key ......................................................................................................... 256
Read/Write Registry ........................................................................................................ 257
Write to Registry ............................................................................................................. 229
Repeat
Break Command.............................................................................................................. 259
Repeat Options ............................................................................................................... 260
System
Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 263
Default Printer ................................................................................................................ 264
Empty Recycle Bin ........................................................................................................... 265
Get Pixel Color ................................................................................................................ 266
Hibernate ....................................................................................................................... 268
Lock Workstation ............................................................................................................ 269
Post Message .................................................................................................................. 270
Reboot or Shut Down ...................................................................................................... 272
Screen Display Settings ................................................................................................... 273
Set System Date/Time ..................................................................................................... 274
System Controls .............................................................................................................. 275
System Dialogs ............................................................................................................... 277
Terminal Services Session ID ........................................................................................... 278
Text
Date ............................................................................................................................... 279
Date and Time ................................................................................................................ 280
Encrypted Text ................................................................................................................ 282
Symbols.......................................................................................................................... 283
Text Type ....................................................................................................................... 284
Time............................................................................................................................... 286
Timing
Delay.............................................................................................................................. 288
Pause ............................................................................................................................. 289
Speed ............................................................................................................................. 291
Wait For Commands ........................................................................................................ 292
Variables
Variables Overview .......................................................................................................... 296
Clear Variables ................................................................................................................ 298
INI Files and Variables ..................................................................................................... 299
Modify Decimal Variable................................................................................................... 300
Modify Integer Variable ................................................................................................... 302
Modify String Variable...................................................................................................... 304
Run Macro in Variable...................................................................................................... 308
Save or Restore Variables ................................................................................................ 310
Set Decimal Variables ...................................................................................................... 311
Set String Variable........................................................................................................... 313
Set Variable Integer ........................................................................................................ 315
Variable Set From File...................................................................................................... 321
Variable Set from Miscellaneous ....................................................................................... 323
Variable Set to ASCII Character ........................................................................................ 324
Variable Set to ASCII Value .............................................................................................. 325
Window Controls
Controls .......................................................................................................................... 326
Using Controls................................................................................................................. 46
Capture Control ............................................................................................................... 331
Get Control ..................................................................................................................... 332
Post Message .................................................................................................................. 270
Set Focus........................................................................................................................ 336
Variable Get Control Class ................................................................................................ 337
Variable Get Control Text ................................................................................................. 338

Variable Modify Control .................................................................................................... 339
Variable Set Control Text ................................................................................................. 341
Windows/Programs
Activate or Launch Programs............................................................................................ 342
Set Window Order ........................................................................................................... 344
Size or Position a Window ................................................................................................ 345
Terminate Process ........................................................................................................... 347
Window Commands ......................................................................................................... 348
Window Move and Size .................................................................................................... 350
Capture (Record) a Macro

Capture Macro - Introduction ............................................................................................... 352
Capture Settings ................................................................................................................. 116
Capture a Macro ................................................................................................................. 355
Capture a Macro - Hot Key First ........................................................................................... 27
Capture a Macro - Hot Key Last............................................................................................ 30
Quick Wizard Capture .......................................................................................................... 35
Create a Macro with Quick Wizards

Quick Wizards ..................................................................................................................... 368
Text Wizards ....................................................................................................................... 370
Internet and Networking Wizards ......................................................................................... 371
Macro Wizards .................................................................................................................... 372
Multimedia Wizards ............................................................................................................. 373
System and Files Wizards .................................................................................................... 374
Using Popup and Floating Menus

Building Popup and Floating Menus ...................................................................................... 376
Properties ........................................................................................................................... 378
Scope ................................................................................................................................. 381
Notes ................................................................................................................................. 385
Icons .................................................................................................................................. 386
Macro Recycle Bin

Macro Recycle Bin ............................................................................................................... 389
Networking and Other Issues ................................................................................................... 390
Networking Questions ......................................................................................................... 391
Command Line Parameters .................................................................................................. 392
License and Support Issues

Support .............................................................................................................................. 394
Frequently Asked Questions ................................................................................................. 395
Backup and Restore Macros ................................................................................................. 390
End-User License Agreement ............................................................................................... 399
Licensing the Evaluation Copy .............................................................................................. 401
Upgrade Policy .................................................................................................................... 402
About Macro Express

Macro Express is the premier macro utility on the market. With Macro Express, you can record, edit and play back mouse
and keyboard macros. Its powerful tools and robust features will noticeably boost your productivity.
What is a Macro?
A macro is a set of commands that can be played back at will to perform a given task. These tasks may be something
simple such as inserting your name and address into a word processor to something more complex such as launching a
program, copying data from it, activating another program, pasting the data into it and repeating the steps several times.
Tasks performed by macros are typically repetitive in nature allowing significant savings in time by executing the macro
instead of manually repeating the commands.
Creating a Macro
There are several ways to create macros with Macro Express. One method is to capture (record) your keystrokes and
mouse movements. Another method is to use the Quick Wizards. The Quick Wizards guide you through a series of
questions and build the macro for you. Or you can build your own macros with the easy to use Scripting Editor or Direct
Editor. The tutorial provides examples of creating macros through each of these methods.
Playing Back a Macro

Macro Express offers several methods for executing macros. These include the use of HotKeys, Shortkeys, Scheduled
Macros, Window Activation, Mouse Clicks, Popup/Floating Menus and several others.
1. A HotKey is a combination of keys on the keyboard that are pressed to initiate a macro. This could include
pressing CTRL+ALT+R or CTRL+F12 or any number of combinations.
2. A Shortkey is a small string of characters. When a matching combination is keyed in from the keyboard, it is
erased and the assigned macro executes. You could use the small string of #add to type out your address.
3. A Scheduled Macro executes on a given time schedule.
4. For Window Activation, a macro runs when a specific window gains focus (appears) on the screen.
5. A macro may be triggered by clicking on a specific area of the screen with the left, right or middle Mouse button.
6. A Popup Menu or Floating Menu is basically a list of defined macros. Once the list is displayed, click on the
desired macro or press an associated number or letter to execute the macro.
7. A macro can be activated through a Batch File or Command Line.
8. Macros may also be activated through Windows API calls or Windows Explorer.
9. Run a macro from the Macro Explorer by using the Run Macro Now option.
Macro Scopes
Macro scopes allow you to place restrictions on your macros. You can assign macros to play back in all Windows
programs, in one specific window or program, or in every program except the one you define. The tutorial steps through
a few examples of how to do this.
Program Overview
Macro Express is a utility designed to help you automate repetitive computer tasks. This guide will explain a few basic
concepts of Macro Express that may help you better understand the program.
Starting Macro Express

After installing the program, click on Start | Programs and open the folder that you chose for the shortcut (normally
Macro Express). Click on the Macro Express 3 shortcut to start the program. If you elected to put Macro Express in your
StartUp folder during the installation process, Macro Express will load each time you start your computer.
You can chose to have the program run in hidden mode or place an icon in the System Tray. Click on Options |
Preferences | Appearance to make your selection. If running in hidden mode, the default hotkey is CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+W
to activate the program window.
Player and Editor

Macro Express is split into two parts known as the Macro Express Player and the Macro Express Editor. The Macro
Express Player is what executes the macros and it must be running in order for macros to play back. The Macro Express
Editor is the tool used to create the macros.
When you run Macro Express, you are really running the Macro Player. By default, the Macro Editor will also run when
you start Macro Express, but this can be changed so that it does not run automatically. The Macro Editor cannot be run
by itself.
By default, the Macro Express Player shows up as an icon in the system tray. From this icon you can invoke the Macro
Express Editor or shut down the Macro Express Player. You can optionally set the Macro Express Player to be completely
hidden so that no icon shows in the system tray. With this option set, you would need to use the System Macros to
invoke the editor or terminate the program.
Macros
A macro is a script containing commands that automate computer tasks. Each command performs one step, such as
moving the mouse, launching a program or entering keystrokes.
There are several ways within the Macro Express Editor to create a macro. Using the Quick Wizards or Capture are the
simplest. The Quick Wizards ask a series of questions and build a macro for you. To Capture a macro, you start the
Capture, enter your keystrokes and mouse movements, and then stop the Capture process. You can use the Scripting
Editor or Direct Editor for more control in writing your macro.
Macro Activation
Once written, a macro needs an action to cause it to play back. The macro activation might be a combination of
keystrokes, a mouse click in a certain area of the screen or a macro may launch when a program starts up.
Files
Macro Express allows you to create multiple files of macros. When installing the program, two macro files are also
loaded. They are samples.mex and macex.mex. The samples.mex file contains a number of sample macros that you can
look at or use for reference. It is recommended that you not use this as your default file to create and store macros. The
other file, macex.mex, is where you can save macros that you create. Or you can create a new macro file for this purpose
by clicking on File | New Macro File from the Macro Explorer. The Macro Explorer displays the macro file name and path
of the file you currently have opened.
Program Navigation
Macro Express consists of several components. The major components of the program may be accessed by clicking on
the icons in the Actions column. You may also access these components through the menu commands. Each of these
components will be discussed briefly here. Links are provided for more detailed information about each component.
Macro Explorer
By default, the program opens to the Macro Explorer. This displays the list of macros in the file that you have open.
When saving macros in the editors or other options, the program will return to the Macro Explorer.
Scripting Editor
The Scripting Editor is one of two editors available for writing or editing macros. If you have highlighted a macro in the
Macro Explorer list and click on the Scripting Editor icon, the contents of the highlighted macro will be displayed in the
Scripting Editor. If you do not have a macro highlighted and click on the Scripting Editor icon, a message will appear
saying that you have not selected a macro to edit. Then it asks if you would like to create a new macro using the
Scripting Editor. If you click yes, the Add Macro window will appear and you can begin writing the macro. Double clicking
on a macro listed in the Macro Explorer will load the Scripting Editor if you have it set as your default editor. Once in the
Scripting Editor you can then click on the Direct Editor and work on the macro in this editor.
Direct Editor
The Direct Editor is the other editor available for writing or editing macros. If you have highlighted a macro in the Macro
Explorer list and click on the Direct Editor icon, the contents of the highlighted macro will be displayed in the Direct
Editor. If you do not have a macro highlighted and click on the Direct Editor icon, a message will appear saying that you
have not selected a macro to edit. Then it asks if you would like to create a new macro using the Direct Editor. If you
click yes, the Add Macro window will appear and you can begin writing the macro. Double clicking on a macro listed in
the Macro Explorer will load the Direct Editor if you have it set as your default editor. Once in the Direct Editor you can
then click on the Scripting Editor and work on the macro in this editor.
Capture
This will start the process for recording or capturing a macro. Your keystrokes and mouse clicks/movements will be
recorded and saved.
Quick Wizards
This option will start the Quick Wizards. There are 25+ different wizards to guide you step by step through the creation
of different macro types.
Recycle Bin
Macro Express has its own recycle bin. Any macros deleted from the Macro Explorer will be sent to the Recycle Bin. If you
deleted one by mistake you can restore the macro to its proper file. Or if you are sure you don't need the deleted
macros, you can remove them permanently.
Installing Macro Express

The steps for installing Macro Express are fairly standard.
1. First download the program from www.macros.com.
2. Save the downloaded file to a folder on your hard drive.
3. Locate the downloaded file and double click the .exe file to start the installation process.
4. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the install.
To get started with the program, read the Introduction and the Tutorial sections of the Macro Express Help.
Licensing Macro Express

If you have purchased the license for Macro Express you will also receive a license code. From the Macro Explorer click
on Help | License Macro Express to activate the License Information window. Enter your name and code exactly as they
appear on the license instructions you received when you purchased Macro Express. Press OK to save the license
information. Your license status will now display in the lower left corner of the Macro Explorer.
See the Advanced License Information topic for consideration of Administrator and non-Administrator login rights and
Macro Express licensing.
Advanced Installation
Silent Install
A silent install means Macro Express will be installed without the user having to answer any questions during the
installation process. This is useful if you want to install Macro Express from within another setup program or when
installing from a server on a network.
Note: Because it requires command line parameters, a Silent Install cannot be run by clicking on the installation filename
in Explorer. You may execute it from the Start | Run command or from a batch file that contains the proper command.
The /S command line parameter tells the Macro Express installer to do a Silent Install. For example: macex3.exe /S
Note: The Macro Express installation file can be named setup.exe or macex3.exe depending on where you obtained the
file. In the examples shown, substitute the actual name of your Macro Express installation file. If you downloaded an
installation file in zip format, you must unzip setup.exe or macex3.exe from the zip file before running a Silent Install.
Installation options
The Macro Express Install program allows you to use a text file to automatically respond to the install questions during
the installation process. By putting entries in the text file, you can choose things such as where to install the program,
whether Macro Express should be put in the Startup folder so it is automatically launched when Windows starts, or
whether the Quick Start Guide should be displayed after Macro Express is installed.
To do this you need to create a text file with a name of your choosing and use the /M= command line parameter. For
this example, we will name the file ME3Setup.txt.
macex3.exe /M=c:\ME3Setup.txt
These are the options you can put in the setup file:
INSTALLPATH is used to override the default installation folder. If included, Macro Express will be installed in the
folder specified by INSTALLPATH.
INSTALLPATH=c:\myprograms\Macro Express
STARTMENUFOLDR is used to override the default start menu used to load Macro Express. If included, the menus to
start Macro Express will be placed in the folder specified by STARTMENUFOLDR.
STARTMENUFOLDR=Utilities
STARTUP=Y puts Macro Express in Windows StartUp folder.
STARTUP=N does not put Macro Express in Windows StartUp folder.
LAUNCHNOW=Y Launches Macro Express after installation is completed.
LAUNCHNOW=N does not Launch Macro Express after installation is completed.
NOQUICKSTART = Y the Quick Start Guide will not be installed.
NOQUICKSTART = N the Quick Start Guide will be installed (default).
QUICKSTARTNOW=Y displays Quick Start Guide after installation is completed or when Macro Express starts
(default).
QUICKSTARTNOW=N does not display Quick Start Guide at the end of the installation.
QUICKSTARTNOW=P Prevents the Quick Start Guide from being displayed when Macro Express starts.
QUICKSTARTNOW=NP does not display Quick Start Guide at the end of the installation and also prevents the Quick
Start Guide from being displayed when Macro Express starts.
Note: NOQUICKSTART prevents the Quick Start Guide from even being installed. QUICKSTARTNOW just prevents
the Quick Start Guide from being displayed. When using QUICKSTARTNOW the Quick Start Guide can be installed but
not automatically displayed.
WHATSNEWNOW = Y Displays What's New in this version after install
WHATSNEWNOW = N does not display What's New in this version after install
REBOOT=N suppresses the dialog suggesting a reboot after installation is completed, even if the installer has
determined that one is needed.
LICENSENAME and LICENSECODE are used to license the software during install:
LICENSENAME=Name used when Macro Express was licensed
LICENSECODE=Code received when Macro Express was licensed
CONFIGFILEPATH= path to optional configuration file. This allows you to set a specific configuration for Macro
Express at the time you install Macro Express.
To do this, install Macro Express on a computer and set all the preferences the way you want them. Then, click Tools
| Export Program Configuration to create a file containing the preferences you desire. Then add
CONFIGFILEPATH=c:\macexp.mcf to the MESetup.txt file.
This example assumes the preference information has been saved in the file c:\macexp.mcf.
NOEDITOR=Y the Macro Express Editor will not be installed
NOEDITOR=N the Macro Express Editor will be installed (default)
NOHELP = Y the Help file will not be installed.
NOHELP = N the Help file will be installed (default).
NOICONS = Y the sample icons will not be installed.
NOICONS = N the sample icons will be installed (default).
INSTALLOLDER = Y all files will be installed even if they are older than files already in the destination folder.
INSTALLOLDER = N newer files in the destination folder will not be overwritten (default).
MACROFILEDEST = Path and filename of where to install the macro file macexinstall.mex, if it exists
Listed below are the rules for installing a macro (.mex) file.
1. The macro file macexinstall.mex must exist in the same directory as the install file.
2. If the MACROFILEDEST silent install option does not exist, then a) the macro file will be installed in the same folder as
the program and b) the name of the macro file is the default name for that program (macex.mex).
3. If the MACROFILEDEST silent install option is used, then the macro file will be installed in the folder and filename
specified.
Sample Text File

Using Notepad, or some other text editor, create the file ME3Setup.txt containing the
following:
INSTALLPATH=c:\Program Files\Mac Exp 3
STARTMENUFOLDR=Mac Exp 3
STARTUP=N
LAUNCHNOW=N
QUICKSTARTNOW=N
REBOOT=N
LICENSENAME=Jason Junior
LICENSECODE=AB3EX-45F9T-1200P-34CC3-6TY54
Note: The License Information is for demonstration purposes only. You should use the
License Information you received when you purchased Macro Express 3.
This example will cause Macro Express to be installed in the c:\Program Files\Mac Exp 3
folder. The start menu will be Mac Exp 3. Macro Express will not be launched when
Windows is started. Macro Express will not run at the end of the install. The Quick Start
Guide will not be displayed at the end of the install. The setup will not reboot the
computer. After the installation is complete, the program will be licensed to Jason Junior.
Note: Only insert valid options into the ME3Setup.txt file. Do not include comments, blank
lines or remarked out options.
Silent Install with Options

You may combine the Silent Install with the Installation Options listed above. After creating ME3Setup.txt you would
install Macro Express 3 with the following command:
macex3.exe /S /M=c:\ME3Setup.txt
Related Topics
Advanced Licensing Information
Advanced License Information

Windows can be configured to allow different users to log into a single computer. Some versions of Windows require a
user to log in. Normally only one user is logged in at a time. One or more login names have access to the entire
computer and are said to have administrative access rights. Other login names do not have administrative access rights.
These login names have restrictions about what they can change on the computer.
If the Name and Code are entered into the License Information dialog when you are logged in as an administrator, Macro
Express 3 will be licensed for all users. If, however, the License Information is entered when you are logged in as a
non-administrator, Macro Express 3 will only be licensed for that user login.
Uninstalling Macro Express 3

To remove Macro Express from your computer follow the steps below:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Click on File | Terminate Macro Express Player and Editor to close Macro Express.
From the taskbar, click the Start menu button to open the Start menu.
Open the Windows Control Panel.
Based on the version of Windows you are running, select the option from the control panel used to uninstall
applications.
5) Highlight Macro Express 3 in the list of installed programs.
6) Again, depending on your version of Windows click on the option to remove the program.
7) Follow the on-screen prompts to remove Macro Express from your computer.
Tutorial - Introduction
A macro is a set of commands that can be played back at will to perform a given task. These tasks can be something
simple such as inserting your name and address into a word processor to something more complex such as launching a
program, copying data from it, activating another program, pasting the data into it and repeating this several times.
Tasks performed by macros are typically repetitive in nature allowing significant savings in time by executing the macro
instead of manually repeating the commands.
Macro Creation
There are several ways to create macros with Macro Express. One method is to capture (record) your keystrokes and
mouse movements. Another method is to use the Quick Wizards. The Quick Wizards guide you through a series of
questions and build the macro for you. Or you can build your own macros with the easy to use Scripting Editor or Direct
Editor. This tutorial will give examples of creating macros through each of these methods.
Macro Playback Options

Macro Express offers several ways to execute macros. These include the use of HotKeys, Shortkeys, Scheduled Macros,
Window Activation, Mouse Clicks, Window Controls and Popup/Floating Menus.
1. A HotKey is a set of keys on the keyboard that are pressed to initiate the macro. This could include pressing
CTRL+ALT+R or CTRL+F12 or any number of combinations.
2. A Shortkey is a small string of characters. When a matching combination is keyed in from the keyboard, it is
erased and the assigned macro executes. You could use the small string of #add to type out your address.
3. A Scheduled macro is one that executes on a given time schedule.
4. For Window Activation, a macro runs when a specific window gains focus (appears) on your computer.
5. A macro may be triggered by clicking on a specific area of the screen with the left, right or middle Mouse button.
6. A Popup Menu or Floating Menu is basically a list of defined macros. Once the list is displayed, click on the
desired macro or press an associated number or letter to execute the macro.
7. A Control Activated macro allows you to start a macro when a specific Window Control, such as a button, edit
box, etc., is active.
Macro Scopes
This guide will also discuss the scope of a macro - or the restrictions you have placed on the macro. You can assign
macros to play back in all Windows programs, in one specific window or program, or in every program except the one
you define. We'll also go through a few examples of how to do this.
Tutorial - HotKey
In this exercise we'll create a macro assigned to a hotkey.
Assigning the Macro Activation

From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro to open Add Macro window. HotKey should already
be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is not in the edit box, click on the edit box to
place the text cursor there.
Next, hold down the CTRL key, the SHIFT key and the T key all at the same time and then release them. CTRL+SHIFT+T
should appear in the edit box. This is the hotkey we will use to run the macro. We can choose to create the macro by
entering the macro command directly or by using a scripting editor. Other methods to create macros are to use one of
the Quick Wizards or capture (record) a macro. These options will be reviewed in other sections.
Creating the Macro

For this exercise click on the Direct Editor button to open the Direct Editor window.
1. Type your address into the Macro Text field.

2. Click on the Properties tab and type "My Address" in the Nickname field.
3. Click on the Scope Tab and make sure Global is selected. It is the default option.
When finished, click on File | Save to save your macro. Then click on the Macro Explorer button to see your newly
defined macro, My Address, added to the list of available macros.
Running the Macro

To test the macro, open the notepad program. To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and enter notepad in
the search box. When found, click on the file to open the notepad program. On older systems, click on Start and then
Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button.
Once notepad is running, hold down the CTRL key, the SHIFT key and the letter T. Then release all the keys. Your
address will type out into the notepad program.
Tutorial - Shortkey
This page demonstrates how to create a macro assigned to a shortkey.
Shortkey Settings
First, let's create some default settings that will apply to the playback of all shortkey macros. From the Macro Express
Explorer menu click on Options | Preferences to load the Preferences window. Click on Shortkeys from the list in the left
panel of the window to display the shortkeys options.
Select the Use Prefix Keys option and enter ## in the Prefix Keys entry space. This will require that ## be pressed
before typing the shortkey or the macro will not play back. Click the OK button to return to the Macro Explorer.
Assign the Activation
From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro to open the Add Macro window. Select the Shortkeys
option and enter "email" into the Shortkey edit field.
Creating the Macro

We can choose to create the macro using the Direct Editor or the Scripting Editor. For this exercise click on the Scripting
Editor button to open the Scripting Editor window.
First, click on the Properties tab. In the Nickname box, enter "My Email Address". Then click on the Scope tab and make
sure Global is selected. Now click on the Script tab to return to the screen displayed above. Scroll down the list of
commands and click on the Text category of commands to expand this listing. Double click on the Text Type command
found in this group.
From the Text Type window, enter your email address in the Keystrokes field. If you want to have the macro paste the
text into your application via the Windows clipboard, select the Use Clipboard to Paste Text option. By default the text
will type into the application unless another selection is made. Press the OK button to save the entry and return to the
Scripting Editor.
A new entry is listed in the Macro Script. This entry will read Text Type: followed by the email address that you entered.
If you made a mistake entering your email address, you can double click on this entry and edit the address in the Text
Type window.
From the Scripting Editor, click on File | Save to save your macro. Click on the Macro Explorer button to see your newly
defined macro, "My Email Address", added to the list of available macros.
Run the Macro

To test out the macro, run the notepad program. To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and enter notepad
in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the notepad program. On older systems, click on Start and then
Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button.
Once notepad is running, type the following: ##email. Your email address will type into the notepad program.
Tutorial - Scheduled Macro

This page will demonstrate creating a scheduled macro, one that will play back on the schedule that you choose.
Setting the Schedule

From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro to open the Add Macro window.
Select Schedule to display the scheduling options. For this example select the Other option in the Run Macro section. To
simplify the example, select the Play Macro Indefinitely option. Next set the schedule to run every 1 minutes and 0
seconds. With these settings, the macro will play back once every minute.
Creating the Macro

We can choose to create the macro by using the Direct Editor or the Scripting Editor. For this exercise, click on the
Scripting Editor button to open the Scripting Editor pane.
First, click on the Properties tab. In the Nickname box, enter "Date and Time". Then click on the Scope tab and make
sure that Global is checked. Now click on the Scripting tab.
We will create this macro to only play back in the Notepad window and only if it is already running. To begin, click on the
Logic command to expand this category. Then double click on the If Window running command to open the If
Commands window. Make sure the If Window Running option is selected.
Enter Notepad for the Window Title and select the Partial Match option. Click on the OK button to save and see the
command inserted into the macro script.
Next expand the Windows/Programs category of commands and double click on the Window Activate command to open
the Activate/Launch Program window. Make sure the Activate Window Only option is selected.
Enter notepad for the Window Title and click on the OK button to insert this command into the macro script.
Next click on the Text category of commands to expand this category. Double click on Date/Time to open the Date/Time
window.
Enter dddd, MMMM dd, yyyy - h:mm:ss AMPM in the Format edit field. Select both the Type Out and Use Current
Date/Time options. Click on the OK button to save and return to the Scripting Editor.
Then expand the Text category again and double click on the Text Type option to load the Text Type window.
Locate Enter in the yellowed area and click on it to insert <ENTER> into the Keystrokes field. This instructs the macro to
insert a carriage return after typing the current date and time. The last step is to close the If statement. Expand the
Logic category and double click on End If to insert the End If command directly into the Scripting Editor.
You should have five entries listed in the "Macro Script" area as shown in the Scripting Editor image above. You can
double click on any of these entries to make changes to what was previously input.
From the Scripting Editor, click on File | Save to save your macro. Click on the Macro Explorer button to see your newly
defined macro, Date and Time, added to the list of available macros.
Testing the Macro

As long as Macro Express is running, a scheduled macro should be ready to execute. However, in our example the
scheduled macro will only perform if Notepad is running. To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and enter
notepad in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the notepad program. On older systems, click on Start
and then Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button.
Once Notepad is running, just wait and watch the date/time entered into Notepad each minute.
Close notepad and nothing will happen, because the macro cannot find a running copy of notepad.
Delete or Disable the Macro

After viewing the playback you can either delete or disable this macro since you won't want this Scheduled Macro to
continue executing every minute indefinitely! To delete the macro, highlight it in the Macro Explorer list and choose
"Macros | Remove Macro" from the menu.
If you prefer to keep this example but do not want it running every minute, then right mouse click on the macro. From
the menu that appears, left click on the Disable Macro menu option. You will notice that the entry for this macro is now
italicized and in a lighter color. This means it is disabled and will not play back until the macro has been enabled.
Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey First

In this tutorial we will capture the macro in the Windows Paint program. To start we first need to run the Windows Paint
program. To do so, click on the Windows Start button and enter mspaint.exe in the search box. When found, click on the
file to open the Paint program. On older systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter "mspaint" and click the ok button.
Once Paint is running, we want to switch directly to Macro Express. If you are running Macro Express in the system tray,
left click on the Macro Express icon in the system tray; otherwise, click on Macro Express in the taskbar.
Assign a Macro Activation

From the Macro Express Explorer window click on Macros | Add Macro or click on the Capture icon. The Add Macro opens
as shown below.
The HotKey option should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is not in the
edit box, click on the edit box to place the text cursor there. Next, hold down the SHIFT key, the CTRL key and the Z key
all at the same time and release them. CTRL+SHIFT+Z should appear in the edit box. This is the hotkey we will be
assigned to the macro we record.
Capture Settings
Next click on the Capture Macro to open the capture settings window.
A number of capture options are available depending on what you are needing to capture. Default settings for each of
these options may be set in the Capture preferences panel. Those defaults would display in this window each time you
started a capture. They may be temporarily overwritten as needed for each individual capture, which we will do now for
this capture.
1. Enter My Paint Drawing in the Nickname field.
2. Select the scope setting of Program. This indicates that the recorded macro will only play back in the program we
record it in.
3. Select the Capture Keystrokes and Capture Double <ALT> for Menus options.
4. Make sure the Capture Mouse Relative to Window options are selected. Also make sure the Capture Window Size
option is checked.
5. Since we will be recording mouse movements as well as mouse clicks, the Only Capture Mouse Clicks option should
be unchecked.
6. Select the Capture At Actual Speed options.
7. We want to start capturing the macro inside of the Paint program. Under Choose the program to start capturing in,
we want to select the Paint program. It should display in the dropdown list as "untitled - Paint".
Capturing the Macro

With all settings in place, click on the Start Capture button which will minimize the Macro Express window. The last
program running prior to Macro Express should appear, which is the Paint program.
The macro is now recording. You can do something fairly simple in the Paint program such as drawing a face. Click on a
color, and then draw a circle and place two eyes, a nose and mouth on it.
When the masterpiece is complete press the hotkey we assigned to the macro - CTRL+SHIFT+Z. A dialog appears that
the capture is complete.
Running the Macro

Now it is time to run the macro we just recorded. Open the Paint program window. We need to start with a clean Paint
window, so click on File | New from the Paint menu and don't save the changes to the previous drawing. With the clean
Paint window, press CTRL+SHIFT+Z. The face that you just drew is redrawn complete with any hesitations that you may
have made while doing so!
Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey Last

When running Macro Express, you will note that there are five hotkeys automatically assigned and displayed in the Macro
Explorer. These five hotkeys are System Macros (Scope indicates System). One of these System Macros is called Start /
Stop Capture and by default is defined as CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. Pressing CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X will start the recording of
a macro and pressing it a second time will stop the recording. This hotkey combination may be changed to another
available in Macro Express.
Capture Settings
Before we record any macros using this System hotkey, we want to make sure we have our default settings in place.
From the Macro Explorer click on Options | Preferences and select Capture to display the Capture default settings as
shown below.
These are the settings that are used when the System Start / Stop Capture hotkey function is invoked. These are also the
default settings that appear when doing a macro recording by Assigning HotKey First (see prior example) or when using
the Capture Quick Wizard.
1. Select the Scope setting of Program. This indicates that the recorded macro will only play back in the program we
record it in.
option is checked.
be unchecked.
6. Select the Prompt on Capture option which will display a message indicating that the capture is starting.
Click on the OK button to save the defaults. We are now ready to record.
An important thing to remember when recording a macro is to make sure that the program you plan to start recording in
is active and on top.
Our example recording will be in the Windows Paint program. To start the Windows Paint program, click on the Windows
Start button and enter mspaint.exe in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the Paint program. On older
systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter mspaint and click the ok button.
Capturing the Macro

With the Paint program open and on top, press CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. A notice may appear warning about the use of the
ALT key. Click OK. Then a notice appears stating that the macro is about to start recording. Click the OK button to start
the capture.
When the masterpiece is complete, terminate the macro capture by pressing the same SYSTEM hotkey we started with,
CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. This action open the Capture Complete window as shown below.
Assigning Macro Activation

At this point we assign a hotkey or another type of macro activation to the macro we just recorded. We also give the
macro a nickname and we can also override the Scope default setting at this point.
1. Enter My Paint Drawing #2 in the Nickname field.
2. Make sure Program is still selected as the Scope.
3. Select HotKey as the Default Activation. Now move the cursor to the hotkey edit window, press CTRL+SHIFT+S and
release. CTRL+SHIFT+S should appear in the edit box. Click on the Save button and the capture process is complete.
Running the Macro

Tutorial - Popup Menu

This example will show how to create a popup menu. Before starting, you need to already have some macros available to
place in the menu . If you have not done so, then first create both a hotkey macro and a shortkey macro as described in
the hotkey and shortkey sections. This example is based on the assumption that you have created these macros.
Setting the Activation

From the Macro Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro. A new window should appear titled Add Macro.
Select the Popup Menu option. Click on the edit box to place the cursor inside. Next, hold down the ALT key, the SHIFT
key and the Z key all at the same time and then release them. ALT+SHIFT+Z should appear in the edit box. This is the
hotkey we will use for the popup macro. Next, click on the Build Menu button to activate the menu builder.
Setting the Menu Properties

The Available Macros section displays all macros created. The Macros in Menu is the list of macros assigned to the popup
menu. But first click on the Properties tab and enter My Menu in the Nickname field. Select Nickname and Scope as the
How to Display option.
In the Icons area click on the Change button to open the Select an Icon window. Click on the Browse button to display
several icon folders and a number of icons. Select the black 4 icon (black 4.ico) and click on the Open button. This
displays the 4 icon as the current icon. Press OK to return to the Properties Tab. Select the Place Menu in System Tray
option. We'll use the icon later on.
Building the Menu

Now click on the Editor tab. Under the section titled Available Macros, highlight the macro CTRL+SHIFT+T (the one we
created earlier) and then click on the Add button. Next highlight the email macro (created earlier) and click on the Add
button. These two macros should now reside in the Macros In Menu section. We are finished defining the menu so click
on the Save button or File | Save Menu to save the menu.
Click on the Macro Explorer button to see your newly defined popup macro, ALT+SHIFT+Z, added to the list of available
macros.
Testing the Menu

Nickname and Scope
Let's test out the popup menu macro using notepad. To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and enter
notepad in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the notepad program. On older systems, click on Start
and then Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button.
Once notepad is running, hold down the ALT+SHIFT+Z keys. A menu similar to the one above should appear, listing the
two macros we have previously defined. We can either press the corresponding letter or number next to the macro or
double click on the macro in the menu and it will play the selected macro back in notepad.
Another way to invoke the popup menu is to right click on the "black 4" icon in the system tray. The "black 4" icon should
now be showing in your system tray, because of the Properties settings we made previously. The popup menu may be
displayed in four different forms. One of these, Nickname and Scope, is displayed above.
First part of Macro
Let's take a quick look at the other options. Highlight the Popup Menu macro listed in the Macro Explorer and click on the
menu item Macros | Menu Builder to reopen the Menu Builder. Click on the Properties tab and select the First Part of
Macro option from the How to Display Menu section. Click the Save icon. Click on the "black 4" icon in the system tray to
open the menu. This time it lists the first part of the contents of each macro, as shown above.
Icons Only
Cancel out of the popup menu and return to Macro Express. Right mouse click on the My Menu macro and select the Edit
with Menu Builder option. Then click on the Properties tab and select the Icons Only option from the How to Display
Menu section. Next, select the Horizontal option and enter 10 for Maximum Icons per Row. Click the Save icon. Now click
on the "black 4" icon in the system tray. The menu should display, but this time, it will show a list of icons. Click on one
of the icons in the menu to run the macro.
Windows Default
Return to the Macro Explorer and double click on the My Menu macro to activate the Menu Builder. Click on the
Properties tab and select the Windows Default option from the How to Display Menu section. Click the Save icon. Now
click on the "black 4" icon in the system tray. The menu will display as shown above. Click on the macro you want in
order to execute the macro. Windows will also assign underscores to each of the macros, where possible. So in the
example above, pressing the M key will also activate the My Email Address macro.
Tutorial - Quick Wizard Capture

Using the Quick Wizards may simplify the process of creating a macro. The wizard prompts you step by step through the
creation of a macro. In this tutorial well create a message to pop up at a specific time to remind us of a task that needs
to be done.
Well start by clicking on the Quick Wizards icon to open the wizard welcome page.
1. This page displays types of macros that can be created using Quick Wizards. To create a reminder, select Text and
click on the Next button.
2. Choose the Create a Reminder option and click on Next to proceed.
3. This panel shows a few things that can be done with the Reminders. Click next to continue.
4. Enter a reminder message into the edit field. We can also choose to have a sound play back to alert us of the
message. For this example well just use the beep sound.
Also select the Delete this macro after displaying the reminder option to delete the macro after it runs. In this example
the message is to only be displayed once, rather than on a recurring schedule. So we want the macro deleted. Its
simpler than remembering later to manually delete the macro.
Click next and now well set the schedule for the macro.
5. We only want it to play back one time, so select the Once schedule option. Set it to run a couple of minutes from now
so that you can see it run. Click next to continue.
6. Now we need to assign a Nickname to the macro. Enter a nickname to help remember what the macro does. Then
click the Finish button to return to the Macro Explorer window. Our quick wizard macro is now listed as a Scheduled
macro.
7. The last step is to wait for the reminder message macro to run at the time you scheduled.
Tutorial - Macro Scope

Macro Scope
Scope indicates under what conditions a macro should play back. Four Scope categories are available - Global, Global
Except, Window Specific and Program Specific. A global macro will play back in any Windows program. The Global Except
option allows a macro to run in any Windows program except the application you specify. A Window Specific macro will
only start in a window that matches the window title specified in the macro. A Program Specific macro will only play back
in a given program. We'll look at some real examples of how this works.
To illustrate the process, we need to run two different programs that we can potentially have the macros play back in.
For this example we'll run Windows Notepad and WordPad.
To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and enter notepad in the search box. When found, click on the file to
open the notepad program. On older systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button.
Follow the same steps for WordPad, just substitute WordPad for notepad.
Global Macro
We already created a couple of Global macros in other tutorials. If you have not created these macros, please refer to the
hotkey tutorial for instructions on creating the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro. A global macro plays back in all Windows
programs. To illustrate, bring Notepad to the foreground and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your address is typed into the
notepad. Now bring WordPad to the foreground and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your address types out into WordPad.
Program Specific Macro

We will now change the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro to become a Program Specific macro. First minimize Notepad and
WordPad. With Macro Express the active window, highlight the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro (nickname of "My Address") from
the Macro Explorer and click on the Scripting Editor button. Click on the Scope tab and select the Program Specific
option. Next click on the Select button to open the Select Programs window as shown below.
On the left is a list of all current programs that are running on your computer. Scroll through the list of programs running
and find notepad.exe. Highlight it in the list and click on either Add button. This will place notepad.exe in the Program
Name edit box.
(You may also note that there is a button called "Select from list of installed programs". You could click on this button for
a list of all programs installed on your computer and select from this list.)
Make sure the Run If On Top option is selected and then click on the OK button. Click on File | Save to save your macro
changes. Click on the Macro Explorer button and note that the scope for the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro (nickname of "my
address") has changed from Global to Program Specific:notepad.exe.
To see what effect the changes have on the macro, bring Notepad to the foreground and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your
address types into the program. Now bring WordPad to the foreground and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Nothing happens. You
have defined CTRL+SHIFT+T to only work in the Notepad program.
Global Except
We will now change the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro to become a Global Except macro. First minimize Notepad and WordPad.
With Macro Express the active window, highlight the CTRL+SHIFT+T (nickname of "my address") macro from the Macro
Explorer and click on the Scripting Editor button. In the Scripting Editor, click on the Scope tab and choose the Global
Except option. Click on the Select button to open the Select Programs window.
This time you will select the program that the macro will not work with. On the left is a list of all current programs that
are running on the computer. Notepad.exe should already be selected. If not, scroll through the list of running programs
and click on notepad.exe. Click on the Add button to place notepad.exe in the Program Name edit box.
(You may also note that there is a button called "Select from list of installed programs". You could click on this button for
a list of all programs installed on your computer and select from the list.)
Click OK to save the program choice and return to the Scripting Editor. Then click on File | Save to save the macro
changes. Click on the Macro Explorer button and note that the "scope" for the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro has changed from
Program Specific to Global Except.
To see what effect the changes have on the macro, bring Notepad to the foreground and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Nothing
happens. The macro is defined to not work with Notepad. Now bring Wordpad to the foreground and press
CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your address types into the program.
You have defined CTRL+SHIFT+T to work in all programs except the Notepad program. Activate another program that
accepts text input such as your email program and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your address should type out into that
program as well.
Window Specific Macro

Lastly, we will change our CTRL+SHIFT+T macro to become a Window Specific macro. First minimize WordPad and
Notepad. From Macro Express, highlight the CTRL+SHIFT+T macro from the Macro Explorer and click on the Scripting
Editor button. With the Scripting Editor open, click on the Scope tab and choose the Window Specific option. Click on the
Select button to open the Select Window dialog.
We will use this option to select a specific window that the macro will run in. (A Window Title is the text that appears in
the top caption bar of most windows). Notepad.exe is most likely listed in the Selected Window field. Highlight this .exe
and click on the Remove button to clear out the selected windows.
On the left is a list of all current windows that are running on your computer. You could browse through this list, but for
this example just enter notepad in the Selected Window edit box and click on the Add button to the immediate right of
the edit box. Select the Run If On Top Option and then click on the OK button to return to the Scripting Editor. Click on
File | Save to save the macro changes. Click on the Macro Explorer button and note that the scope for the My Address
macro has changed from Global Except to Window Specific:notepad.
To see what effect these changes have on the macro, activate the Notepad window and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Your
address will type out into the program. Now activate the WordPad window and press CTRL+SHIFT+T. Nothing happens.
You have defined CTRL+SHIFT+T to only work in a Notepad window.
Sample Macros
The Macro Express help file contains comprehensive information on how to use each part of the program. It contains
screen shots of almost every element in the program with explanations of how to use each element. There are also many
written examples of how to use the commands in macros.
We have also included a number of sample macros with the program. This section will briefly review each of these
macros. First, to have access to the sample macros, open the Macro Explorer. Then click on "File | Open Macro File" and
select the "samples.mex" macro file. With this macro file loaded in, you can see and review any of the sample macros.
Floating Menu Using Icons

This sample macro demonstrates how to setup and use a Floating Menu macro. A floating menu macro is simply a toolbar
or window that floats on top of all other programs. The toolbar or window contains a list of other macros which you can
activate at will by clicking on a macro in the toolbar or window.
If you edit this macro, you will be shown a list of all macros available for inclusion in the floating menu and a list of all
macros currently in the floating menu. You can add or remove macros from the menu at will. There are options available
to choose the menu style, whether it will be a toolbar with icons or a window with text selections.
Hide a Program
This sample demonstrates how to hide (make it invisible) a window and how to display it again. It uses the notepad
program for its example. It also demonstrates the use of launching a program, using a variable and displaying messages
in a text window.
Launch Program
This sample demonstrates how to launch a program. It launches the Microsoft Paint program. It also demonstrates the
use of If / then / else conditioning by testing to see if the Paint program exists. Displaying messages in a text window is
also demonstrated.
Maximize and Minimize

This sample demonstrates how to minimize, maximize and restore a window. It uses the notepad program for its
example. It also demonstrates the use of launching a program, using variables, activating a window and displaying
messages in a text window.
Menu and Question

This sample demonstrates how to use a question and a menu of choices in a macro. It asks the user a question and then
asks the user to choose from a list of choices. It also demonstrates the use of if / then / else conditioning, using variables
and displaying messages in a text window.
Open Explorer Folder

This sample demonstrates how to open up an Explorer folder. It opens up the Windows Explorer to the Recycle Bin. It
also demonstrates displaying messages in a text window.
Paste Text
This sample demonstrates how to paste text into an application. It pastes our company address into the notepad
program. It also demonstrates the use of launching a program, displaying messages in a text window and various
clipboard commands.
Popup Menu Using Nicknames

This sample macro demonstrates how to setup and use a Popup Menu macro. A popup menu is very similar to a floating
menu except it only appears on the screen when you need to use it. It doesn't hang around. A popup menu macro is
simply a toolbar or window that pops up on top of all other programs when you press a hotkey or click on an icon in the
system tray. The toolbar or window contains a list of other macros which you can activate at will by clicking on a macro
in the toolbar or window.
If you edit this macro, you will be given a list of all the macros available to be put in the popup menu and a list of all the
macros that are currently in the popup menu. You can add or remove macros from the menu at will. There are options
available to choose the menu style, whether it will be a toolbar with icons or a window with text selections.
Process a Text File

This sample demonstrates how to process a basic text file. This macro first creates a small file named mesample.txt. The
text file simply contains a short list of names where each name is on a line by itself. The macro reads in each name out
of the text file and types it out in the notepad program. This macro also demonstrates setting and manipulating variables,
launching a program, displaying messages in a text window and typing text.
Process Folder File Names

This sample demonstrates how to process all the file names in a folder. The root folder of your C: drive (i.e. C:\) is
processed. Each file name is typed out in the notepad program. It relies on the Repeat With Folder command to do so.
This macro also demonstrates the use of variables, launching a program, displaying messages in a text window and
typing text.
Repeat Until
This sample demonstrates repeating a process until a condition is met. In this example, the user is prompted to enter the
name of the program. It repeats this process over and over until the correct program name is entered. This macro also
demonstrates the use of setting a variable from a prompt, an if / then statement and displaying messages in a text
window.
Repeat With Prompt

This sample demonstrates repeating a process using a value entered by the user to determine the number of times to
repeat. In this example, the user is prompted to enter a repeat count and a number will be typed into the notepad
program the number of times indicated by the repeat. The number shown each time will be a different random number
between 1 and 100. This macro also demonstrates the use of a variable, using a random number, typing text, using a
repeat counter, launching a program and displaying messages in a text window.
Run Control Panel

This sample demonstrates run a control panel applet. It runs the Display Properties control panel applet and sets it to the
"Screen Saver" tab. It also demonstrates displaying messages in a text window.
Type Dates and Time

This sample demonstrates using dates and times. It types today's date, yesterday's date, the date in a week and the
current time into the notepad program. This macro also demonstrates the use of typing text, launching a program and
displaying messages in a text window.
Variables and Mouse

This sample demonstrates using variables and the mouse. It first saves the coordinates of the mouse into variables. It
then moves the mouse in a small circle on the screen. It then returns the mouse to the same location it was at before
moving it. This macro also demonstrates the use of delays, macro playback speed, using variables, moving the mouse
and displaying messages in a text window.
Window Resize and Position

This sample demonstrates how to resize and reposition windows. It uses the notepad program for its example. It first
sets the exact size of the window, then increases it by a percentage and then changes it by a pixel amount. It then
moves it to the top right corner of the screen, then to the bottom middle of the screen and then to specific location. The
notepad program is then restored to its original size and location. It also demonstrates the use of launching a program,
using variables and displaying messages in a text window.
With the Macro Explorer open, press the hotkeys associated with the sample macros to watch the macros play back.
Afterwards, double click on one of the sample macros listed in the Macro Explorer to load the macro into the Scripting
Editor or Direct Editor. Here you can examine the commands used to make the macro work.
Using Controls
Let's run through an example of how to use the Window Controls. To begin, we first need to start the Windows calculator
program. To start Calculator, click on the Windows Start button and enter calculator in the search box. When found, click
on the file to open the calculator program. On older systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter calculator and click the
ok button. Leave the program running and return to Macro Express.
Selecting the Activation

We'll create a macro using a hotkey. From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro to open the
Add Macro window. HotKey should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is
not in the edit box, click on the edit box to place the text cursor in this field.
Next, press the F3 key and release it. F3 should appear in the edit box and will be the hotkey used to run the macro.
Creating the Macro

We can choose to create the macro by entering the macro command directly, by using the scripting editor or capturing
the macro. For this exercise click on the Scripting Editor button to activate the Scripting Editor.
In the Scripting Editor first click on the Properties tab. In the Nickname box, enter "Clear Calculator". Then click on the
Scope tab and make sure Global is selected. Now click on the Script tab to return to the screen displayed above. Scroll
down the list of commands and click on the Window Controls command category to expand this listing. Double click on
the Get Control command found in this group to activate the Get Control window as shown below.
Select the Hide Macro Express option. Make sure that the Save Control In option is set to variable C1 and select Exact
Match. Now click on the Launch Get Control Utility button.
This activates the Capture Window Control screen and hides Macro Express. Now click on the target (crosshairs) at the
bottom of this window. Hold down the left mouse button and drag it over top of the "C" button on the calculator. Release
the mouse button. This should insert some information into the Capture Window Control. Class Name should read
"Button". Click the save button to save the information and return to the Get Control Window.
This window should have the information stored to the variable C1 as shown above. Click OK to save this command and
return to the Scripting Editor. Scroll down the list of commands and click on the Window Controls command to expand
this listing (if not already open). Double click on the Mouse Click on Control command to open the Mouse Click on Control
window.
In the General Tab, select Single Click, C1 as the variable and Left Button. This instructs the macro to perform a single
left mouse click on the variable C1, which we have defined as the "C" button on the Calculator. We can ignore the
Advanced Tab, so click OK to save your changes. This returns us to the Scripting Editor. The script should look like the
following:
Get Control %C1%
Mouse Single Left Click on Control %C1%
Click on File | Save to save the macro and return to the Macro Explorer. Our F3 macro with a nickname of Clear
Calculator should now be listed in this window.
Running the Macro

To test the macro, open the calculator window and enter some numbers into the calculator. With numbers displayed in
the Calculator edit box, press the F3 button. This simulates clicking on the C button of the calculator and clears the
display.
Copy and Paste Between Two Applications

Below is a simple example of how to set up a copy and paste routine between two applications. You can use this as a
guideline for creating routines between your specific applications.
You might be tempted to try and use the ALT+TAB key to switch between programs. This is actually not always reliable
and in fact, will not even work via Macro Express on some computers due to the low level nature of this key command.
The solution is to use the ACTIVATE command.
Setting up the Macro

From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro. A new window should appear titled Add Macro.
HotKey should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is not in the edit box,
click on the edit box to place it there. Next, hold down the CTRL key, the SHIFT key and the P key all at the same time
and then release them. CTRL+SHIFT+P should appear in the edit box. This is the hotkey we will define for the macro.
Next click on the Scripting Editor button start building the macro in the Scripting Editor. First click on the Properties Tab
and enter Copy and Paste in the Nickname field. Next click on the Scope tab and make sure that the macro scope is set
to global. Then click on the Script tab to start building the macro.
Building the Macro in the Scripting Editor

1) Scroll through the list of command categories and click on Windows/Programs to expand the list. Double click on the
Window Activate command. In the Activate Window field, enter "notepad" (without the quotes) as the Window title. Click
on the OK button to save the entry. This first command instructs the macro to bring notepad to the front and be ready to
receive keystrokes.
2) We now want to enter our commands to be processed in notepad. Let's assume we want to repetitively copy one line
at a time over to WordPad. Our next command would be to highlight a single line of text. This can be done by using
Shift+End. To do this scroll through the list of command categories and click on Text to expand the category. Then
double click on Text Type to open the Text Type window. Click on Shift and then End in the list of options in the yellow
area of this window. This should insert <SHIFT><END> into the Keystrokes edit field. Click OK to save your changes.
3) The next step is to copy this to the Windows Clipboard. Scroll through the list of command categories and click on
Clipboard to expand the category. Double click on the Clipboard Copy command to insert this to your script.
4) Now that the line has been copied to the clipboard, we are ready to go paste it into WordPad. But first, lets move the
cursor to the next line in notepad so we will be ready to copy the next line. To do this, scroll through the list of command
categories and click on Text to expand the category. Then double click on Text Type to open the Text Type window. Click
on Home and then Arrow Down in the list of options in the yellow area of this window. This should insert
<HOME><ARROW DOWN> into the Keystrokes edit field. Click OK to save your changes.
5) Now to activate WordPad, we follow the same process as before by scrolling through the list of command categories
and clicking on Windows/Programs to expand the list. Double click on the Window Activate command. In the Activate
Window field, enter "wordpad" (without the quotes) as the Window title. Click on the OK button to save the entry. This
command will activate WordPad and allow text entry into this window.
6) The next step of the macro is to paste the text from the clipboard into WordPad. To do this scroll through the list of
command categories and click on Clipboard to expand the category. Double click on the Clipboard Paste command to
insert into the script.
7) Now let's place an <ENTER> into the macro so that it moves the cursor to a new line in WordPad. To do this, scroll
through the list of command categories and click on Text to expand the category. Then double click on Text Type to open
the Text Type window. Click on Enter in the list of options in the yellow area of this window. This should insert <ENTER>
into the Keystrokes edit field. Click OK to save your changes.
8) We are almost done now. There are two final issues that we need to address. First we need to place the macro in a
loop so that it copies multiple lines. Let's set the macro up so that it copies the first 5 lines in notepad over to WordPad.
Highlight the first line of your macro script - Activate Window: "notepad". Then scroll through the list of command
categories and click on Repeat to expand the category. Single click on the Repeat Start option and then click on the
Insert Before arrow - the top blue arrow of the three insert arrows. This will open the Repeat Options window. Make sure
the Start Repeat option is selected and enter 5 in the Repeat Count entry field. Click OK to save the change. This should
insert the Repeat command as the first line of your macro.

9) Single click on the Repeat End command and then click on the Add to End insert button - the bottom of the three
Insert buttons. This should insert a Repeat End command as the last command of your macro script.
10) The last thing we need to do is address a possible timing issue. It's possible for Macro Express to send the Clipboard
Paste command before WordPad has fully activated. So what we need to do is insert a short delay right after activating
either window. To do this, scroll through the list of command categories and click on Timing to expand the list. Then
double click on Delay to open the Set Delay window. Select the Delay in Seconds option and enter .5 (a half second).
Click OK to save the change.
Find the delay command in the script and highlight it. Then click on the Duplicate button to make a copy of this
command. The Duplicate button is the bottom of the three buttons to the right of the Macro Script. You should now have
two Delay commands listed in the script. Highlight one of the Delay commands and click on the Up or Down arrow on the
right side of the Macro Script. Move the delay command so that it is positioned below the Activate Window: "notepad"
command and above the Text Type:<SHIFT><END> command. Go back and highlight the other Delay command and
move it so that it is positioned below Activate Window: "wordpad" command and above the Clipboard Paste command.
Macro Script
Your macro script should look like what is displayed below. If your macro doesn't look like this, arrange the commands so
that they are in this order.
Repeat Start (Repeat 5 times)
Activate Window: "notepad"
Delay 0.5 Seconds
Text Type: <SHIFT><END>
Clipboard Copy
Text Type: <HOME><ARROW DOWN>
Activate Window: "wordpad"
Delay 0.5 Seconds
Clipboard Paste
Text Type: <ENTER>
Repeat End
Click on File | Save to save the macro.
Testing the Macro

To run the macro, start the notepad and WordPad applications. To start notepad, click on the Windows Start button and
enter notepad in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the notepad program. On older systems, click on
Start and then Run. Enter "notepad" and click the ok button. Follow the same steps for WordPad, just substitute
WordPad for notepad.
Enter five lines of text into notepad or copy the first five lines of the macro script displayed above and paste them into
notepad. Make sure you don't have any blank lines between the lines of text. Next, place the mouse cursor at the
beginning of the first line of text in notepad. Then press CTRL + Shift + P to start the macro. It should switch between
both programs copying each line from notepad and pasting them into WordPad.
Using Text String Variables

Let's work through an example of using Text String Variables. There are hundreds, even thousands of uses for Text
String Variables. This example will provide an idea of how they can be used and manipulated.
This macro, when completed, will help fix typing errors when we transpose letters, such as when we type "adn" or "teh"
instead of "and" or "the". Just place the cursor between the two transposed letters and press the assigned hotkey to
correct the typing error.
Setting up the Macro

To get started, open the Macro Express Explorer and click on Macros | Add Macro. A new window should appear titled
Add Macro. HotKey should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is not in the
edit box, click on the edit box to place it there.
Next, hold down the F4 key and release it to insert F4 in the edit box. This is the hotkey we will define for the macro.
Click on the Scripting Editor button to open the Scripting Editor to begin creating the macro.
Building the Macro in the Scripting Editor

1) Scroll through the list of command categories and click on Macro Control to expand the list. Double click on the
Remark command. In the Comments field of the Remarks window, enter "Place cursor between the transposed letters"
(without the quotes). Click on the OK button to save the entry. This will place the text in bold blue font in the Scripting
Editor. This line will not do anything in the script. It is just a reminder for later of how to use the macro. Before running
the macro, we need to place the text cursor between the two transposed letters.
2) The macro will first highlight the two letters that are reversed. To do this we will need to move the cursor back one
character and highlight the two characters using the Text Type command. Scroll through the list of command categories
and click on Text to expand the category. Then double click on Text Type to open the Text Type window.
Click on Arrow Left from the list of options in the yellow area of this window to move the cursor back one character. Then
click on Shift Down, Arrow Right, Arrow Right and Shift Up to highlight the two transposed characters. The entry should
look like this - <ARROW LEFT><SHIFTD><ARROW RIGHT><ARROW RIGHT><SHIFTU>
Click OK to save and return to the Script Editor.
3) Next we'll cut the text and copy to the clipboard. Scroll through the list of command categories and click on Clipboard
to expand the category. Then double click on Clipboard Cut to insert the clipboard cut (Ctrl X) command as the next item
in the script.
4) Now the clipboard contents will be saved to a text string variable. Scroll through the list of command categories and
click on Variables to expand the category. Then double click on Variable Set String to open the Set Text String Variables
window. Select the Set Value from Clipboard option. Assign the contents of the clipboard to Variable T1 in the Choose
Variable Name field. T1 should be the default selection. Click OK to save.
5) The next couple of steps will reverse the order of the text that we copied to the clipboard - the two transposed letters.
Scroll through the list of command categories and click on Variables to expand the category. Then double click on
Variable Modify String to open the Modify String Variables window. Select the Copy Part of Text option. We are going to
copy the first letter of the variable T1 and save it to variable T2.
Select Variable T2 as the Variable to copy to. Select Variable T1 as the variable to copy from. Select Value for the
Starting Position and enter the number "1" (without the quotations) in the edit field. Select Value for the Characters to
Copy and enter the number "1" (without the quotations) in the edit field. Click OK to save.
6) This next step will copy the second letter of variable T1 and save it to variable T3. Scroll through the list of command
categories and click on Variables to expand the category. Then double click on Variable Modify String to open the Modify
String Variables window. Select the Copy Part of Text option.
Select Variable T3 as the Variable to copy to. Choose Variable T1 as the variable to copy from. Select Value for the
Starting Position and enter the number "2" (without the quotations) in the edit field. Select Value for the Characters to
Copy and enter the number "1" (without the quotations) in the edit field. Click OK to save.
7) The last step plays back the corrected text. Scroll through the list of command categories and click on Text to expand
the category. Then double click on Text Type to open the Text Type window.
In the Keystrokes edit field, type the following - %T3%%T2%. This will type out the second letter of the transposed text
first, reversing the order and correcting the typing error. Click OK to save.
In the Scripting Editor, click on the Properties Tab. In the Nickname field enter "Fix Transposed Letters" (without the
quotes). Then save the entire macro by clicking on File | Save.
Macro Script
Your macro script should look like what is displayed below. If your macro doesn't look like this, arrange the commands so
that they are in this order.
// Place mouse cursor between transposed letters
Text Type: <ARROW LEFT><SHIFTD><ARROW RIGHT><ARROW RIGHT><SHIFTU>
Clipboard Cut
Variable Set String %T1% from Clipboard
Variable Modify String: Copy Part of %T1% to %T2%
Variable Modify String: Copy Part of %T1% to %T3%
Text Type: %T3%%T2%
Testing the macro

To test out the macro, run the notepad program. (To run notepad, click on "Start | Run" from the bottom left of the
computer screen, enter "notepad" and click the OK button.) Type the following text into notepad - Tihs is a tset. (Include
the typing errors.)
Insert the cursor between the "i" and "h" in the word "Tihs". Press the F4 key to play back the macro. Do the same for
the "s" and "e" in the mispelled word "tset". The macro corrects the mistyped letters.
Macro Activation
There are many different mechanisms that you can use to activate a macro (i.e. trigger a macro to run).
HotKey
A hotkey is a key combination such as CTRL+ALT+A, CTRL+Right Mouse Click, etc. When the keys are pressed and
released, the macro runs.
Shortkey
A shortkey is a set of characters such as abc, myname, etc. When the keys are typed into an application the macro runs.
Schedule
The macro runs as a scheduled event. These events can be scheduled to play at startup of Macro Express, hourly, daily
(choose any or all days of the week), weekly, monthly, one given time, every "x" minutes or after "x" minutes of
inactivity.
Window Title Appears

When a specified window gains focus, then the macro runs. The window is specified by its window title (text in the top
blue caption bar).
None
None specifies that no activation is to be associated with the macro. This is done because the macro will be used as part
of another macro (i.e. a macro can run other macros) and/or this macro will be used in a popup menu of macros and no
other macro activation is desired for the macro.
Popup Menu of Macros

A popup menu of macros is a list of macros that are displayed in a window. Clicking on one of the macros or typing a
corresponding number or letter activates that macro from the popup menu. The popup menu itself can be activated by
either a hotkey or by right clicking on a system tray icon. The popup menu can either show icons (representing the
macros) or the first part of the text of the macro or the macro nickname and scope.
Mouse Click
Use either the left, middle or right mouse buttons to activate the macro. Select an area of the screen to click on or
designate a window part to click on, such as scroll bar, title bar, buttons, etc. to activate the macro.
Floating Menu
This creates a menu of macros that are displayed as a floating toolbar that sits on top of your other applications. The
floating menu can either display icons (representing the macros) or the first part of the text of the macro or the macro
nickname and scope. Clicking on one of the macros or typing a corresponding number or letter activates that macro from
the floating menu.
Control
The Control option will activate a macro when a specific control is active. The control may be a window button, edit box
or another identifiable portion of a window.
Command Line Parameters

Invoke a macro using a command line parameter. The specific command line parameters to invoke a macro are the /A
and /MXE commands. Both the macexp.exe and the meproc.exe programs may be used. See the command line
parameters help section for more detail.
Via Windows Explorer

Double clicking on a playable macro file (.MXE) from within Windows Explorer will execute the macro.
Run Macro Now

Run a macro from the Macro Explorer by using the Run Macro Now option. Right click on the macro in the Macro Explorer
and then left click on the Run Macro Now menu item.
Windows API Calls
This option is only intended for the programmer who wants to add macro functionality directly from their own programs.
While the command line parameter options can be used via another program, the following method may be much quicker
and remove the overhead of having to run an external program such as macexp.exe or meproc.exe.
You can instruct the Macro Express Player to directly execute a macro in the currently loaded macro file by specifying its
nickname or you can instruct it to run a playable macro. The macro nickname is case sensitive. If your macro is named
QZStart you must specify QZStart, not qzstart, QZSTART, Qzstart, QZstart, or QzStart. If you have more than one macro
with the same nickname, only the first one found in the macro file will be activated.
The following examples demonstrate the basic steps of how to activate a macro using Windows API messages and are
presented in several different programming languages. These examples assume that you are familiar with basic Windows
API commands and terminology. The process involves posting a series of messages directly to the Macro Express Player.
These examples use the message WM_USER+20 to run a macro within the currently loaded macro file. To run a playable
macro, change the messages in the examples from WM_USER+20 to WM_USER+21.
Example: Delphi
var
i
: integer;
S : string;
Hwnd : THandle;
begin
Hwnd := FindWindow('TMainWin', 'Macro Express Player');
if(IsWindow(Hwnd)) then
begin
S := MacroName;
for i := 1 to length(S) do
PostMessage(Hwnd, WM_USER+20, ord(S[i]), 0);
PostMessage(Hwnd, WM_USER+20, 0, 0);
end
else
ShowMessage('Macro Express is not running');
end;
Example: C/C++/Visual C
HWND hwnd = FindWindow(TMainWin, Macro Express Player);
if( IsWindow(hwnd) ) {
for(int x = 0; x < strlen(s); x ++)
PostMessage(hwnd, WM_USER+20, s[i], 0);
PostMessage(hwnd, WM_USER+20, 0, 0);
}
else
MessageBox(GetForegroundWindow(), Macro Express is not running, Error, 0);
Example: VBA
Private Declare Function FindWindow _
Lib "User32" Alias "FindWindowA" ( _
ByVal lpClassName As String, _
ByVal lpWindowName As String) As Long
Private Declare Function PostMessage _
Lib "User32" Alias "PostMessageA" ( _
ByVal hwnd As Long, _
ByVal wMsg As Long, _
ByVal wParam As Long, _
ByVal lParam As Long) As Long
Private Sub RunMacro()

'Runs a macro express macro
Const WM_USER = &H400
Const Command = WM_USER+20
Const Macroname = "Macroname"
Dim hwnd, I, Result As Long
hwnd = FindWindow("TMainWin", "Macro Express Player")
For I = 1 To Len(Macroname)
Result = PostMessage(hwnd, Command, Asc(Mid(Macroname, I, 1)), 0)
Next I
Result = PostMessage(hwnd, Command, 0, 0)
End Sub
HotKeys
A hotkey is a combination of keys that, when pressed together, will play back a macro. Macro Express allows hotkey
combinations of a single key up to four keys pressed simultaneously.
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Add Macro
If you want to activate a new macro with a hotkey, make sure the HotKey choice is selected in the Add Macro window.
Place the cursor in the edit box and hold down the hotkey combination that you want to use. That combination will be
placed in the edit box. This is the hotkey combination you will press to activate the macro. If you are not sure which
combination to use, scroll through the list of keys and highlight the one you want. This will also place the hotkey
combination in the edit box.
After selecting the hotkey combination, click on the method you want to use to create the macro. You can create the
macro using the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
List of HotKeys Available

Macro Express supports over 725 different key combinations. Playback of a series of keystrokes and mouse clicks and
movements can be assigned to each of the hotkeys. The following is a comprehensive list of available hotkeys:
<CTRL> <Alpha Character>
<CTRL> <Numeric>
<CTRL> <FKey>
<CTRL> <Mouse Click>
<ALT> <Alpha Character>
<ALT> <Numeric>
<ALT> <FKey>
<ALT> <Mouse Click>
<WIN> <Alpha Character>
<WIN> <Numeric>
<WIN> <FKey>
<WIN> <Mouse Click>
<CTRL> <SHIFT> <Alpha Character>
<CTRL> <SHIFT> <Numeric>
<CTRL> <SHIFT> <FKey>
<CTRL> <SHIFT> <Mouse Click>

<CTRL> <ALT> <Alpha Character>
<CTRL> <ALT> <Numeric>
<CTRL> <ALT> <FKey>
<CTRL> <ALT> <Mouse Click>
<ALT> <SHIFT> <Alpha Character>
<ALT> <SHIFT> <Numeric>
<ALT> <SHIFT> <FKey>
<ALT> <SHIFT> <Mouse Click>
<CTRL> <WIN> <Alpha Character>
<CTRL> <WIN> <Numeric>
<CTRL> <WIN> <FKey>
<CTRL> <WIN> <Mouse Click>
<ALT> <WIN> <Alpha Character>
<ALT> <WIN> <Numeric>
<ALT> <WIN> <FKey>
<ALT> <WIN> <Mouse Click>
<CTRL> <ALT> <SHIFT> <Alpha Character>
<CTRL> <ALT> <SHIFT> <Numeric>
<CTRL> <ALT><SHIFT> <FKey>
<FKEY>
<SHIFT><FKEY>
<SHIFT> <Mouse Click>
The following keys can be used by themselves as single key presses:
Insert Key
Delete Key
Home Key
End Key
The following characters can be used with <CTRL>, <ALT>, <SHIFT><ALT>, <CTRL><ALT>, <CTRL><SHIFT> and
<CTRL><ALT><SHIFT>:
\,./;'[]-=`
The following characters can be used with <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <SHIFT><ALT>, <CTRL><ALT>,
<CTRL><SHIFT> and <CTRL><ALT><SHIFT> along with the character by itself:
/ on the Numeric Keypad
* on the Numeric Keypad
- on the Numeric Keypad
+ on the Numeric Keypad
Page Up Key
Page Down Key
Left Arrow Key
Right Arrow Key
Up Arrow Key
Down Arrow Key
The following special keys can be used with <SHIFT>, <CTRL>, <ALT>, <SHIFT><ALT>, <CTRL><ALT>,
<CTRL><SHIFT> and <CTRL><ALT><SHIFT>:
Enter Key
Space Key***
Tab Key*
Backspace Key
Insert Key
Delete Key**
Home Key
End Key
* <ALT> and <ALT><SHIFT> are not available
** <CTRL><ALT> and <CTRL><ALT><SHIFT> are not available
*** <WIN> key can also be used by itself with the space key
Shortkeys
A shortkey is a set of characters such as abc, myname, etc. When the characters are typed into an application, the macro
runs. If you want to create a new macro with a shortkey, click on the shortkey option to display the shortkey edit box. In
this field enter a series of characters from two to 10 characters in length.
After entering the shortkey name, click on the option you want for creating the macro. You can create the macro using
the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
Note: Before using the Shortkey option you may want to first define the Shortkey default settings. Click on Options |
Preferences | Shortkeys to make your settings.
Shortkey Specifications
Up to 10 characters may be entered as an original short key. In addition, up to 3 Prefix Keys may optionally be used and
are applied to all Original Shortkeys created. The following Prefix characters may be entered and used:
The letters A through Z (both upper and lower case)
The numbers 0 through 9
The following characters: ! @ # $ % ^ & _ = < > ? . ; , * - / + ` ' " ) ] and space bar
If you choose not to use a prefix key, you can use the suffix key option and press the space bar, the enter key or a suffix
character of . , : ; ? ! or - after typing the shortkey to activate the macro.
Schedule Activation
Scheduled Macros are macros that can be scheduled to play back at a specific time. Just set the schedule for the macro
and it will play back unattended at the designated time. No need to press a hotkey or click on an icon. The macro will
play back at the time you specified. In order for your macro to execute, Macro Express must be running in the
background.
There are a number of scheduling options available. These are described briefly below.
At Startup -Running a macro At Startup instructs Macro Express to immediately execute the scheduled macro
when Macro Express first starts up. If you have Macro Express in your Start Up group, then this type of macro
would play back when you first start Windows.
Once - Running a macro Once lets you select one specific date and one specific time when you want the macro
to run.
Hourly - An Hourly macro lets you run the macro over and over at a specific time each hour.
Daily - A Daily macro allows you to run the macro once each day. You can also specify which days of the week
that you want the macro to run.
Weekly - A Weekly macro allows you to pick one day of the week and the time during that day to run the macro.
Monthly - A Monthly macro allows you to run the macro at a specified time on the same day of the month each
month.
Time Out - Setting the schedule with the Time Out option will play back the macro after the computer has been
idle (no keyboard or mouse activity) for the number of minutes you specify. This option allows you up to 720
minutes after the computer has been idled.
Other -The Other option lets you repetitively run a macro every XX number of minutes or seconds. The intervals
can be between 1second and 99999 minutes and 59 seconds. If you schedule a macro to run every 1 second and
the macro takes 5 seconds to execute, then this function will not operate properly. If you plan to use macros that
will run more frequently than every 10 seconds, you will need to change the Scheduler Frequency default setting.
The default instructs Macro Express to check every 10 seconds to see if a scheduled macro is ready to play back.
You will need to reduce this number in order for scheduled macros to play back more frequently.
Load File - This option instructs the macro to play back when the macro file containing the macro is first loaded.
Select Schedule to activate the Scheduler. Then select the time frame that you want.
After selecting the desired schedule, click on the method you want to use to create the macro. You can create the macro
using the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
Note: Macro not Playing Back
Screen Savers will prevent a scheduled macro from operating correctly. Focus cannot be given to a program if a screen
saver is running. Also, the security measures built into the "Lock Workstation" function of Windows will prevent Macro
Express from executing a macro.
A scheduled macro will not play back if you are capturing a macro.
Note: Playback Accuracy
The accuracy of a scheduled macro is not guaranteed. There are a variety of things that may cause the scheduled macro
to not play at the exact time specified. For example, if another macro is running when a scheduled macro should run, the
scheduled macro will be delayed. Sometimes several macros can be queued up waiting to run. The scheduled macro may
not run until all other queued macros run.
By default, the Macro Express Schedulers Timer Interval is set to 10 seconds. This means that Macro Express will only
check every 10 seconds to see if a scheduled macro should run. If your macro should run at 11:01 AM, it may not run
until 10 seconds later. To increase the accuracy of a scheduled macro, click Options | Preferences | Scheduler and
change the Timer Interval to Check every 1 seconds. This causes Macro Express to use more CPU cycles but this should
not be noticeable on faster computers.
Also, the load of other programs running on your computer can affect when a scheduled macro will run.
Scheduling - At Startup
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Add Macro > Schedule
Running a macro At Startup instructs Macro Express to immediately execute the scheduled macro when Macro Express
first starts up. If you have Macro Express in your Start Up folder, then the macro will play back as soon as Windows
starts.
Options
Time Frame
You may specify certain times of the day when you want the macro to play back. In the example above, the macro will
only play back from 7:00 AM to 9:00 AM. If you were to restart Macro Express at 10:00AM the macro would not play
back because it is outside of the specified time period.
Date Period
You may specify a range of dates that the macro will work. In the example above, the macro will work between January
11, 2012 and January 10, 2013. After this date the macro will no longer function, unless you modify the dates. You could
set this up so that the macro would begin working a week or a month from the date you created the macro.
Play Macro Indefinitely
If you are not concerned with a Time Frame or Date Period, just place a check next to Play Macro Indefinitely. This will
play the macro back every time you want start Macro Express, on the days of the week selected. This will continue
indefinitely.
Days of Week
You may select which days of the week you want the macro to run. You may not want the macro to play back on
weekends, so you would just remove the checks from Saturday and Sunday as in the image above.
Scheduling - Once
Running a macro Once lets you select one specific date and one specific time when you want the macro to run. In this
example, the macro is set to run at 10:00AM on January 11, 2012. Once it runs on this date, it will not run again.
Scheduling Hourly
Running a macro Hourly lets you run the macro over and over at a specific time each hour or every xx number of hours.
Setting an Hourly Schedule

With the Play Macro Indefinitely option checked select the (Start at) hour of the day that you want the macro to play
back. Next select how many minutes after the hour you want the macro to begin. You may also select to have the macro
play every hour or every several hours.
If you don't want to have the macro play back indefinitely, then remove the check next to this option. You will need to
set a start and stop time for the macro. You will also need to set a start date and an end date for the macro. The From
and Between options will be highlighted so that you can set your start and finish dates and times. You can have the
macro set to run for several weeks, months or years and limit it to run during business hours or some other time frame.
As with the other option enter the time and frequency. The Start At time field will not be accessible for this option. In the
example above, the macro is scheduled to play back 15 minutes after the hour every four hours. So the first time the
macro will play back is at 12:15 PM and then again at 4:15PM and so on.
Scheduling - Daily
Running a macro Daily allows you to run the macro once each day. You can also specify which days of the week that you
want the macro to run or have the macro run every xx number of days.
Setting a Daily Schedule

With the Play Macro Indefinitely option checked, select a date that you want the macro to begin working. You can set
this to today's date, three weeks from now or any other date. Set the time that you would like the macro to play back.
You can select to have the macro play back every day, every other day, every ten days, etc. Or use the Selected Days
option to select the days of the week for the macro to execute.
set a start date and an end date for the macro. The Between option will be highlighted so that you can set your start and
finish dates. You can have the macro set to run for several days, weeks, months or years. As with the other option enter
the time, frequency or days of the week. The From time and Start On date fields will not be accessible for this option.
Scheduling - Weekly
Running a macro Weekly allows you to pick a day of the week and the time during that day to run the macro.
Setting a Weekly Schedule

this to today's date, three weeks from now or any other date. Set the time that you would like the macro to play back.
You can select to have the macro play back every week, every two weeks, every three weeks, etc. Lastly, select the day
of the week for the macro to execute.
finish dates. You can have the macro set to run for several weeks, months or years. As with the other option enter the
time, frequency and day of week. The From time and Start On date fields will not be accessible for this option.
Scheduling - Monthly
Running a macro Monthly allows you to run the macro at a specified time on the same day of the month each month.
Setting a Monthly Schedule

this to today's date, three weeks from now or any other date. Set the time that you would like the macro to play back
each month. You then have the option to select the day of the month, such as the first, 15th, 20th or any. Or you can
select an option such as the one displayed above - the second Wednesday of each month. You can select the first,
second, third, fourth, fifth or last day of any day of the week. The third date option is to simply select the last day of the
month. Lastly, select the frequency that the macro will execute. You can set this to monthly, bimonthly, quarterly or any
other combination. You can set up annual events by setting the frequency to every 12 months.
finish dates. You can have the macro set to run for several months or years. As with the other option enter the time, day
of the month and monthly frequency. The From time and Start On date fields will not be accessible for this option.
Scheduling - Time Out
Setting the schedule with the Time Out option will play back the macro after the computer has been idle (no keyboard or
mouse activity) for the number of minutes you specify. This option allows you up to 720 minutes after the computer has
been idled.
There are two fields in the Time Out section where you can enter a number of minutes. The second value is the amount
of computer idle time required. The first value is the amount of time Macro Express will wait before initially starting the
macro.
Example
In the image above, the scheduler will wait for the system to be
idle for 15 minutes. It will then wait 2 minutes before running the
macro.
If the macro does not require use of the keyboard or mouse, it
will play back again in 2 minutes.
If the macro does change the idle status of the computer, then
the macro will not play back again until the system has been idle
for 15 minutes and then the 2 minute wait period.
Scheduling - Other
The Other option lets you repetitively run a macro every XX number of minutes and/or seconds. The intervals can be
between 1second and 99999 minutes and 59 seconds. If you schedule a macro to run every 1 second and the macro
takes 5 seconds to execute, then this function will not operate properly. If you plan to use macros that will run more
frequently than every 10 seconds, you will need to change the Scheduler Frequency default setting. This setting instructs
Macro Express to check every 10 seconds to see if a scheduled macro is ready to play back. You will need to reduce this
number in order for scheduled macros to play back more frequently.
Options
Time Frame
only play back every 30 minutes from 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM. At 5:30 PM the macro would not play back because it is
outside of the specified time period. In the example above, if you close Macro Express 20 minutes after the macro ran,
the macro will not run again 10 minutes after you restart Macro Express. The "clock" resets and the macro will play back
after the full 30 minutes has elapsed, since Macro Express was restarted. The same situation applies if you disable a
macro.
Date Period
If you are not concerned with a Time Frame or Date Period, just place a check next to Play Macro Indefinitely. The macro
will play back every 30 minutes. This will continue indefinitely.
Scheduling - At File Load
This is similar to the At Startup schedule with one difference. Any time that the macro file containing your scheduled
macro is loaded, the macro will run. So if you are starting up Macro Express in the morning, the file loads and the macro
will play back. If you open another macro file and then open your original file that contains your scheduled macro, then
the macro will also execute.
Options
Time Frame
only play back from 7:00 AM to 5:00 PM. If you were to start Macro Express with the specified file loaded, at 6:00 PM,
the macro would not play back because it is outside of the specified time period.
Date Period
If you are not concerned with a Time Frame or Date Period, just place a check next to Play Macro Indefinitely. This will
play the macro back every time you want start Macro Express, on the days of the week selected. This will continue
indefinitely.
Days of Week
You may select which days of the week you want the macro to run. You may not want the macro to play back on
weekends, so you would just remove the checks from Saturday and Sunday as in the image above.
Window Title
Using this option will instruct the macro to execute any time the Window Title you specify has focus. In other words,
once the window is activated the macro will play back.
Selecting the Window Title option will display the above window. In the edit box, enter the title of the Window that you
want the macro to play back in. The title of the window is that which appears in the caption bar of a window. Macro
Express examines all Window Titles running on the computer in an attempt to find a match.
The Window Title does not need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you wanted to switch to
the Windows Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful as some Window Titles
change based on whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required. For example, "NOTepad" will work as well
as "notepad".
After typing in the Window Title name,click on the option you want for creating the macro. You can create the macro
using the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
No Activation
It is possible to create a macro and not assign any activation key to the macro. There are two primary uses for the No
Activation option. First, you can create generic macro templates that can be incorporated into other macros - a set of
instructions that you might find useful for insertion into several other macros. The Macro Run command will allow you to
insert a No Activation macro into other macros.
A second use for this option is to just place the macro in a popup or floating menu. You may not want to assign the
macro to a hotkey or shortkey for fear of accidentally invoking the macro. The only way to invoke the macro would be
through the popup or floating menu.
After selecting No Activation, click on the option you want to use to create the macro. You can create the macro using
the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
Popup Menu
A popup menu is a menu of macros you have previously created. The menu window can be activated by pressing a
hotkey of your choice or designating a system tray icon. Then either double click on the macro in the menu to run that
macro or press the number or letter in the menu associated with the macro you want.
Selecting a Popup Menu will activate the above Window, requesting a hotkey to assign to activate the menu. After
selecting the hotkey that you want to use to activate the popup menu, click on the Build Menu button to open the Build
Macro Menu window. In this window you can select which macros to include in the menu and the menu style.
Mouse Activation
You can create macros to run when the mouse button is clicked. To do this, first select the Mouse Click option to display
the mouse options shown above. Macro activation may be assigned to the Left, Middle or Right mouse buttons.
There are two different types of mouse activation available, Area on Screen or Window Part.
Area on Screen
You can define regions on the screen that can be activated with a mouse click. Clicking on the defined area will trigger
the macro. This option requires that you input four pixel coordinates - Left, Top, Right, and Bottom. The area within
these four pixel coordinates is the area you can click on to run the macro.
Locator
Click on the Locator button to launch this small utility to help you quickly define the pixel coordinates. After the
locator is running, move your mouse to the upper left corner of the region you want to define. Press Ctrl+Space to
insert the pixel coordinates in the Left and Top fields. Then move your mouse to the lower right corner of the region
you want to define. Press Alt+Space to insert the pixel coordinates into the Right and Bottom fields. this is a
test.Press OK to save the coordinates.
What you have done is define a square or rectangular area on the screen. The macro runs when you click inside this
area.
Window Part
You can define a macro to run by clicking on a part of a window. Parts include the window border, window title bar,
window menu, horizontal scroll bar, vertical scroll bar, system menu, minimize button and maximize button.
Note: A few options have been excluded where they will interfere with Windows. These include such things as Left
Mouse with the Maximize or Minimize buttons.
After selecting the mouse option, click on the Scripting Editor, Direct Editor or Capture button to create the macro.
Floating Menu
A floating menu has the same form and options as a Popup Menu except that it always remains on top and is always
accessible as long as the Macro Player is running. A floating menu can be minimized to just the caption bar to free up
space if needed. Multiple floating menus can be created. The last location of the floating menu is retained and used with
subsequent runs of Macro Express.
Select the Floating Menu option and then click on the Build Menu button to open the Build Macro Menu window. In this
window you can select which macros you want to include in your floating menu, and other details.
Control Activation
For our purposes, Control refers to the identifiable parts of a specific application window. Controls may include such
things as a button, an edit box, a toolbar, a window title bar or others. The control may be part of the main application
window or be part of a child window (a window within a window).
With Control Activation selected, the macro will play back when the control is active or the window with the control is
active. In the example above the control name is listed. The program .exe is named and then the window component
that must be active in order for the macro to play back.
Control on Top
This option only requires that the control part of the window is currently active or on top.
Control Focused
This option requires that the control be part of the active window and the control must have focus. For example the
mouse cursor could be in an edit box, giving focus to this control. Or a button may be highlighted and have control.
Get Control
Below is an image of the Capture Window Control window that appears when you launch the control utility. Essentially
you just place the mouse cursor on the crosshair image, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse over the
control you want. You can drag this over title bars, buttons, edit boxes, forms, toolbars, etc. As you drag the mouse over
these different controls, you'll see the Class Name and Window Text fields populated with the corresponding information.
Once you have selected the control you want, release the left mouse button. Click on the Save button to return to the
Add Macro window. The control name will be saved in this window.
Note: Not every button, menu item or component on a program is actually a Control. Sometimes the only control in a
given program is the window or dialog that pops up when the program starts. We have also noticed that many of
Microsoft's programs seem to have fewer controls than programs from other manufacturers. How the controls work will
depend upon the way the program you are working with is designed.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Stopping a Macro
Once you have started a macro, you may find times when you need to stop the macro before it is complete. There are
several ways to do this.
Aborting a Macro
If you have selected to display the Running icon when a macro is running, right mouse click on the icon in the System
tray to stop the macro. Or you may press the Scroll Lock and Pause keys to stop the macro. This is the default hotkey.
You can change the default to Win + ` or the Pause key by going to Options | Preferences | Playback.
Any of these options will cancel a macro that is playing. However, please note that macros that consist of a lot of
keystrokes can send the keystrokes rather quickly and Windows will buffer up the keystrokes. Once such commands have
been buffered up in Windows, aborting a macro will not cancel them. In these cases, it may appear that the abort
command did not work when in reality the macro has already finished issuing its commands and Windows is now
processing them.
Note: The Timed Delay in Seconds command and the Wait for Time to Elapse command suspend Macro Express for the
amount of time specified. During this delay time the macro cannot be terminated.
Macro Stop
The Macro Stop command allows you to stop the execution of a macro before the macro steps have completed. You
would insert the Macro Stop command into your macro script. Whenever this line in the macro is reached, the macro will
terminate. In most cases you would use this command in conjunction with a conditional statement. For example, if a
desired condition is not met, terminate the macro.
Macro Explorer
Actions
The icons in the Actions column are the primary methods for navigating through the program. Click on any of these icons
to load a different program function.
Categories
If you have created quite a few macros, you may find it convenient to use the optional category function. This "category"
section allows you to assign each macro to a category you define. For example you can create a Password category to
hold any macros containing important passwords or assign any MS Word specific macros to a MS Word category. This
makes it easy to find the macros you want - for a quick edit or change. A macro may only be assigned to one category.
The same macro cannot be placed in multiple categories.
The category option may be turned on or off via the Appearance window. From this window, place a check in the box
next to Show Categories to display the category listings. The category column appears on the left side of the Macro
Explorer. In the Macro Explorer you can add, delete and rename categories.
When the program is first installed, there are two default categories - All Categories and Unassigned.
Macros
By default, the program opens to the Macro Explorer pane. This pane displays the list of macros in the file that you
currently have open. The program comes with five System Macros that cannot be removed as they are essential parts of
the program. When saving macros in the editors, quick wizards or with a macro capture, the program will return to the
Macro Explorer. The list of macro information is displayed in four columns.
Activation - This displays the method you selected to execute the macro. This column displays the hotkey
combinations, any scheduled macros, the letter combinations used for any shortkeys or any other type of
activation method you selected. Popup menus or floating menus can be created for easier execution of macros.
Nickname - You can assign a nickname to any macro so that you can more readily identify the purpose of the
macro. You do not have to assign nicknames to macros. This is an optional function. Any not assigned will show
as a blank field.
Scope - This column lists whether the macro is global, global except, window specific, program specific, a
system macro, a popup menu or a floating menu. A global macro will play back in any Windows application. A
global except macro will play back in any Windows application except the one(s) you specify. A window specific
macro will only execute in the window that you designate. If the window is not active the macro will not play
back A program specific macro will only execute in the program that you designate. If the program is not active
the macro will not play back.
Modified - This displays the date that the macro was last modified.
Sorting Macros
To quickly sort the list of macros displayed, click on one of the column headers, Nickname, Activation, Scope or Modified.
The macros will be sorted in order based on the column header you selected. Click on the header again and it will reverse
the sort order. For additional sorting options click on Options | Sort Macros | Custom.
Right Click Context Menu

There are a number of options available if you right mouse click on a macro in the macro list. A menu will appear. The
options include Run Macro Now, Copy Macro, Edit with Scripting Editor, Edit with Direct Editor, Enable/Disable Macro,
Rename, Delete Macro and Properties.
Listing of Keyboard Shortcuts

Below is a listing of the Keyboard Shortcuts available in the Macro Explorer.
Keystroke
Action
Ctrl+F
Find (text in Nickname field)
F3
Find Again
Delete
Delete macro
Below is a list of the keystroke equivalents for navigating through the program. These keystrokes would be the same as
clicking on the Actions Icons in the left hand column of the program.
Keystroke
Action
Alt+V E
Macro Explorer
Alt+V S
Scripting Editor
Alt+V D
Direct Editor
Alt+M A
Capture (the same as Add Macro)
Alt+V Q
Quick Wizards
Alt+V R
Recycle Bin
System Macros
Macro Express Explorer > Right Click on System Macro > Left Click on Properties
Macro Express defines several system macros for a variety of program functions. These macros can be renamed at any
time to something that may be easier for you to remember.
Renaming a System Macro
To rename a system macro, right mouse click on the macro displayed in the Macro Explorer. From the menu that
appears, left click on Properties to open the System Macro Properties window. Click on the Set HotKey button next to
the System Macro you want to edit. Select a hotkey from the list that may be simpler to remember and click OK. The
new hotkey will display in the Activation column of the Macro Explorer.
Menu of Macros for Top Most Window

Pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Z hotkey opens a window listing all macros that are specifically defined for the current
window you are working in.
You can define what information you want displayed in this popup menu. The popup menu will display the icons you
have associated with the macros, show the name and activation method defined for each macro in the menu, display the
first part of a macro - the first line of two of a macro or display a Windows default menu. Click on the option you want to
have it displayed in the popup menu.
Resume Pause
If you have inserted a pause into your macro, instead of using the mouse to click the "Resume" button, you can press
down the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+Y hotkey to resume the macro.
Run Macro Express Editor

Pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+W hotkey activates the Macro Express editor. It will bring the editor program to the forefront
from its hidden or minimized state. This is a simple way to activate the program without using the mouse.
Start/Stop Capture
When you are ready to begin capturing keystrokes or mouse movements for a macro, press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+X to start
capturing. When you are finished capturing, press Ctrl+Alt+Shift+X again to stop recording. You can also press the
hotkey combination that you are defining to stop the capture process.
Terminate Macro Express

Pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+V system hotkey will terminate Macro Express. If you have the program set to run
completely hidden, you will need to use this command to close Macro Express.
Suspend / Resume Macro Express

Pressing the Ctrl+Alt+Shift+U system hotkey will toggle between suspending Macro Express and resuming its active
status. No macros will play back while Macro Express is suspended.
Another way to suspend the program is to right mouse click on the Macro Express icon in the system tray. Left click on
Suspend from the menu that opens. The menu item will display Resume when the program is suspended. The icon in the
system tray is changed to a red circle with a line through it when Macro Express is suspended.
File Menu
New Macro File
Macro Express allows you to create multiple files with different macros in each file. Click on the File | New File option to
create a new file. A dialog box appears prompting you to name the file and place it into the desired folder.
Open Macro File

Click on this option to open a macro file you have previously created. A dialog box appears prompting you to select the
file and choose from which folder.
Save Macro File As

Select this option to make a copy of the macro file currently open. Save the file with a new name and select a location for
saving the file.
Backup
This option will immediately make a backup of the macro file that is currently open. If you have opted to set up a back
up schedule, this option will not disturb the schedule you have created. It will follow the settings that are selected in the
option, such as where the backup will be saved and how many backup copies will be created.
Restore
Use this option to restore from a backup file. A Windows dialog will open prompting to select the backup file. The dialog
opens to the folder designated in the Backup preferences panel for file backups. If the backup options were recently
changed, then it may be necessary to browse to the location where previous backups were stored.
Reopen
This is a convenient way to open a macro file previously used. This option displays the last five macro files that you have
used. Click on the file you want to load into Macro Express.
Import
There are three different import options available in Macro Express. Click on the topic of interest below to obtain more
information.
Import Macros
Import Text File
Import a Playable Macro
Export
There are three different export options available in Macro Express. Click on the topic of interest below to obtain more
information.
Export Macros
Output Macro Information
Export as Playable Macro
Print Macro List

Click on File | Print Macro List or click on the speed button to print a list of all macros currently assigned. The list will
contain the activation method, such as the hotkey combination used, the nickname assigned, if any, and macro scope
(global, system, window specific or program specific). The list will include the information as shown in the Macro Explorer
pane.
Printer Font
Use this option to select font settings for printing the macro list. Select font size, color, type, etc.
Printer Setup
Select this option to ensure printer settings are accurate before printing the macro list.
Terminate Macro Express Editor

Selecting this option closes the Editor but will leave the player running. Your macros will still run with the Editor closed.
Terminate Macro Express Editor and Player

Selecting this option closes the Editor and Player, shutting down the entire program, preventing any macros from
running.
Importing Macros
The import and export functions are a convenient way to transfer macros between Macro Express users. Use the
Export command to save your macros to a USB drive or some other media. On another computer, import the macros
from the USB drive or other device.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Import > Import Macros
To import macros, click on File | Import | Import Macros. An empty Import Macros window will appear. Click on the Open
File button to open an existing Macro Express macro file. A standard dialog box will appear so that you can browse
through your folders to find the correct file.
All Macro Express macro files have a file extension of .MEX. Highlight the file you want to import and click on Open. A list
of all macros found in that file will be shown. Highlight the macros you want to import by clicking on each macro. Then
click the Import button. An Import Complete message will appear. Click OK and then click Exit to return to the Macro
Explorer. This finishes the process and the macros have been imported into your current file.
If you want to import all of the macros, click on the Select All button which will highlight all macros. Then click the OK
button. Pressing the Clear button will remove the highlight from any macros already selected.
Note: It is also possible to import or export popup menu macros along with the macros that were in them and have
them correlate correctly after the import or export. This can be done as long as the macros in the popup menu are
imported or exported at the same time as the popup menu. Any macro that is not imported or exported along with the
popup menu will be removed from the popup menu as an entry.
Import Text File

Selecting File | Import | Import Text File from the Macro Explorer menu allows you to import a group of shortkey or
hotkey macros. A standard Windows dialog box opens prompting you to navigate and select the text file to import.
The text file must be in a specific format. An improper format will cause unpredictable results. The format requires an
<ITEM NAME> tag followed by the shortkey or hotkey name on the first line. The hotkey names to use are the names
used in the Macro Express editor when selecting to add a new hotkey macro. If a match is not made on one of these,
then it is assumed that the name given is a shortkey. The next line contains the nickname of the macro. The following
line or set of lines contains the macro text. The macro text can span multiple lines. The next macro to be imported will
again start with the <ITEM NAME> tag starting on a new line.
Example:
This example shows the format for two shortkey macros followed by a hotkey macro to be
imported.
<ITEM NAME>issadd
Our Address
Insight Software Solutions, Inc.
P.O. Box 106
Kaysville, UT 84037
<ITEM NAME>Lic1
License Info
Licensor grants to Licensee a non-exclusive and non-transferable license to use Macro
Express upon the terms and conditions set forth in this Agreement.
<ITEM NAME>Ctrl+Shift+T
Text File Import
The text file must be in a specific format. An improper format will cause unpredictable
results. The format requires an "<ITEM NAME> tag followed by the shortkey or hotkey
name on one line. The hotkey names to use are the names used in the Macro Express
editor when selecting to add a new hotkey macro. If a match is not made on one of these,
then it is assumed that the name given is a shortkey. The next line contains the nickname
of the macro. The following line or set of lines contains the macro text. The macro text can
span multiple lines. The next macro to be imported will again start with the "<ITEM
NAME> tag starting on a new line.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Import > Import Text File
Import a Playable Macro

A "Playable Macro" file format is available. Files with an .MXE file extension are similar to .EXE files. Double clicking on
the .MXE file from within Windows Explorer will play back the macro. Macro Express is not required to be running to
execute the .MXE macro, though installation of the Macro Express player is necessary. The .MXE file may also be
executed from a command line parameter to run a batch file.
This option is used for importing a playable macro from another machine on a network or from a disk that contains a
playable macro and converting it to a .MEX macro. Click on File | Import | Import a Playable Macro. A box will appear
allowing you to search your disc or drive to import the .MXE file. Once located, highlight the file you want to import and
click OK to import the file. The Copy HotKey window opens prompting you to assign a hotkey activation or another
method for executing the macro. This will place the imported macro into your regular list of macros in the Macro
Explorer.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Import > Import a Playable Macro
Exporting Macros
The import and export functions are a convenient way to transfer macros between Macro Express users. Use the Export
command to save your macros to a USB drive or some other medium. On another computer, Import the macros from the
USB drive or other device.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Export > Export Macros
To export macros, click on File | Export | Export Macros. A window will be presented showing all macros from the macro
file you are currently working with. Highlight the macros you want exported and click the Save File button. A standard
windows box will appear asking you to name the file and select a destination folder. The new file created will be a Macro
Express macro (.mex) file which can be opened directly by Macro Express using the File | Open Macro File menu or the
macros may be imported.
If you want to export all of the macros in the file, click on the Select All button which will highlight all macros. Then click
the Save File button. Pressing the Clear button will "de-select" any macros already highlighted.
Note: It is possible to import or export popup menu macros along with the macros that were in them and have them
correlate correctly after the import or export. This can be done as long as the macros in the popup menu are imported or
exported at the same time as the popup menu. Any macro that is not imported or exported along with the popup menu
will be removed from the popup menu as an entry.
Output Macro Information

With this option you can select what information you want to save out to a text file. As shown in the window below, place
a check in the boxes of the items you want to output by clicking on those items. After selecting those items, click OK. A
standard dialog box will prompt you to select a file name and folder destination for storing this information. The Icon
option will list the names of the icons used. The information can then be printed in any text editor.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Export > Output Macro Information
Export as Playable Macro

A "Playable Macro" file format is available. Files with an .MXE file extension are similar to .EXE files. Double clicking on
the .MXE file from within Windows Explorer or My Computer will play back the macro. Macro Express is not required to be
running to execute the .MXE macro, though installation of the Macro Express player is necessary. The .MXE file may also
be executed from a command line parameter to run a batch file or similar.
The "Export As Playable Macro" option allows you to export (or create) any defined macro as a playable macro. From the
Macro Explorer highlight the macro that you want to export. Next, click on File | Export | Export as Playable Macro. A box
will appear asking you to name the file and specify the location where to save the .MXE file. Clicking on the .MXE file
using Windows Explorer or My Computer will execute the macro.
Macro Express Explorer > File > Export > Export as Playable Macro
Add Macros
Click on Macros | Add Macros from the main window of the program to open the Add Macro window. Select the macro
activation method you want. Choose from HotKey, Shortkey, Scheduled Macro, Window Activated, Window Control,
Mouse Click, Popup or Floating Menus or No Activation. The program defaults to the HotKey activation.
HotKey
If you want to activate your new macro with a hotkey, make sure the hotkey choice is selected. The window will look like
the one above. Place the cursor in the edit box and hold down the hotkey combination that you want to use. That
combination will be placed in the edit box. This is the hotkey combination you will press to activate the macro, when
completed. If you are not sure which combination you want to use, scroll through the list of keys and highlight the one
you want. This will also place the hotkey combination in the edit box.
After selecting the hotkey combination, click on the option you want for creating the macro. You can create the macro
using the Scripting Editor, the Direct Editor or by Capturing the macro.
ShortKey
Selecting the Shortkey option activates the above window. In the edit box type in the shortkey (up to 10 characters) that
you want to use to activate the macro. A shortkey is a set of characters such as abc, myname, etc. When the characters
are typed into an application that accepts text input, the macro runs. This option will not trigger a macro from the
Windows desktop or other applications that do not accept text input. For a complete list of characters that can be used
with a shortkey, see the program specifications.
After typing in the shortkey name, click on the option you want for creating the macro. You can create the macro using
the Scripting Editor, Entering the Macro information directly or by Capturing the macro.
Note: Before using the Shortkey option you may want to first set the shortkey default settings. Click on Options |
Preferences | Shortkeys to define your settings.
Scheduled Macro
Select Schedule to activate the Scheduler options. Choose the schedule that you want and click on the Scripting Editor,
Direct Editor or Capture buttons to begin building the macro. The macro will play back at the time you have designated.
Window Title
This activation instructs the macro to execute any time the Window Title you specify has focus. In other words, once the
window is activated the macro will run.
In the edit box, enter the title of the Window that you want the macro to play back in. The title of the window is that
which appears in the caption bar of a window. Macro Express examines all Window Titles running on the computer in an
attempt to find a match.
The Window Title does not need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you wanted to switch to
the Windows Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful as some Window Titles
change based on whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required. For example, "NOTepad" will work as well
as "notepad".
After inserting the Window Title, click on the option you want for creating the macro. You can create the macro using the
Scripting Editor, Entering the Macro information directly or by Capturing the macro.
Popup Menu
Selecting a Popup Menu activates the above Window. After selecting the hotkey that you want to use to activate the
popup menu, click on the Build Menu button to open the Build Macro Menu window. In this window you can select which
macros you want to include in the popup menu. Also choose from several type menus to display.
Floating Menu
A floating menu has the same form and options as a Popup Menu except that it always remains on top and always
accessible as long as the Macro Player is running. A floating menu may be minimized to just the caption bar to free up
desktop space if needed. Multiple floating menus can be created. The last location of the floating menu is retained and
used with subsequent runs of Macro Express. Click on the Build Menu button to open the Build Macro Menu window. In
this window you can select which macros you want to include in the floating menu. Also choose from several type menus
to display.
Mouse Click
This option allows you to define macros activated by mouse clicks. Two different mouse options are available.
1. Define regions on the screen that can be assigned to the left, middle or right mouse button. Clicking on this area
will trigger the macro. Macros can be global, window or program specific.
2. Or click on part of a window to execute a macro. Window parts include the window border, window menu,
window caption bar, horizontal scroll bar, vertical scroll bar, system button, minimize button and maximize
button. Macros can be assigned to left, middle or right button and can be global, window or program specific. A
few options have been excluded where they will interfere with Windows. These include such things as Left Mouse
with the Maximize or Minimize buttons.
No Activation
There are at least two possible uses for the No Activation option. First, you can create generic macro templates that can
be incorporated into other macros - a set of instructions that you might find useful for insertion into several other
macros. The Run A Macro command will allow you to insert this macro into other macros.
The second possible use for this option is to just place the macro in a popup menu. You may not want to assign the
macro to a hotkey or short key for fear of accidentally invoking the macro. The only way to invoke the macro would be
through the popup menu.
Control
The Control option will activate a macro when a specific window control is active. The control may be a window button,
edit box or another identifiable portion of a window.
Copy Macro
Macro Express provides a simple method for copying of an existing macro. From the Macro Express - Explorer window
highlight the macro to copy. Then click on Macros | Copy Macro from the menu or the Copy Macro button on the toolbar
to open the Copy Macro window. Select the macro activation to use and click OK.
The new copied macro is listed in the Macro Explorer window. The macro nickname is designated as "Copy of ..." the
original macro name. Double click on the macro to edit in the Scripting Editor. Open the Properties tab and assign a new
nickname if desired.
Highlight macro in Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Copy Macro
Run Macro Now

This option does what its title implies. Highlight the macro that you want to run from the Macro Explorer. Click on Macros
| Run Macro Now and the macro will play back. Of course you'll need to make sure that the macro you want to run now
is appropriate for the windows you have open, etc.
Another way to run the macro is to right mouse click on the macro in the Macro Explorer. From the menu that appears,
left mouse click on the Run Macro Now menu item.
Highlight macro in Macro Express - Explorer > Macros > Run Macro Now
Recapture Macro
To overwrite the results of a previous captured macro, highlight the macro from the Macro Express Pro - Explorer list and
click on Macro | Recapture Macro. This opens the Capture a Macro window which allows you to check the capture
settings before recording. Then click the Capture button to start the macro capture.
Press the system hotkey Ctrl + Alt + Shift + X, right click on the camera icon in the system tray or press the hotkey
combination of the macro being recaptured to stop the capture.
Recapturing removes the contents of the existing macro and replaces it with the newly captured script.
Highlight macro in Macro Express - Explorer > Macros > Recapture Macro
Enable or Disable Macro

To temporarily disable a macro, highlight the macro from the list in the Macro Explorer. Then click on Macros | Disable
Macro. The disabled macro will appear italicized and grayed out in the Macro Explorer. The disabled macro will not
function again until it has been Enabled. To enable the macro, highlight the disabled macro with the mouse and click on
Macros | Enable Macro. The macro is now ready for use again.
If you close a floating menu by clicking on the "X" in the upper right corner of the menu window, the floating menu is
disabled. To enable the menu you will need to highlight the floating menu from the list of macros in the Macro
Explorer. Then click on Macros | Enable Macro.
You can also use the Macro Disable and Macro Enable commands in macros themselves to enable and disable other
macros in your macro file, such as Floating Menus.
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Disable Macro or Enable Macro
Search Explorer
If you have a large number of macros listed in the Macro Explorer, you may find this option to be a real time saver. This
will perform a search through the list of macro nicknames. It will perform the search beginning with the macro you have
highlighted and continue through the rest of the list.
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Search
Pressing CTRL + F or clicking on Macros | Search will open the Find window. Enter the word(s) you are looking for in the
Nickname field and press the Find Next button. If a match is found, the macro that matches will now be the highlighted
macro. If no match is found, a message will be displayed saying that you have "Reached the end of the list".
If your first match is not the macro you were looking for, press F3 or click on Macros | Search Again to go to the next
match.
Match Case
This option will make your search case sensitive. Capital and lower case letters will need to match exactly in order to find
the right match.
Delete Macro
To remove a macro that is no longer needed, first highlight that macro with your mouse from the list in the Macro
Explorer. Click on Macros | Delete Macro(s) or the Delete button on the toolbar. A window prompts you to verify that you
want to delete the macro. Select Yes to delete or No to cancel. You may also highlight a group of macros and delete
them all at the same time.
You can also use commands in macros themselves to delete other macros or to delete itself upon termination of the
macro. You may want to create a one-time reminder message and then have the message (macro) be removed after
playback. The Macro Commands function allows you to do this.
Deleted macros are sent to the Macro Express Recycle Bin. If you decide later that you need the deleted macro, you can
restore it from the Recycle Bin. Or you can periodically remove all macros from the Recycle Bin.
Highlight macro in Macro Express - Explorer > Macros > Delete Macro
Place on Desktop
You can place an icon on your desktop for any of the macros you have created. In order to do this, highlight the macro
you want to place on the desktop from the list of macros in the Macro Explorer. Then click on Macros | Place on Desktop.
The icon that you assigned to your macro will now be displayed on your desktop.
You can change a macro's icon by double clicking on the macro from the list of macros in the Macro Explorer. This action
opens the Scripting Editor or Direct Editor, depending on which is defined as your default editor. Click on the Properties
Tab and then click on the Change button in the icon section to select an icon. If an icon was not selected at the time the
macro was created, the default Macro Express icon is displayed.
Note 1: When you create an icon on the desktop, the macro nickname also becomes the file name. Windows will not
accept several characters in a file name, one of them being the /. Other characters not allowed are \ : * ? < > and |.
Note 2: To remove an icon from the desktop, right mouse click on the icon and select delete from the menu that opens.
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Place on Desktop
Macro Properties
This view of the Properties window may be accessed from the Macro Explorer. Highlight the macro of interest and click
on Macros | Properties from the Macro Explorer menu. Or right mouse click on the macro of interest and left click on
Properties from the context menu. The following information is available about the macro you have selected.
General
This Tab provides some basic information about the macro. You can change the status of the macro from active to
inactive or vice versa from this tab. You can also select a new icon to be associated with your macro from this tab.
You may also change the Macro Nickname. Just type over the existing nickname to rename the macro. Click Apply to
save the change.
Activation
This tab displays what macro activation(s) you have selected. The activation(s) may be modified from this screen.
Scope
The Scope tab displays what programs or windows you have selected the macro to work with. These selections may be
modified from this screen.
Script
The Script tab displays the macro script, similar to the format you would see in the Direct Editor. The macro script cannot
be altered in this tab. This must be done in the Scripting Editor or Direct Editor.
Security
The Security Tab allows you to make changes to the macro passwords defined or create new passwords.
Notes
This tab displays any notes you may have made about the macro. You may edit the notes in this field.
Log
The Log Tab displays any error logging that you may be tracking in the macro. Click on the Clear Log button to remove
all log entries. Place a check in the box next to Enable Error Log to start logging any error messages. Or if you have the
logging default set in the Preferences | Miscellaneous, the errors will be logged. This field is not editable.
Macro Categories
If you have created quite a few macros, you may find it handy to use the optional category
function. This optional "category" section allows you to assign each macro to a category you define. For example you can
create a Password category to hold any macros containing important passwords or assign any MS Word specific macros
to a MS Word category. This makes it easy to find the macros you want - for a quick edit or change. A macro may only
be assigned to one category. The same macro cannot be placed in multiple categories.
The category option may be turned on or off via the Appearance window. From this window, place a check in the box
next to Show Categories to display the category listings. The category column appears on the left side of the Macro
Explorer. In the Macro Explorer you can add, delete and rename categories.
When the program is first installed, there are two default categories - All Categories and Unassigned.
Add Category
Select this menu option to add a new category. A new category folder and edit box will appear in the category list. Type
in the name that you want to call the category. You may also create sub-categories within your list of categories. To do
this, right mouse click on the main folder and then left mouse click on New Category. A new category sub-folder will be
added to the list.
Rename Category
To change the name of a category you have already created, highlight the category and click on the Category | Rename
Category menu option. The category name will be highlighted and you can type in a new name. This is similar to
Windows Explorer.
Enable / Disable Macros

All macros in the highlighted category are disabled or enabled when this option is selected.
Delete Category
Highlight the name of the category that you want to remove. Then click on Category | Delete Category. A warning
message will appear verifying that you want to delete the category. Click yes to delete the category and any
sub-categories of that category.
Macro Express Explorer > Category
Placing Macros in Categories

Once you have created a category, drag the macro from the Macro Explorer list to the category you want. To drag the
macro, highlight the macro you want to assign to a new category. Hold down the left mouse button and move the pointer
to the category listed in the Category column. When the mouse is pointing to the category you want, release the left
mouse button. This will assign the macro to your category. Next, click on the category and your macro will be displayed
in that category. Only those macros assigned to that category will be displayed. The macro you just moved will also
remain in "All Categories".
Macro Express Explorer > Macros > Move to Category
You can also use the menu commands to assign macros to categories you have already created. Highlight the macro you
want to assign, then click on Macros | Move to Category. A list of categories will appear as in the example above.
Highlight the category you want and then press the OK button. Your macro will now be assigned to the category you
selected.
With either of the above options, you can highlight a block of macros and move them all at once to the category of your
choice.
Note: The categories you have selected are specific to the macro file that you currently have open. If you open a new
macro file, the categories will change to what you have assigned for that file.
Sort Macros
There are several options for sorting macros in the Macro Explorer. These options are accessible through the Options |
Sort Macros menu.
By Nickname
All macros in the Macro Explorer list are sorted by macro nickname. You can also click on the column header to sort.
Another click on the column header will reverse the sort order.
By Activation
This option alphabetically sorts all of the macros in the Macro Explorer list by macro activation. You can also click on the
column header to sort. Another click on the column header will reverse the sort order.
By Scope
All macros in the Macro Explorer list are sorted by macro scope. You can also click on the column header to sort. Another
click on the column header will reverse the sort order.
By Date
Sort all of the macros in the Macro Explorer list by the date the macro was last modified (edited). You can also click on
the column header to perform the sort. Another click on the column header will reverse the sort order.
Custom
Use this option to customize how you want the macros sorted. Below is a display of the sort window used to define the
sort order of macros displayed in the Macro Explorer.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Sort Macros > Custom
Primary Sort
You can select which item will be your primary sort. Highlight the item you want as your primary sort and click the up
arrow to move it to the number one (top) position. You can change the positions of any of the items by highlighting
it and then clicking on the up or down arrow. You can sort by Activation, Nickname, Scope or Modified Date/Time.
Make your selection and then use the Secondary Sort to further sort the Activation or Scope options.
Using the Nickname as primary sort would sort the names you assigned to each macro in alphabetical order. Any
macros not assigned a nickname will appear first in the list. The Modified Date/Time selection will sort the macros by
the date and time that the macro was last modified.
Secondary Sort
In this example, the primary sort is Activation so that the macros listed in the Macro Explorer are sorted by Activation
code. Based on the Secondary Sort example above (Activation column), all hotkeys are placed in alphabetical order
first. Next, all shortkeys are placed in alphabetical order, then the scheduled macros followed by the no activation
macros and those activated by a window title. Lastly, the mouse click activated macros, floating menus and control
activated macros are listed.
The Scope column actually adds another sort level. So in the example above, the macros are sorted by macro
activation with all hotkey macros being listed first. Then if you have the same hotkey assigned to more than one
macro, then that hotkey would be further sorted by the scope of the macro. Highlight the scope option and click on
the Up or Down arrows to move it to the sort position you want.
Use Drag and Drop to set the order of macros
With this option checked you can drag the macros in the Macro Explorer list and drop them to a new position in the
list. Just click on the macro (or highlight a group of macros) and hold down the left mouse button. Move the mouse
cursor to the new location in the list and release the button. The macro(s) should now be positioned as you
instructed.
View
This option affects the amount of macro detail displayed in the Macro Explorer window.
Large Icons
Display only the icons associated with each macro. The icons are in a large size format and have the macro nickname
listed below each icon.
Small Icons
Display the icons associated with each macro in a smaller size format. The macro nickname is listed to the right of each
icon. Scroll up or down to view the entire list, if you have sufficient macros to require scrolling.
List
This is similar to the small icon option. Scroll horizontally to view the entire list of macros, if you have sufficient macros to
require scrolling.
Details
Display details about each macro. View four columns displaying the Macro Nickname, primary Activation, Scope and
macro Modified date.
Macro Express - Explorer > Options > View
Appearance
You can change the look of Macro Express by clicking on Options | Preferences | Appearance. This function also includes
options for displaying various program functions.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Appearance
Explorer
Grid Font
Open a font dialog to select a different font type, style, size and color and alter the appearance of the text in the Macro
Explorer columns.
Category Font
Open a font dialog to select a different font type, style, size and color for the Categories displayed in the Macro Explorer.
Show Category Icons
Display folder icons next to each category in the Category field of the Macro Explorer.
Show Macro Icons
Display icons next to each macro defined in the Macro Explorer.
Show Date and Time
Show the current date and time at the bottom of the program window. This information is taken from the Windows
system clock.
Show Categories
Select to display the column listing macro categories in the Macro Explorer.
Show Gridlines
Choose to show the grid lines between each macro displayed in the Macro Explorer.
Show Actions Bar
Display the Actions bar on the left side of the Macro Explorer window. If you choose not to display the bar, you will need
to click on the menu commands to navigate through the program.
Menu Style
Select different styles for the menu bars and drop down menus in the program. Select from Standard, Enhanced, Flat,
Office 11 or XP styles. The XP menu look is set as the default.
Menu Animation
This option allows you to select different ways to display the drop down menus in the program. Select from Slide, Unfold,
Random, Fade or None (which simply displays the menu without animation). The default option is set to None.
Scripting Editor
Show Script Command Categories
Display the list of commands sorted into categories. Not selected, the commands will display individually and not be
segregated into categories.
Show Icons
Choose to have icons displayed for each category and again on each line of the macro script. An icon is associated with
each command in the script.
System Tray
Show in System Tray
Place a Macro Express icon in the Windows system tray or notification area when the Macro Express Player is active. The
icon primarily serves two purposes. First, it alerts you to the fact that Macro Express is running in the background.
Second, clicking on the icon with the left mouse button will activate the Macro Express Editor and bring it to the
foreground. Right clicking on the icon opens a small menu that allows you to open the editor, access the help file, access
tools, suspend the program, shut down the program, etc.
Completely Hide
This mode completely hides the macro player. In the absence of a system tray icon, you will need to use the system
macros that are defined for activating the editor and terminating the player. Ctrl + Alt + Shift + W is the default hotkey
to open the editor.
Show Running Icon
Display the running man icon in the system tray during the execution of a macro.
Show Recording Icon
Display the movie camera icon the system tray during the recording (capturing) of a macro.
Backup Preferences
This option allows you to set up automatic backups of your macro data file. The data is backed up when you close the
Macro Express Player. The file that you currently have loaded when closing the program will be the macro file that is
backed up. This option allows you to select the frequency of the backups, the number of backups to store and where to
save the backup files.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Backup
Schedule
Determine the frequency of backups.
Backup when program starts
A backup of the data is created when the Macro Express Player is started.
Backup when program closes
This creates a backup of the data every time that the Macro Express Player is closed.
Backup when editor closes
A data backup file is created each time one of the Macro Express editor windows closes. This includes the Script
Editor, the Menu Builder, the Quick Wizard and the Macro Express - Explorer window.
Every ___ Days
This options provides flexibility for creating a backup schedule. Select the number of days between backups. If the
number 2 is entered, then a backup will run every two days. Choose to have the backups run when the program
starts, closes or select a specific time of the day.
No Backup
To not schedule any backups, leave the four options unchecked. Manually back up the macro file by opening the
Macro Express - Explorer window and clicking on File | Backup. See the Backing Up Macros topic for more
information.
Options
Display Message While Backing Up
With this option selected a message will appear when you shut down asking if you would like to continue with the
backup of your file. This will only appear when you select to have a backup created.
Keep ____ Backups

You can specify the number of backup copies that you want to store. If you were to keep three backup copies of the
macex.mex file, the backups would be named macex.000, macex.001 and macex.002. The macex.000 would be
always be the most current backup.
Backup Location
Specify the location of the backup files from the drop down list. Select the number of backup copies to keep.
Backup to the Same Folder as the Macro File
The backup file is created and saved into the same folder where the original macro file is currently located.
Backup to a Specific Path
Use this option to store the backups in a folder other than the one where the original file is located.
Backup Path
If using the Backup to a Specific Path option, click on the Browse button to determine the location where the
backup file will be stored. Or type in the full file path in the edit field.
Note: To manually back up the macro file at any time, open the Macro Express Explorer window and click on File |
Backup.
Caching
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Caching
Macro Caching
The Caching option allows you to decide how much memory you want to allocate for storing macros in memory. The
default setting is 1024 KB or about one megabyte of memory allocation. In most cases this should be sufficient. This
option is to allow for a quicker response time. The caching will help speed the response time of the macros.
When disabled, there will not be an allocation to memory for macros. This requires the program to first access the hard
drive to locate the macro and then run it.
Window Activation Caching (Also applies to Window Control Activation)

This option pertains only to Window Activated and Window Control Activated macros. Below is the scenario when this
option would be relevant. It's possible that you may have one or several macros activated by a Window title.
Let's say a macro runs and it opens a window that should trigger a Window Activated macro. But the first macro still has
other commands to process. Since the first macro is still running, the second Window Activated macro will not trigger and
run because two macros won't run simultaneously. With this option checked, the Window Activated macro will be
queued. Once the first macro has finished playing, then the queued macro will start. This same scenario would apply to
Window Control Activated macros as well.
If you do not want to have the macros queued, do not select this option.
Capture Settings
Macro Express allows you to record macros. It does this by capturing what you do and saving this information for later
playback as a macro. Options are available to determine what you want to capture and how much. You can optionally
capture keystrokes, mouse movements and clicks and actual time between actions.
There are three methods for starting a macro recording. One is to select the activation (hotkey, shortkey, etc.) you wish
to assign to the macro before recording. Another is to select this information after recording the macro. The last option is
to use the Capture Quick Wizard.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Capture
When running Macro Express, you will note that there are six hotkeys automatically assigned. These six hotkeys are
System hotkeys (Scope indicates SYSTEM). One of these System hotkeys is called Start / Stop Capture and is defined as
CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X by default. Pressing CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X will start the recording of a macro and pressing it a
second time will stop the recording. The actual hotkey used here can be changed to anything available in Macro Express
(i.e. you can make ALT+F1 be the Start / Stop Capture hotkey).
When the recording stops, a Capture Complete window opens allowing you to assign what you have captured to a
hotkey, ShortKey or other activation. While recording, a "movie camera" icon appears in the Windows system tray to
indicate that you are recording. You can also right click on this icon to stop recording. To not have the camera display, go
to Options | Preferences | Appearance.
Before recording a macro using this System hotkey, you want to make sure that the default settings have been defined.
Select Options | Preferences | Capture from the Macro Explorer to define your capture settings. These are the default
settings when the System Start / Stop Capture hotkey is used. These are also the default settings that appear when
doing a macro recording by assigning a hotkey first.
Scope
The Global scope allows for the playback of the macro into any Windows program. The Program scope indicates that the
recorded macro will only play back in the program it is recorded in. You will only want to use the "program" option if you
are recording all of your macro in the same program. If you choose the "program" option and switch programs while
recording, then the playback of the macro will have unpredictable results.
Capture Keystrokes
Record all keystrokes made during the capture process.
Capture Double <ALT> for Menus

Use of the <ALT> key may not always work properly for activating menu commands in certain programs. (Example:
"<ALT>f" for activating the file menu command). To help ensure that a menu command will work, a double <ALT> is
used. (Example: "<ALT><ALT>f") Selecting this option will capture a double <ALT> whenever the ALT key is pressed.
You would want to use this option if you are going to be capturing keystroke commands that activate window menus.
Capture Mouse Relative To

Record all mouse clicks and movements made during the capture process. You have several mouse options to choose
from.
Relative to Screen option captures all mouse clicks and movements in relation to the cursor's position on the
monitor.
Relative to Window option captures all mouse clicks and movements in relation to the application window you are
using.
Capture Window Size is only available if you have the Relative to Window option selected. When checked, the
size of the window in which you are capturing will be recorded. When the macro plays back, the window will be
resized, if necessary, to the original size when the recording was made. This will help ensure that the mouse
clicks and movements are accurate.
Relative to Position option captures the mouse clicks or movements based on the last position of the mouse cursor.
Only Capture Mouse Clicks

Check this option if you only want to capture the mouse clicks, including the position of the mouse click. This option
captures the position where the mouse is to click and also the mouse click itself. No other movements of the mouse will
be recorded.
Note: Unless you are drawing or need to record the mouse dragging an item, you would most likely want to select this
option. It will reduce the size of the macro considerably and will be much easier to edit if necessary. This will also help
increase the playback speed of the macro, since you are eliminating all of the interim mouse move commands and
associated delays from the macro.
Capture At
This option refers to how fast the macro will play back in relation to your recording speed.
Actual Speed - Play back at the same speed that you recorded the macro. Any hesitations, etc. will play at the
same speed as you recorded.
Half Speed - Slow down the macro playback to half of the recording speed.
Double Speed - Speed up the macro playback to twice the actual recording speed.
Quadruple Speed - Speed up the macro playback to four times the actual recording speed.
Fastest Speed (no delays) - Play back the macro with no hesitations, delays, etc. Remove the check next to the
Capture At box to select this option. Caution: Selecting this option may cause the macro to play back too fast
and throw off the timing of the macro.
After the capture is complete, you can modify the playback speed of the macro in the Scripting Editor or Direct Editor.
Use the Macro Playback Speed command to do this.
Prompt on Capture
Display a prompt message to indicate that the capture is starting.
Delay Preferences
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Delay
Delay in Milliseconds after Clipboard Commands

This option inserts a 250 millisecond delay for each clipboard command in a macro. Windows requires a little bit of time
to process a clipboard command. We have found a 250 millisecond delay adequate for most systems. You may want to
experiment with the timing if the clipboard commands don't seem to be responding correctly. This option also eliminates
the need to insert Delay commands after each clipboard command.
Use Text Type Delay

It is possible when typing back long strings of text that the Keyboard Buffer may overflow. When this happens you will
notice some missing or scrambled text among the text that played back. Sometimes you may also hear a strange high
pitched sound. The text is trying to play back too fast. The Use Text Type Delay option is a global setting for all macros
to slow down the playback speed of the Text Type command.
The default setting is a 300 microsecond delay. If you notice scrambled text or the high pitched sound when running a
macro, then you will need to experiment and increase the delay. The delay is in micro seconds, or thousandths of a
millisecond. So you may want to start at 1000 microseconds, test the results and so on until you find the ultimate setting.
Use High Speed Timer in Millisecond Delays

Some computers make use of a high speed timer. Macro Express will make use of this timer in calculating delays. If your
system does not use this timer, then you would want to leave this option unchecked. On other systems the timer does
not work properly. In this case you would also not select this option.
Dialogs
Macro Express may have various warning messages appear, along with instructions for how to proceed. The Dialogs
option allows you to turn off these messages or allow them to be displayed when necessary. Click on Options |
Preferences | Dialogs to change these settings.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Dialogs
Show Double Alt Message when Recording

Use of the <ALT> key may not always work properly for activating menu commands in certain applications. (Example:
used. (Example: "<ALT><ALT>f"). When starting a macro capture a message will appear letting you know whether you
have the box checked in the Capture Preferences window for capturing a double alt key. Turn off this option to not have
this message displayed at the start of a capture.
Prompt to link .MEX and .MXE files if not linked with Macro Express (Not available in Windows Vista
or Later)
A file association has been created for files containing a group of macros (*.MEX file) and for files that are macros (*.MXE
file). If for some reason a .mex or .mxe file is not linked to Macro Express, a message will prompt you asking if you want
to link the files to the program. This message will appear when you first start Macro Express.
Show instructions on returning to script editor when editing a file

This option provides additional instructions for the following scenario: In this instance you are working in the Scripting
Editor and have used the Load Macro Text File command. With this command you can edit the text file in the Scripting
Editor or using Notepad. When editing a text file in the Scripting Editor, a window opens with instructions for saving your
changes and returning to the rest of the macro script.
Show Read Only Prompt when loading a read only file

When using My Computer or Windows Explorer, right click on a file name to display a menu. One of the menu items is
Properties. Left mouse click on Properties to see more details about the file. At the bottom of the Properties window you
may see the following file Attributes displayed - Archive, System, Hidden and Read Only.
This warning message will let you know that you are loading a Read Only macro (.mex) file. If you happen to load a
macro file (through File | Open Macro File, File | Reopen, etc.) that has been set to a read only status, you would not be
able to edit any of the macros. It's also possible that some of the macros would not run correctly. The warning message
gives you several options - Load the file anyway, have Macro Express turn off the read only option to the file, select a
different file or cancel altogether.
Warn the user about macros with no nicknames

Several macro commands require the use of a macro nickname. These are Macro Run, Macro Enable, Macro Delete and
Macro Disable. When you use one of these commands, a warning message will appear stating that you have one or more
macros that do not have a nickname selected. The macros with no nickname will not be available for use with these
commands. To use one of them you would first need to go to the Properties tab of the Editors and assign a nickname to
the macro. The warning message will not appear if the option is not checked.
Warn if a macro's icon does not exist

If an icon assigned to a macro has been moved or removed from your computer, a warning message will appear when
you start the Macro Explorer. The message simply states that the icon is no longer present. The program cannot locate
the icon anymore. Leave this option unchecked if you do not want to receive this warning message.
A square icon with a red box around it will display in the Macro Explorer window indicating that the original icon could not
be found.
Warn when importing ShortKeys 2.x macros

Macro Express allows you to import macros from our ShortKeys program. Version 2 of ShortKeys added a new suffix key
option that is not available in Macro Express. This warning message will alert you that this suffix key option will not be
converted to Macro Express at time of import.
Warn about duplicate nicknames when saving

When you create a new macro or import macros and the nickname you have assigned matches a macro already in the
file, you will be warned of the duplicate nicknames.
Email Settings
If you plan to use email functions in macros, you will need to set up default email information. Click on Options |
Preferences | Email Settings to enable the email functions of Macro Express.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Email Settings
SMTP Server
The SMTP Server is what allows you to send email over the Internet. You will need to obtain this information from your
Internet email provider or you may obtain it from the configuration section of your email program.
Host - The "Host" value may appear as a series of numbers and periods such as 192.168.0.1 or as a set of characters
looking something like a web site name such as mail.myisp.com.
Port - The port number is almost always 25. When in doubt, set this value to 25.
Server Requires Authentication
The email provider may require use of SMTP Server Authentication. If so, select this option and insert the login and
password information in the appropriate fields. If authentication is not required, then leave this option unchecked.
Your Email Address

This is the name and email address that display in the return address of any email sent through Macro Express. Please
note that if the email address entered is incorrect, the recipients of the email may not know how to reply to the message.
Other
Keep Email Log
Select this option to maintain a log of all email sent via Macro Express.
View Log
View the log of email sent by clicking on the "View Log" button.
Email Recipients
This option displays a list of the names and email addresses that you can choose from when creating email macros. You
can add names, make changes to existing names or delete names from the list. Click on Options | Preferences | Email
Recipients to access this option. The Send Email command also has an option for editing the list of email recipients.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Email Recipients
Add
Click on the Add button to open the Email Recipient Maintenance window shown below. The two fields will be blank. Just
enter the person's name and email address and click OK to add that person to the list.
Options > Preferences > Email Recipients > Add or Modify Button
Modify
If someone's email address has changed or you need to change other information, highlight that person's name from the
list and click on the modify button. Their name and email address will be displayed in the Email Recipient Maintenance
window shown above. You can edit this information and press OK to save the changes.
Delete
If you want to remove a person from the email recipient list, highlight that person's name and click on the delete button.
The name will be removed from your list.
File Paths
Click on Options | Preferences | File Paths to set the following program file paths.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > File Paths
Email Recipient List

Contains the path and name of the file that holds any email addresses stored in Macro Express. This option is provided so
that network users can each have their own individual list of email addresses. If email addresses are common to all
users, simply point each user to the same file.
Email Out Log

Shows the path and name of the file that stores information regarding email sent by Macro Express. The email
information will only be saved to this file if the "Keep Email Log" option has been set in the Email Settings preference
panel. You can start a new log file anytime by changing the file name or path.
Default Error Log

This file stores the error logs created when using the Log Errors command. You can start a new log file anytime by
changing this file name or path. This option is provided so that network users can each have their own individual list of
error messages. If error messages are common to all users, simply point each user to the same file.
Crash Report Path

Crash reports are saved to this file and location. Crash reports are generated by an unexpected closing of the program.
The details of the problem are stored in a file that begins with 'error' and ends with '.txt' in the folder specified here.
Keyboard Mapping Path (Not applicable on Windows Vista or later)

This specifies the path and name of the file that contains the Remap Keyboard information. By default, this is stored in
the same folder where Macro Express is installed. On some systems, a user cannot change files in the folders where a
program is installed. You may want store the Keyboard Mapping file in the same folder where your macro file is located.
External Editor
In addition to the built in Scripting and Direct Editors, Macro Express allows you to use an External Editor to edit your
macros. Enter the path name of the external editor's executable file here. Entering a correct path name here causes your
editor's icon to appear in the Macro Explorer Action bar.
Miscellaneous
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Miscellaneous
Enable Incremental Search in Explorer

This is a tool to help you search through the list of macros in the Macro Explorer or to quickly get to a macro in the list.
The search is conducted on the macro Nickname.
Here are some examples of how this works.
1. We will assume that the macros in the Macro Express Explorer are sorted alphabetically by nickname. With focus in
the list of macros, type the letter T. The highlighted macro moves to the first macro that begins with a letter T. This is
a quick way to move through the list of macros.
2. If the macros are assorted by scope, date or activation the nicknames will be sorted in a haphazard manner.
Pressing T would take you to the first macro that begins with a letter T. Pressing T again would take you to the next
macro and so on.
3. Or press T and E to find the first macro that begins with the letters TE.
Auto Restore Keyboard Hooks

This feature when enabled, will automatically attempt to have Macro Express re-assert itself as the first program to take
a look at the keystrokes passed through the Windows system wide keyboard hooks when other programs are loaded that
use these keyboard hooks.
Typically this is not a problem unless a program is run *after* Macro Express AND it uses the keyboard hooks AND it
places itself there in an improper fashion. When this occurs, keystrokes are no longer passed onto Macro Express and
Macro Express hotkeys and shortkeys suddenly fail to trigger macros.
This option should automatically give Macro Express first looks at the keystrokes thus preserving the use of Macro
Express hotkeys and shortkeys. In addition, because Macro Express properly passes on keystrokes through the chain of
keyboard hooks, other programs will still function properly.
Make "Direct Editor" the default editor

Select this option to make the Direct Editor the default for modifying macros. Any time you double click on a macro from
the Macro Express Explorer window, the Direct Editor opens. Unchecked, the Scripting Editor remains as the default
editor.
Activation
Some of the newer Microsoft Windows versions have been changed to restrict when a program, like Macro Express, can
set another program to become the foreground window. This can cause a macro containing an Activate Window
command to not work. A symptom of this problem is when, as a result of an Activate Window command, the window
doesn't activate and the task bar icon blinks until the user clicks on it. One reason Microsoft made this change is to
prevent one program from popping up in the middle of entering input into another program.
The "Send HotKey in Window Activation" and "Activate Window Attach Thread Input" options affect how the Activate
Window commands work. If you are having trouble with the Activate Window commands you may want to try turning
these options on or off.
Send HotKey in Window Activation
The "Send HotKey in Window Activation" option causes Windows to send a keystroke to Macro Express before
Activating a window. This usually causes Windows to allow Macro Express to Activate another program.
The keystroke sent to Macro Express is hidden. However, the keystroke can cause the activated program to react
differently than expected. For example, when you activate a program with the "Send HotKey in Window Activation"
option turned off, the activated program may have a specific field highlighted. With this option on, the field in that
program may no longer be highlighted when the program is activated.
Attach Thread Input in Window Activation
The "Attach Thread Input in Window Activation" option is on by default for Windows 2000 and later and off for
Windows 9x. If you are having trouble with an Activate Window command you may want to try turning this option on
or off.
Clear Error Messages after ________ Seconds

If an error message generated by the Macro Express Player occurs during the playback of a macro, this option will close
the error message after the number of seconds you designate. With this option not selected, you would be required to
click on the OK button of the error to close the message window. Setting the time to (0) zero seconds will cause the error
message to be displayed indefinitely. If you do not want the error message to display at all, use the Log Error
Message command and select the "Do not display error messages (log only)" option.
In many cases you would probably want to see the error message and leave this option not selected. This is the default
setting. But, let's say you have several macros scheduled to run overnight while you are away from the computer. If the
first macro fails and displays an error message, you would want this message to close automatically. When the message
window closes, this also terminates the macro. When the macro terminates, this allows the next scheduled macro to run.
Otherwise the first macro would not close and would not allow the next macro to run as scheduled.
Typical error messages coming from the Player would be Time Out messages while waiting for windows, a file or folder
wasn't found or a networking error.
Single Click to Select when Importing & Exporting

With this option selected, you can click on each macro that you want to import or export. For example you can highlight
the first, third and tenth macros to import. But you cannot highlight a consecutive string of macros without clicking on
each macro individually.
With the option not selected, you can highlight a consecutive string of macros by clicking on the first macro, holding
down the Shift key and then clicking on the last macro in your string. Everything between the two macros you clicked on
will be highlighted and ready to import or export. In this option if you wanted to highlight just the first, third and tenth
macros in the list, you would hold down the CTRL key while clicking on each macro.
Switch Focus to Script when Adding a Command

When building a macro in the Scripting or Direct Editor and add a command to the script, you can select into which area
the mouse cursor will have focus. With this option selected the mouse cursor will have focus in the Scripting area of the
Editor. If this option is not selected, the mouse cursor focus will remain in the Command categories.
All Users Use the Same Settings (Not available in Windows Vista or Later)
When this option is checked all users on the computer will use the same Preference settings.
Note: Windows can be configured to allow different users to log into a single computer. Some versions of Windows
require a user to log in. Normally only one user is logged in at a time. One or more login names have access to the entire
computer and are said to have administrative access rights. Other login names do not have administrative access rights.
These login names have restrictions about what they can change on the computer.
To use this option you need to have Read, Write, Create and Modify access rights to the
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Insight Software Solutions\Macro Express section of the registry. If you do not have
access rights to this area of the registry then this option will not be visible. The administrator would need to grant these
access rights to users on Windows NT, 2000, XP or later machines.
Normally you do not have to worry about this for Windows 95, 98 or ME since by default all users have administrative
access rights. You will need to consider this issue if you are using Windows NT, 2000, XP or later and have more than
one login name.
System Tray Left Click Option

This allows you to change what happens when you left click on the Macro Express icon in the system tray. The default
setting is to open the Macro Express Explorer window. You can select to have the program do nothing when left clicking
on this icon. Or you can select to have the program play back a macro. If you select this option, you can choose from the
list of macros in your macro file. The macro would play back each time you left click on the Macro Express icon in the
system tray.
Advanced button
Click on the Advanced button to find additional program settings. These include options for suppressing the macro abort
messages, support for dead keys, and others.
Miscellaneous - Advanced Options
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Miscellaneous > Advanced Button
Macro Stop Abort Macro Message

Specifies whether the Macro Aborted message is displayed when a Macro Stop command runs.
Hotkey Abort Macro Message

Specifies whether the Macro Aborted message is displayed when the Abort Macro HotKey sequence is pressed.
Right Click Abort Macro Message

Specifies whether the Macro Aborted message is displayed after right-clicking on the Macro Express icon in the system
tray.
Deadkey Patch
Enabling this option fixes a problem displaying capital letters with diacritic marks such as and . This
option may cause shortkey activated macros to work less reliably.
Show Pixel Color in Hex in Mouse Locator

Determines whether to display hexadecimal values for the Pixel Color in the Mouse Locator program.
Variables Evaluation Level

Sets the number of times variable references in a script command will be expanded. This allows a variable to be used to
reference another variable.
For example, if the Variable Evaluation Level is set to 1 or higher, and if the value of %N1% is 3, then entering
%T%N1%% in a macro command will return the value contained in %T3%.
Network
Macro Express can be set up to run over a network with no ill effects. The options for making sure Macro Express runs
smoothly over a network are accessed via the Options | Preferences | Network menu command.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Network
File Locking of Macro Express Files

Choosing this option basically enables the networking capabilities of Macro Express. File locking will be performed
preventing overwriting of data by 2 or more users. If a user attempts to change any data in the Macro Express file and
the data they currently display has been altered by another user, the user will be notified that the data has been changed
and the new data will be loaded and displayed.
Note: If you are not running Macro Express over a network, you will be better off not selecting this option as you will
avoid extra overhead required in checking for other users using the Macro Express file. However, no harm will be done if
it is checked and you are not on a network.
Automatic Synchronization Updating

This option is available to allow automatic synchronization of data files between users on a network. This updating can be
set to occur every minute, every two minutes on up to every 999 minutes. For example, if the interval is set to 5 minutes
and another user makes a change to the same macro file that you have open, then within 5 minutes, the macro data will
automatically be synchronized between the networked computers without you doing anything. When running Macro
Express over a network, you may wish to prevent certain users from changing any of the Macro Express data. It is
possible for this to occur by using Command Line Parameters.
Note: Multi-user networking of this product requires the purchase of a multi-user license.
Passwords
Use this option to password protect your macro (.mex) file or to not allow any macros to run until a proper password has
been entered. These password options may be found by clicking on Options | Preferences | Passwords.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Passwords
Password on Edit
Place a check in the box and click on the Change button to set up a password. With the password information set up, you
will be required to enter your password before the Macro Express Editor will be displayed. This is one way to prevent
others from viewing your macros or being able to alter them.
Password on Run
Place a check in the box and click on the Change button to set up a password. With this password information set up,
you will be required to input your password before the Macro Express Player will run. Essentially, Macro Express will not
run until the correct password has been entered.
Related Topics
Encrypted Text
Password Command
Password Protect a Macro
Playback
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Playback
Abort Macro HotKey

This option allows you to select, from among three hotkey combinations, your preference for stopping a macro that is
currently running. For example, if you have the Win + ~ combination selected, pressing this combination will stop a
macro that is running.
If you have elected to display the "Running Man" icon when a macro is playing, you also have the option to right mouse
click on the icon to terminate the macro.
Note: The Timed Delay in Seconds command and the Wait for Time to Elapse command suspend Macro Express for
the amount of time specified. During this delay time the macro cannot be terminated.
Please note that macros that consist of numerous keystrokes can send the keystrokes rather quickly and Windows will
buffer up the keystrokes. Once such commands have been buffered up in Windows, aborting a macro will not cancel
them. In these cases, it may appear that the abort command did not work when in reality the macro has already finished
issuing its commands and Windows is now processing them.
Pause Macro HotKey

This option allows you to select from among four hotkey combinations to pause a macro that is currently running. When
you are ready for the macro to resume, press your original hotkey or click on the Resume button of the Pause window
that displays.
Turn CAPS Lock Off when Starting a Macro

With this option selected, the macro will turn off the CAPS Lock key before starting the macro playback.
Restore CAPS Lock State when Finished Playing a Macro

With this option checked, the CAPS Lock key will be returned to the state it was in before you played back a macro. For
example, let's say that your Caps Lock key is initially turned off and you play a macro that turns the Caps Lock key on
during the playback. After the macro has finished playing, the Caps Lock key will be turned back off again. In the
previous scenario, leaving this option unchecked would keep the Caps Lock key on after the macro finished playing.
Log All Macro Information

This is a quick way to have information logged for all macros. This function logs the start and stop time for each macro
that is run. It also logs any errors that occur during macro runtime. When using this setting, there is not a need to
include Log Error commands in each individual macro or select the Use Log File option in the Properties tab of the
Scripting Editor for each macro.
The Log File may become quite large over time, depending on settings, etc. The large file size may affect the
performance of certain aspects of Macro Express. Clearing the file or limiting the file size will prevent this situation.
Limit Size of Error Log file on startup

When an error occurs in a macro or when macro logging is turned on, information about the macro is entered into the
log file specified by the Default Error Log. In time the size of this log file can become very large and may slow things
down. With the Limit Size of Error Log file on startup option enabled, the size of the log file is checked whenever Macro
Express starts and the log file is limited to the size specified.
Do Not Play Back Keyboard Remapping (Available on Windows XP and Prior)

Macro Express includes a feature to remap most of the keys on the keyboard. Use this option to disable keyboard
remapping in Macro Express.
Scheduler
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Scheduler
Alarm
You can set the Alarm to alert you with the playback of a wave (.wav) file, when a scheduled macro is about to execute.
This screen is found by clicking on Options | Preferences | Scheduler. Select Wave File and either type in the path name
where the wave file is found or click on the Browse button to browse for the file. Click on the Test button to play the
wave file and make sure you selected the appropriate file. The default setting is to not have any wave file selected.
Wait for wave file to finish
Allow the wave file to finish playing before continuing with the macro. Once it has finished the macro runs.
Timer Interval
You can specify the interval in seconds for how often Macro Express will check to see if a scheduled macro is ready to
execute. The setting may be from 1 to every 59 seconds. If you have not created any scheduled macros or none are
active, then Macro Express will shut off the timer. You can activate this window by clicking on Options | Preferences |
Scheduler. The default setting is to check for scheduled macros every 10 seconds.
Disable Screen Saver when using Scheduled Macros
Screen Savers will prevent a scheduled macro from running. This option will not allow a screen saver to start if Macro
Express is running and if there are any active scheduled macros in the macro file currently in use.
Shortkeys
A shortkey is a set of characters such as abc, myname, etc. When the characters are typed into an application the macro
runs. Click on Options | Preferences | Shortkeys to define the settings.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Shortkeys
Global Options -- Applies to All Shortkeys

Below are descriptions of the default settings that can be assigned to all shortkeys. The Prefix Key and Suffix Key options
cannot be overridden elsewhere in the program.
Use Prefix Keys
The Prefix Keys are used to designate up to three characters that may be added to the front of every shortkey. If you
wanted every one of your shortkeys to start with two pound signs (##), you could add these to the front of each
shortkey. It would then be very unlikely that you would have a replacement occur when you did not desire one, since you
would not normally be typing ## in front of your text. An alternative to adding the ## to each short key is to add it once
as the Prefix Key. So if your Prefix Key was set to ## and your shortkey was set to test, then you must type ##test
before a replacement would occur.
Two Prefix Keys may optionally be input that are applied to all Original Shortkeys created. The following Prefix characters
may be entered and used:
The letters A through Z (both upper and lower case)
The numbers 0 through 9
The following characters: ! @ # $ % ^ & _ = < > ? . ; , * - / + ` ' " ) ] and space bar
Shortkey Detection
The program provides two methods of "Shortkey" detection. They are the Solitary Usage and the non Solitary Usage. A
check mark in the box beside the solitary usage option indicates that the solitary usage option is activated. The non
solitary usage option is the default setting.
Solitary Usage
The solitary usage option indicates that a short key will be recognized only when the short key is preceded by a
character or key that is not valid as part of the shortkey name. Let's look at a couple of examples to illustrate what
this means.
Assume your shortkey was named red and replacement text was a bright color. If you were to key in the word Fred,
the replacement would not take place. Why? Because "F" is a valid character in a short key name. You really didn't
want the replacement to take place because you were typing Fred and not red. However, if you were to key in the
word red preceded by a blank space, the replacement would take place. Why? Because a blank space is not valid as
part of a shortkey.
Non Solitary Usage
The non solitary usage option (leaving the Solitary Usage option unchecked) indicates that a shortkey will be
recognized whenever the short key text is keyed in even if it is part of another word. Let's look at the example above
to illustrate what this means.
Assume your shortkey was named red and replacement text was a bright color. If you were to key in the word Fred,
the replacement would take place and you would end up with "Fa bright color".
Normally, you would use the "non solitary usage" mode and add prefix keys to ensure that you did not get an
accidental replacement.
Use Suffix Keys
Another alternative is to use the Suffix Keys option. With this option activated, you would just type in your short key and
then press down either the Space Bar or the Enter Key.
Use Punctuation Characters
Punctuation keys such as . , : ; ? ! ) ' ] " ` and - may also be used as a suffix key for a shortkey, if you have the
Include Punctuation Chars box checked. If your shortkey was set to test, type the word test while in another
Windows application and press either the Space Bar, Enter Key or one of the punctuation keys listed above so that
the text replacement would occur.
Retype Suffix Key
The Retype Suffix Key option, when checked, will add your suffix key (Enter, Space or punctuation keys) to the end
of your replacement text. This option is mainly for those who use shortkeys as a simple text replacement in writing
documents.
Let's use the example of a shortkey "test" with the replacement text of "This is a test" (without the quotation marks).
In your word processor, if you were to type in "test" and use the space bar as the trigger, the replacement text
would appear and the cursor would move over one space at the end of the text. Or if you typed "test" and used the ?
to activate the shortkey, the replacement text would appear with a ? at the end of the text. If this option is not
checked, your suffix key will not be added to the end of the replacement text.
Complete list of characters that may be used with shortkeys

Up to 10 characters may be entered as an original short key (which are to be
replaced). In addition, up to 3 Prefix Keys may optionally be entered in that are applied
to all Original Shortkeys created. The following Prefix characters may be entered and
used:
The
The
The
! @
letters A through Z (both upper and lower case)

numbers 0 through 9
following characters:
# $ % ^ & _ = < > ? . ; , * - / + ` ' " ) ] and space bar
If you choose not to use a prefix key, you can use the suffix key and press the space bar,
the enter key or a suffix character of . , : ; ? ! or - after typing the shortkey to activate the
shortkey.
Note: Pressing down the CTRL or ALT key is detected by the program, when using the Shortkeys option, and is
interpreted as a key being pressed. Therefore, if the ALT or CTRL key is pressed in the middle of a shortkey that you are
typing, the shortkey will not be recognized and the replacement will not be made.
Initial Default Values for New Shortkeys

The following options are the default options used for each new shortkey created. These options can be overridden on an
individual shortkey basis.
Match Upper Case First Char Between Shortkey & Text
This option will allow the upper case setting of the first letter in the shortkey dictate that the first character in the macro
will be upper case (if the first thing in the macro is a character). This option is mainly for those doing simple text
replacement in documents and facilitates an easy way to capitalize the replacement text in instances where it needs to be
such, as the beginning of a sentence.
Require Exact Upper/Lower Case Match on Shortkey
With this setting selected, you must key in a shortkey exactly as it appears (upper and lower case letters) in order to
have the replacement work. Without case sensitivity, you can key in either an upper or lower case letter of a shortkey
and have the replacement work. Here are a few examples:
ShortKey
Case Sensitive
Not Case Sensitive
Mike
Mike
mike
tagline
tagline
TaGLIne
Address
Address
addreSS
None
Neither of the above cases will apply with this option checked.
Do Not Remove Keystrokes Typed
This option instructs the shortkey not to erase itself after being typed in. Normally, backspaces are issued to remove the
shortkey from the screen before the macro is executed. When using shortkeys in non text usage programs, this may not
be desirable to have "backspaces" issued. For example, using a shortkey in Internet Explorer where focus is not on an
edit box, will cause the "back" button to be pressed numerous times due to the backspaces being issued. This option will
prevent this from happening.
Startup
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Startup
Show Splash Screen

This option will display the Macro Express Splash screen for a few seconds while the program is loading.
Show Quick Start Guide on Startup

This option will display the Quick Start Guide for Macro Express when the program loads. The guide contains some basic
program information.
Start Editor on startup of Macro Express

This instructs the Macro Express editor to load and display when Macro Express starts up.
Minimize Editor
This option will minimize the editor and place an entry on the task bar when Macro Express starts up.
Run on Windows' Startup

This option instructs Macro Express to load when you start Windows.
Wait for ____ Seconds
On some computers, Windows is not completely ready for Macro Express when it tries to load the program. This may
be caused by other programs that are loaded when Windows starts. As a result the icon may not display in the
system tray.
This option instructs Macro Express to wait the number of seconds you specify to be sure Windows is fully loaded.
Most computers will not need this delay. If yours does, then you may need to experiment with the amount of time to
wait.
Mouse Locator
The Mouse Locator provides the X and Y coordinates of the mouse relative to the entire screen or the window that is
active. This is useful when wanting to include mouse clicks in macro scripts. You will know the exact position of the
mouse in order to plot those coordinates into a macro. Just plug in the coordinates when using the Mouse Commands
found in the Scripting Editor or Direct Editor. (This function is not necessary if using the Capture option.) You can also
activate this window by clicking on the Launch Mouse Locator button found on the Mouse Commands window when the
Mouse Move option has been highlighted. Or you can launch this from the Get Pixel Color window.
Macro Express Explorer > Tools > Mouse Locator
If the Mouse Locator window pops up in an area of your screen that covers important data, click on the window, hold the
left mouse button down on the blue bar at the top of the window and drag to another area of your screen.
Screen Position
The set of numbers directly under Screen Position lists the position of the mouse relative to your computer screen. As
you move the mouse, you will notice the numbers changing in relation to the mouse cursor position. The number to the
left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels from the left edge of the screen. The number on the right is the Y
coordinate, or how many pixels the mouse is positioned from the top of the screen.
Active Window
The set of numbers directly under Active Window lists the position of the mouse relative to the active window or the
window that has the focus. When first activating the Mouse Locator window, it will have the focus. Clicking on a window
outside of the Mouse Locator gives focus to that window. The Mouse Locator window will remain on top so that you can
read the coordinates for the window you want to use. As you move the mouse, you will notice the numbers changing in
relation to the mouse position. The number to the left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels the mouse is positioned
from the left edge of the active window. The number on the right is the Y coordinate, or how many pixels the mouse is
positioned from the top of the active window.
Pixel Color
This option displays the color of the pixel that the mouse is pointing to. Windows assigns a numeric value to each color,
normally from 6 to 8 digits in length. The pixel color is used with the Get Pixel Color command.
Remap Keyboard
The Remap Keyboard option allows you to remap many of the keys on your keyboard. For instance you could remap the
$ key so that every time you press the $ key, the symbol will be displayed in the application you are running. (This
option is not available in Windows Vista or later.)
Macro Express Explorer > Tools > Remap Keyboard
Selecting the Tools | Remap Keyboard from the Macro Explorer pane will activate the Remap Keyboard window. There
are four columns of keys which may be remapped: 1: Upper case - all letters of the alphabet capitalized, 2: Lower case all letters of the alphabet in lower case, 3: Punctuation - punctuation and symbol keys found on the keyboard, and 4:
Numeric - the numbers from 0-9.
Note: Click on Options | Preferences | Playback to disable the Remap Keyboard function in Macro Express.
Remap the keyboard

Select the key that you want to remap by pointing the mouse at that key and double clicking on it. The select character
window appears. Find the character that you want and double click on it or highlight the character with a single mouse
click and then click OK. This returns you to the Remap Keyboard window and the character you selected has been
inserted.
For example, double click on the punctuation mark ^ (the right column of the two). The select character window
appears. Select . Double click on this symbol and you will return to the Remap Keyboard window. The has replaced
the ^ in your list of keys. Now each time you type the ^ key in other applications, the symbol will appear.
Limitations: This option is essentially limited to the alphabet keys, number keys, punctuation keys and symbols. Keys
such as the F1 - F12 keys, Alt, Ctrl, Insert, Home, Page Up, etc. cannot be remapped through this option. However, many
of these keys may be used as single key hotkeys to essentially do the same thing that the Remap function does.
For example, let's say you wanted to remap the Home key as the Delete key. This can't be done with the remap option.
But, you can create a new macro. Assign the Home key as the hotkey. Use the Text Type command when building the
macro. In the Text Type window insert Delete in the Keystrokes field. Save your input and then save the macro. Press
the Home key and it will play back as a Delete.
Remap Specifications
Keys that can be remapped (changed)
Lower Case "A" through "Z"
Upper Case (Shifted) "A" through "Z"
Numerics "0" through "9"
32 Punctuation Keys (period, asterisk, etc)
Keys that can be assigned to remapped key
The standard Windows ANSI character set including:
Normal ASCII characters including A through Z, a through z, 0 through 9 and
numerous punctuation keys such as . , * # ! and dozens more.
Western European Language characters including and
dozens more
Western European Language punctuation such as
Math Symbols such as
Currency Symbols such as $
Typographical Symbols such as
Legal Symbols such as
And a variety of others found in the ANSI set including some of the following
Remap - Select Character

(This option is not available for Windows Vista or later)
Double clicking on any of the letters or symbols from the four columns displayed on the Remap Keyboard window opens
a display of all symbols available, as shown above.
To remap your keyboard, follow the steps below:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
From the Macro Explorer, select Tools | Remap Keyboard.

The Remap Keyboard window will activate.
Double click on one of the letters or characters that you want to remap.
The Select Character window will appear, as shown above.
Highlight the symbol you want to use and then click on the OK Button. Or just double click on the desired
symbol.
6. The symbol is inserted into the appropriate field (next to the letter or character to be remapped in the Remap
Keyboard window). The program returns to the Remap Keyboard window ready to remap another key or click OK
to save your changes and return to Macro Explorer.
Error Log Viewer
Macro Express Explorer > Tools > Error Log Viewer
The Error Log Viewer displays a list of error messages recorded by Macro Express. This is a list of errors as a result of the
error tracking messages inserted into macros. You can access this viewer to take a look at all the logged errors.
The Clear Log button will remove all entries from this log.
Restore Program Defaults

Clicking on this option will restore any settings you have made in the program to their default values. This will primarily
affect any settings that you made in the Options | Preference area. Other things that may be reset are the default macro
file that opens, macro sort order and categories.
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Restore Program Defaults
Import Program Configuration

This option allows you to import all of your program configuration settings into Macro Express, if you have previously
exported the configuration settings to a file. This will replace the current configuration settings in Macro Express. This
would include any Preference settings selected, macro file in use, etc. Click on Tools | Import Program Configuration to
do this. A browse window will appear so that you can navigate to the file that you previously exported.
You may want to save this information if you plan to move to another computer. You can then easily import your settings
back into the program after you've installed on the other computer. Or if you have more than one user at a computer,
each user could save their own configuration settings and load them in while they are at work on the computer. Or you
could have the individual settings loaded in at startup for each user by setting a Command Line Parameter. Each
individual user would need to create their own startup shortcut in order for this to work correctly.
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Import Program Configuration
Export Program Configuration

This option allows you to save all of your program configuration settings to a file. This would include any Preference
settings selected, macro file in use, etc. Click on Tools | Export Program Configuration to do this. A Save File box opens
to allow you to name the file and file location. If you need to retrieve this information later, you can use the Tools |
Import Program Configuration menu item to load the settings back in.
You may want to save this information if you plan to migrate to a new computer. You can then easily import your
settings back into the program after you've installed on the other computer. Or if you have more than one user at a
computer, each user could save their own configuration settings and load them in while they are at work on the
computer. Or you could have the individual settings loaded in at startup for each user by setting a Command Line
Parameter. Each individual user would need to create their own startup shortcut in order for this to work correctly.
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Export Program Configuration
Restore File Associations

A file association has been created for files containing a group of macros (*.MEX file) and for files that are macros (*.MXE
file). Double clicking on a MEX file from within Explorer will start Macro Express, if not already running, and load in the
.MEX file. Double clicking on a .MXE file from within Explorer will run the macro contained in the file.
If for some reason the file associations are broken, clicking on Tools | Restore File Associations will restore the links and
allow Windows to process the files correctly.
(Not available in Windows Vista or later)
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Restore File Associations
Restore Keyboard Hooks

It is possible for other programs which are run after Macro Express to improperly install themselves into the system wide
Windows keyboard hooks. This causes Macro Express to no longer be able to monitor keystrokes. This option will reinstall
the Windows keyboard hooks used by Macro Express so that Macro Express will have the first look at the keystrokes and
will be able to monitor the keystrokes again.
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Restore Keyboard Hooks
Restore Mouse Hooks

Windows mouse hooks. This causes Macro Express to no longer be able to monitor mouse movements and clicks. This
option will reinstall the Windows mouse hooks used by Macro Express so that Macro Express will have the first look at the
mouse movements and will be able to monitor the mouse again.
Macro Express - Explorer > Tools > Restore Mouse Hooks
The Editors
You have a choice of three different ways to edit a macro: the Scripting Editor, the Direct Editor and an External Editor.
Each of these editors has advantages. What you are working on will determine which editor you may want to use.
Scripting Editor
Building Macros: For longer more complicated macros, the Scripting Editor organizes the commands so that
they are simpler to read. One command per line makes it easier to determine the status of your macro. It is also
much simpler to move the commands around in the script.
Editing Macros: Generally speaking, if you want to edit a macro, the Scripting Editor would be simpler to use.
Each line of the script only contains a single command. This makes it easier to step through the macro and make
any changes.
Direct Editor
Symbols and Special Keys: This is the quickest method for inserting keypresses such as Alt, Tab, Ctrl, etc. You
can easily insert a Ctrl Key Down, the letter A, and Ctrl Key Up without selecting the commands from the
command list. The same applies with the insertion of Variables or Symbols for playback.
Text Entry: With the Direct Editor you can enter text directly into the Macro Text edit field. You don't need to
select from the commands first. You can copy a long string of text from the clipboard and paste into this field.
External Editor
Some editing tasks may be easier using an external editor, especially if you have a favorite text editor. Macro Express
allows you to use any text editor. To enable this option you need to enter the path name of your editor's executable file
in the File Paths preference settings. If the path name is correctly entered, your editor's icon will appear in the Macro
Explorer Action bar.
Note: You may only use a text editor as your External Editor, not a word processor. A text editor writes files in ASCII
text format while a word processor writes files in proprietary formats. Also, by using a text editor you will be editing a
macro in the ASCII representation of the macro. This is the same format used in the Direct Editor.
Scripting Editor
Macro Express - Explorer > Scripting Editor Button
Use the Scripting Editor to build a macro or to edit an already created macro. The Scripting Editor is divided into two
main pieces, the Commands and the Macro Script. Select from the commands what you want to insert into the Macro
Script. The Macro Script is written so that the top line in the script is the first command that will play back in the macro.
The Script tab contains the list of commands and the macro script. Additional information about the macro can be viewed
or edited in the Properties, Scope, Security and Notes tabs.
From the Macro Explorer, click on the Scripting Editor icon to open the Scripting Editor. Or double click on a defined
macro in the list of macros. This will open the Scripting Editor (if you have it defined as your Default Editor) and allow
you to view or edit the macro contents.
Commands
This area lists all of the commands that can be used in Macro Express. To insert a command into the script, scroll until
you find the command category you want. Click on the category to expand the list and display all of the commands
available for that category. Double click on that command. This will normally display a window where you can define
what you want the command to do. Then click OK on the new window to insert this command into the Macro Script.
Double clicking on some of the commands that don't require any defining, will insert the command directly into the Macro
Script, without an intermediary window.
You may also customize the list of commands. You can add, rename or delete command categories. All commands may
be moved from one category to another or simply not displayed, to suit personal preference.
Search For Command
Use this function to help locate a specific command within the Commands list. If you were to look for the Password
Protection command, enter "pas" without the quotes. This will highlight the Password Protection command within the
list of commands. You'll also notice that entering the "p" and the "a" will first display the Pause command. Adding the
"s" moves the highlight to the Password Protection command.
Macro Script
This area lists each of the commands that the macro will perform. The macro will play back sequentially through the list
beginning with the top item. You can edit any of the commands in the list by double clicking on the line of the script that
you want to edit.
There is also a right mouse click context menu available for the items in the Macro Script. Highlight the line or lines of the
script that you want and then right mouse click. A context menu appears with a variety of options. These options are also
available through the Scripting Editor menus.
Macro Script Navigation
The buttons shown below are to help with the positioning and other functions of the commands listed in the Macro
Script.
Insert Before
This button will insert the macro command that you have selected from the Commands list above or before the
command that is highlighted in the Macro Script edit box. If you do not have a script item highlighted in the edit box,
the macro command will be placed as the first or uppermost item in the script.
Insert After
This button will insert the macro command you have selected from the Commands list below or after the script item
that is highlighted in the Macro Script edit box. If you do not have a script item highlighted in the edit box, the macro
will be placed below or after the first or uppermost item in the script.
Add to End
This button will insert the macro command you have selected from the Commands list as the last item in the script,
below all other items.
Move Up
This arrow will move the highlighted command up one spot in the Macro Script, ahead of other script items already in
place. Each click will move the command up one space in the script. You may also highlight several consecutive lines
in the script and move them all at the same time.
Move Down
This arrow will move the highlighted command down one spot in the edit box, beneath the other script items already
in place. Each click will move the command down one space in the script. You may also highlight several
consecutive lines in the script and move them all at the same time.
Disable
Highlight a line in the Macro Script and then click on this button. It will disable this line in the script, so that it will not
play during macro playback. There will be a red line drawn through the disabled script, for a quick visual
acknowledgement.
Enable
Highlighting a line in the Macro Script that is disabled will display this symbol. Click on the button to enable the line
in the script. This will allow this line of the macro to play during macro playback.
Duplicate
Highlight one or more lines of the macro script. Then click on the Duplicate button. This will add another copy of the
command line or lines to the script. This is essentially a one step method for copy and paste. You may also press
CTRL D instead of clicking on the Duplicate button.
Related Topics
Scripting Editor Menus
Scripting vs Direct Editor Comparison
Direct Editor
Macro Express - Explorer > Direct Editor Button
Use the Direct Editor to build a macro or to edit an already created macro. The Direct Editor is divided into three main
pieces, the Commands, the Macro Text and Edit Buttons. Select from the commands what you want to insert into the
Macro Text. The Macro Text reads from left to right so that the top line in the text, starting at the left, is the first
command that will play back in the macro.
The Editor tab contains the list of commands and the macro text. Additional information about the macro can be viewed
or edited in the Properties, Scope, Security and Notes tabs.
From the Macro Explorer, click on the Direct Editor icon to open the Direct Editor. Or double click on a defined macro in
the list of macros. This will open the Direct Editor (if you have it defined as your Default Editor) and allow you to view or
edit the macro contents.
Commands
This area lists all of the commands that can be used in Macro Express. To insert a command into the script, scroll until
you find the command category you want. Click on the category to expand the list and display all of the commands
available for that category. Double click on the command you want, to display a window where you can define what you
want the command to do. Then click OK on the new window to insert this command into the Macro Text. Double clicking
on some of the commands that don't require any defining, will insert the command directly into the Macro Text, without
an intermediary window.
You may also customize the list of commands. You can add, rename or delete command categories. All commands may
be moved from one category to another, to suit personal preference.
Search For Command

Use this function to help locate a specific command within the Commands list. If you were to look for the Password
Protection command, enter "pas" without the quotes. This will highlight the Password Protection command within the
list of commands. You'll also notice that entering the "p" and the "a" will first go to the Pause command. Adding the
"s" moves the highlight to the Password Protection command.
Macro Text
This area lists each of the commands that the macro will perform. The macro will play back sequentially through the text
beginning at the upper left and reading left to right, down through the text. To insert a command into the text, place
your mouse cursor where you want the command to be positioned. Then select your command and it will be inserted to
the right of the mouse cursor in the Macro Text field.
Special Keys and the F1 - F12 Keys
Click on any of the entries (keys) in the yellow box area. For example, double clicking on the Alt key will place the Alt
command into the Macro Text field. The Alt key will play back in the macro at that point in the script. Or Tab to the
entry you want and press Enter. Clicking on the F1 - F12 keys will input these keystrokes in the Macro Text field and
will play back in the macro.
Variables
To select a variable to play back in a macro, click on the arrow next to Variable. Select the variable you want and
then click on the Insert button. This will place %T1% (if T1 is the variable you selected) into the Macro Text at the
location where the cursor is positioned. The value for the variable will be entered into the application that the macro
is playing back in.
Misc Keys
Miscellaneous keystrokes such as the Print Screen, Win Key, etc. can be inserted by using the "Misc Keys" list box. To
select a miscellaneous key, click on the arrow next to Misc Keys. Select the miscellaneous key you want from the
drop down list and then click on the Insert button. This will place the Miscellaneous Key into the Macro Text at the
location where the cursor is positioned.
Symbols
To insert a symbol into the Macro Text click on the Symbols button. A window with a number of symbols will appear.
Double click on the symbol you want and it will be inserted into the Macro Text. Or highlight the symbol and click on
the OK button. You may also use this function to insert Alt Key Sequences.
Related Topics
Direct Editor Menus
Scripting vs Direct Editor Comparison
Direct Editor Tips

This section provides a few guidelines for writing macros in the Direct Editor.
Below are a few things to be aware of when writing macros in the Direct Editor.
1) Some commands require a separator character in a specific location. Be sure to include the separator character and
do not delete this character. The separator character is displayed as a solid vertical bar. You will see several examples of
this in the image above, mostly after each of the Text Type commands.
When entering text into the Direct Editor, you may enter the text directly without any special coding. But, after the macro
is saved and you open the Direct Editor again, the text will be formatted as in the example image above - with
<TEXTTYPE: Body of text (separator character)>.
2) If one command does not have the correct syntax, commands that follow may be treated incorrectly. For example, if
you leave the separator character out of a Text Type command, then Macro Express will treat all commands that follow
as part of the Text Type command, either until the end of the macro or until another separator character is found in a
subsequent command.
The separator character simply informs Macro Express that the end of one command has been reached, and that a new
command is starting.
3) The format of the commands in the Direct Editor is not documented outside of Macro Express. To find the correct
syntax, enter a command or several commands using the Scripting Editor and look at the result in the Direct Editor.
Editor Menu Items

There are a number of menu items available for the Scripting Editor and Direct Editor. There are many items that are
common between the two editors. But, because of the functionality of the editors, there are also a number of
differences. Unless the item is marked as only being available in one specific editor, it will be understood that the item is
common to both editors.
File
Edit
Debug
Keys (Direct Editor Only)

This menu provides keyboard equivalents for many of the keys displayed in the yellow area of the Direct Editor. To use
the keyboard equivalents, press Alt + K to display the Keys menu. Then press the underlined letter of the key you want
inserted. For example, if you wanted to insert the Control key, you would press Alt + K + O.
FKeys (Direct Editor Only)

This menu provides keyboard equivalents for adding the F1 - F12 keys to the Macro Text field of the Direct Editor. To use
the keyboard equivalents, press Alt + Y to display the FKeys menu. Then press the underlined letter or number of the
option you want. For example, if you wanted to insert the F10 key, you would press Alt + Y + 0.
View
This menu provides a way to maneuver between the major functions of Macro Express. You can either click on the menu
options or use the keyboard equivalents if you don't want to use the mouse. To use the keyboard equivalents, press Alt +
V to display the View menu. Then press the underlined letter of the option you want. For example, if you had the
Scripting Editor open and wanted to go to the Direct Editor you would press Alt + V + D. The other method to navigate is
to click on the icon in the left hand toolbar.
Options
Command Insertion - (Scripting Editor Only)
Instead of using the insert and add arrows located on the Scripting Editor pane, you can set a default for where you
like the commands to be inserted into the script. You can select one of the three options below as your default.
Example of how this works

For this example, select the Insert at End of Macro Script option. We'll assume that you
already have a few lines of script defined for your macro. Now, let's say that you wanted
to add a Text Type command to your macro script. You would first expand the Text
category and then double click on the Text Type command. This opens the Text Type
window. Insert your text and then click on the OK button. After clicking OK, the Text Type
command is automatically inserted as the last command in the script.
Now in the example above we have the Insert at End of Macro Script option selected. In
our macro script, we decide that we need to insert a Keystroke Speed command as the
very first command. The default won't let us do this. Here is how you can do this. First
highlight the first line in the script. Then expand the Keyboard category and highlight the
Keystroke Speed command. Click on the Insert Before button (the blue button with the
arrow preceding the plus sign). This will open the Speed window. Select your delay and
press OK. The command will be inserted before the command that you have highlighted in
the Macro Script. In this case, it will be the first command in the script.
Insert Before Highlighted Command - (Scripting Editor Only)

With this option selected, any commands you add to the script will be inserted to the line above the cursor.
Insert After Highlighted Command - (Scripting Editor Only)
With this option selected, any commands you add to the script will be inserted to the line below the cursor.
Insert at End of Macro Script - (Scripting Editor Only) With this option selected, any commands you add to
the script will be inserted as the last line of the macro script.
Run on Window's Startup

This option will place a shortcut to Macro Express in your Windows Start Up menu. Each time you start Windows,
Macro Express will load. Removing the check from this option will remove Macro Express from the Windows Start Up
menu.
Customize Categories
This option allows you to move commands into other categories that may make more sense for you or create
additional categories. Your changes will be displayed in the Category listings in the Scripting Editor and Direct Editor.
Click on the Add button to create a new category and select an icon. Click on the Modify button to rename the
highlighted category or to select a different icon.
Scripting Editor > Options > Customize Categories
To add or remove a command from a category follow these steps. Click on the Use Custom Categories option.
Highlight the category to be modified. To add a command to the category, highlight that command from the list in
the right hand column of the window. To remove a command from the category, click on one of the highlighted
commands from the list in the right hand column. This will remove the highlight and the command will no longer be
associated with that category. Click OK to save your changes or just click on another category and the changes will
be saved.
Preferences
These options will allow you a number of options for customizing Macro Express to your own tastes. The options
include Appearance, Caching, Capture, Dialogs, Email Defaults, Email Recipients, File Paths, Miscellaneous, Network,
Passwords, Scheduler, Shortkey Preferences and Startup.
Tools
Mouse Locator
Remap Keyboard (Not applicable on Windows Vista or later)
Error Log Viewer
Restore Program Defaults
Restore File Associations (Not applicable on Windows Vista or later)
Restore Keyboard Hooks
Restore Mouse Hooks
Help
These options launch the Help file, other support documents or support pages on our website.
Keyboard Shortcuts Available

Below is a listing of the Keyboard Shortcuts available in the Scripting and Direct Editor. Tables have been set up for
shortcuts available in both editors or in just one of the editors.
Available in both Scripting Editor and Direct Editor
Keystroke
Action
Ctrl+Up Arrow
Move highlighted command(s) up
Ctrl+Down Arrow
Move highlighted command(s) down
Ctrl+X
Cut
Ctrl+C
Copy
Ctrl+V
Paste
Ctrl+A
Select All
Ctrl+B
Toggle Breakpoint
Ctrl+F
Find (text in script)
F3
Find Again
F9
Test Run Macro
Ctrl+S
Save
Ctrl+P
Print
Alt+Left Arrow
Set focus to Commands pane
Alt+Down Arrow
Set focus to Search box
Alt+Right Arrow
Set focus to Macro Script or Macro Text pane
In Scripting Editor Only

Keystroke
Action
Delete
Delete Command
Enter
Modify Command
F8
Continue Test Run
Ctrl+N
Enable/Disable Command
Ctrl+K
Insert Command Before
Ctrl+I
Insert Command After
Ctrl+E
Insert Command to End
Ctrl+D
Duplicate a script line or lines
Ctrl+G
Goto Line
In Direct Editor Only

Keystroke
Action
Delete
Delete a character
Ctrl+R
Find/Replace
Editor Menu - File

Save
This saves the macro data to the macro file.
Print Script
This option will print the macro script - the contents of the macro.
Printer Font
Allows you to select the font size, type, color, etc. for the printing of the macro script.
Printer Setup
Allows you to select the printer and other print options for printing the macro script.
Import from Text File - (Direct Editor Only)

With this option you can import the entire text contents of a text file into Macro Text field of your macro.
Export to Text File - (Direct Editor Only)

This option allows you to save the contents of your macro to a text file. A dialog window will appear asking you to name
the text file and pick a location to save the file.
Return to Macro Explorer

This option will exit the Editor and open the Macro Explorer.
Terminate Macro Express Editor

This will close the Macro Express Editor - the portion of the program that allows you to create or edit macros. You will
still have the Player running in the background so that your macros will play back.
Terminate Macro Express Editor and Player

Selecting this option closes the Editor and Player, shutting down the entire program.
Editor Menu - Edit

Insert Options
These three insert commands are the equivalents of the buttons found on the Scripting Editor. These buttons help
determine where the command will be positioned in the macro script.
Example
Let's say that you have a macro script of 10 lines. You need to insert a Text Type
command between lines 5 and 6. To do this, first highlight line number 6 in the script.
Then expand the Text Type category and highlight the Text Type command. Click on Edit
| Insert Command Before or the CTRL K shortcut. (The other alternative is to click on the
blue Insert Before button.) This will activate the Text Type window. Enter your text and
click OK. The Text Type command will be inserted before line 6 in your macro script.
Insert Command Before - (Scripting Editor Only) With this option selected, any commands you add to the script
will be inserted to the line above the cursor. Press Ctrl K or click through the menu to activate this option.
Insert Command After - (Scripting Editor Only) With this option selected, any commands you add to the script
will be inserted to the line below the cursor. Press Ctrl I or click through the menu to activate this option.
Add Command to End - (Scripting Editor Only) With this option selected, any commands you add to the script will
be inserted as the last line of the macro script. Press Ctrl E or click through the menu to activate this option.
Cut
Standard Windows cut command. Removes the item from the application and saves it to the Windows clipboard.
Copy
Standard copy to Windows clipboard command.
Paste
Standard Paste from Windows clipboard command.
Delete - (Scripting Editor Only)

Highlight one or more lines of the macro script. Then click on Edit | Copy Command Text. The highlighted line or lines will
be deleted from the script. You can also click on the Garbage can icon or right mouse click on the highlighted lines and
then left click on Delete Command from the context menu.
Copy Command Text - (Scripting Editor Only)

Highlight one or more lines of the macro script. Then click on Edit | Copy Command Text. This will copy the lines of script
to the Windows clipboard. Paste the script into another application and the contents are displayed exactly as you would
see it in the Scripting Editor.
Normally if you would copy script to the clipboard and paste it, the contents would display in a macro format, similar to
what you would see in the Direct Editor. But if you need to display the contents exactly as they are shown in the
Scripting editor, use this function.
Enable/Disable Command - (Scripting Editor Only)

Select this option to disable or enable a line in the macro script. Or you can click on the Disable/Enable button in the
Scripting Editor.
Duplicate Command - (Scripting Editor Only)

Highlight one or more lines of the macro script. Then click on Edit | Duplicate Command. This will add another copy of
the command line or lines to the script. This is essentially a one step method for copy and paste. You may also press
CTRL D or click on the Duplicate button to the right of the Macro Script.
Modify Command - (Scripting Editor Only)

Select this option to modify the command highlighted in the macro script. The alternative is to double click on the line in
the script.
Find
You can use the Find command to locate a key word in the replacement text of the macro you are modifying. Click on
Edit | Find or Ctrl F to activate the Find window as shown below. Type in the word that you are looking for and click the
Find Next button. The search will scan your macro for a potential match. If one is found, the first item located will be
highlighted. If no match is found, a message will display indicating that no match was found.
Scripting Editor or Direct Editor > Press F3 > or Edit > Find
Find Again
Click on Edit | Find Again or press the F3 key to look for the next item that matches your search criteria as discussed
above. You can continue using the Find Again feature until a message displays advising that the entire replacement text
has been searched and no more matches have been found.
Search and Replace - (Direct Editor Only)

Use this feature to quickly replace a word found in your macro with another. Click on Edit | Search and Replace or Ctrl R
to activate the Replace window as shown below. Type in the word or phrase that you want replaced in the box next to
Find What. Then input the word or phrase that you want as the replacement in the box next to Replace With. Click the
Find Next button to begin a search. If a match is found, the word or phrase in the script will be highlighted. Click on
Replace to just replace that one instance of a match. Or click Replace All to replace all matches found in the macro.
Direct Editor > Press Ctrl + R > or Edit > Search and Replace
Goto Line - (Scripting Editor Only)

This option prompts you to input the line number in the script that you want to go to. This is handy for larger macros and
is quicker than scrolling through the script.
Select All
This option will highlight the entire macro contents of either the macro script in the Scripting Editor or macro text in the
Direct Editor.
Editor Menu - Debug

Test Run Macro
Press the Test Run Macro button on the toolbar, press F9 or click through the menu option to test the macro that you are
working on. It will run the macro so that you may determine any fine tuning necessary.
Step Through Macro (Scripting Editor Only)

Select this option to test run the macro and have the macro pause after each line in the script. Click on the green arrow
or press F8 to have the macro perform the next command and so on, until the macro has finished. This will simplify the
process for debugging a macro.
Check Syntax Now

This option will check the syntax of your macro script for certain types of errors. A message will appear warning you of
any possible consequences because of the bad syntax. For example, it will notify you that you placed a Shift Key Down
command in the macro but never issued a corresponding Shift Key Up command later in the same macro. It will warn you
if you placed a Start Repeat command but no End Repeat command, or if you used an If command but no corresponding
Else command.
Toggle Breakpoint (Scripting Editor Only)

Highlight a line in the script that you want to set as a breakpoint and then select this menu option or press CTRL B. When
test running a macro, the macro will stop at the breakpoint you have set. At this point you may want to click on Debug
Windows | Variable Values and verify that the variables you are using are being populated correctly. Press the green
arrow to have the macro resume until finished or until the next breakpoint you have defined. To remove a Breakpoint,
highlight the command in the script and press CTRL B or click on the menu item, Debug | Toggle Breakpoint.
Note: The breakpoints are retained when the macro is saved and are available for use the next time the macro is run
through the debugger. The breakpoints are ignored when running the macro outside of the debug mode.
Debug Windows (Scripting Editor Only)
Breakpoints - This option will display any lines that have been assigned as a breakpoint in the macro.
Variable Values - This option will display a grid listing any values assigned to Text, Integer or Decimal variables
used in your macro.
Use Test Window

With this option checked, a "Macro Express Test Window" will be displayed when invoking the "Test Run Macro" option.
This window consists of a memo type entry space. You would essentially use this window to view the playback of text
commands. Leave this box not checked, when testing more complicated commands.
Check Syntax on Save

With this option checked, Macro Express will automatically check the syntax of your macro for certain types of errors,
when the macro is saved. A message will appear warning you of any possible consequences because of the bad syntax
and ask if you would like to correct the error before leaving the editor.
For example, it will notify you that you placed a Shift Key Down command in the macro but never issued a corresponding
Shift Key Up command later in the same macro. It will warn you if you placed a Start Repeat command but no End
Repeat command, or if you used an If command but no corresponding End If command.
Change Focus to Previous Window

When using the F8 key to step through a macro, you have to click the mouse to return focus to the Scripting Editor
between each step. In order to avoid this, select this Change Focus to Previous Window option. The focus will return to
the prior window when stepping through a macro.
Properties
Macro Express - Explorer > Direct or Scripting Editor Button > Properties tab
From the Macro Explorer, click on the Scripting Editor icon to open the Scripting Editor or click on the Direct Editor icon to
open the Direct Editor. Or double click on a defined macro in the list of macros to open your Default Editor. Then click on
the Properties tab to make your selections.
General
Nickname
In the nickname field, you may optionally enter a name that will help remind you what the macro does. This field will
hold up to 50 characters. The nickname is displayed in the Macro Explorer and is required if using commands such as
Macro Run, Macro Disable, Macro Enable and Macro Delete.
Rename a Macro
If editing a macro later, you can overwrite the macro name in the nickname field to change it to something else.
Icon
You can associate an icon with this macro. Click on the Change button to display the Select an Icon window.
Highlight the icon that you want and click on the OK button to load in the icon. Or you can browse through your
system to load in other icons already on your computer. The primary use of this icon is to display it in the Popup
Menu or Floating Menu. A left click on the icon from the Popup Menu or Floating Menu will execute the macro. This
icon will also be placed on your desktop when using the Place on Desktop option.
Last Modified
This displays the date that the macro was last modified and changes were saved.
Active
This check box shows whether the macro has been disabled or is still an active macro. A check in the box signifies
that the macro is enabled (active).
Use Log File
The Log File option captures any error logging that you may be tracking in the macro. It also captures the start and
stop time when the macro is run. The information is displayed in the Log Tab of the Properties window.
performance of certain aspects of Macro Express. Clearing the file or limiting its size will prevent this situation.
Activation
Normally the activation of a macro is assigned when you first create the macro. However, you can use this screen to
change the macro activation or assign more than one activation method to a macro. Just select the options that you
want.
Default Activation
If you have selected more than one method for activating a macro, the Default Activation is the method that will be
displayed in the Macro Explorer. For example, if you have a macro assigned to the hotkey "Ctrl J" and to the shortkey
"email", "Ctrl J" would be displayed in the Activation column of the Macro Explorer if it was selected as the Default
Activation. The first Activation selected is defined as the Default.
HotKey
A hotkey is a combination of keys that, when pressed together, will play back a macro. Macro Express allows hotkey
combinations of a single key up to four keys pressed simultaneously.
Schedule
Scheduled Macros are macros that can be scheduled to play back at a specific time. Just set the schedule for the
macro and it will play back unattended at the designated time. No need to press a hotkey or click on an icon. The
macro will play back at the time you specified. In order for your macro to execute, Macro Express must be running in
the background.
Shortkey
A shortkey is a set of characters such as abc, myname, etc. When the characters are typed into an application, the
macro runs.
Window Title
Using this option will instruct the macro to execute any time the Window Title you specify has focus. In other words,
once the window is activated the macro will play back. The title of the window is that which appears in the caption
bar of a window. Macro Express examines all Window Titles running on the computer in an attempt to find a match.
The Window Title does not need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you wanted to
switch to the Windows Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful as some
Window Titles change based on whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required - "NOTepad" will work as
well as "notepad".
Mouse Click
You can create macros to run when the mouse button is clicked. To do this, first select the Mouse Click option to
display the mouse options shown above. Macro activation can be assigned to the Left, Middle or Right mouse
buttons.
Control
A control refers to identifiable parts of a specific application window. This may include such things as a button, an
edit box, a list box, a window title bar or others. Pressing the Get Control button will launch the Capture Window
Control utility so that you can assign the activation to a Control. The macro will play back when the control is active
or the window with the control is active.
Scope
Essentially, scope refers to which program(s) will allow the macro to activate. From the Macro Explorer, click on the
Scripting Editor icon to open the Scripting Editor or click on the Direct Editor icon to open the Direct Editor. Or double
click on a defined macro in the list of macros to open your Default Editor. Then click on the Scope tab to make your
selections.
Macro Express - Explorer > Direct or Scripting Editor Button > Scope tab
Global
With this option selected, a macro will play back in any Windows application.
Global Except
This option will allow the macro to play back in all Windows applications, except the one or more programs you select.
Click on the Select button to activate the Select Programs window. You can specify the program(s) that will not accept
your macro in this window.
Select Program(s)
You can view and look at all programs that are currently running on your computer. If the program you want is
currently running, you can scroll through the list to find it. Highlight the program you want and click on the Add
button. This will place the .exe name in the right hand column field. You may select more than one .exe file to have
excluded.
Selected Program(s)
In this field you can type in the name of the .exe file and press the Add button to have the file excluded from use
with the macro.
Select From a List of Installed Programs
Or if the program you want is not listed as currently running, click on the Select from List of Installed Programs
button to bring up a list of all programs installed on your computer. Highlight the program you want and click OK to
have this program excluded.
To remove a file from your list, highlight the .exe file located in the right hand column and click on the Remove
button.
Window Specific
A window specific macro will only execute in the window or windows that you designate. If the window is not active the
macro will not play back. To choose this option, click on the Select button to activate the Select Windows screen. Then
you can specify the window(s) that will accept your macro.
Window Title
You can view and look at all windows that are currently running on your computer. If the window you want is
currently running, you can scroll through the list to find it. Click on the window title you want to place it in the list of
acceptable windows in the right hand column. You may add more than one window to have the macro play back in.
Selected Window(s)
In this field you can type in the name of the Window title and press the Add button to have the title added to the list
of windows that will work with the macro.
Run Macro if Window on Top
This option will play the macro back only if the window is the current top-most window (the one that is showing on
top of all other windows).
Exact Match
This option requires that the Window title match exactly before the macro will play back. With this option not
checked, partial matches will work. For example, "notep" would be sufficient to find the "notepad" window.
To remove a window title from your list, highlight the title located in the right hand column and click on the Remove
button.
Program Specific
A program specific macro will only execute in the program or programs that you designate. If the program is not active
the macro will not play back. To choose the program specific macro option, click on the Select button to activate the
Select Programs window. Then specify the program(s) that will accept your macro.
Select Program(s)
currently running, you can scroll through the list to find it. Click on the program you want to select to place in the list
of acceptable programs in the right hand column of this window.
You may add more than one program to have the macro play back in.
Selected Program(s)
In this field you can type in the name of the .exe file and press the Add button to have the file added to the list of
programs that will work with the macro.
Select From List of Installed Programs
If the program you want is not listed as currently running, click on the Select from List of Installed Programs button
to bring up a list of all programs installed on your computer. Highlight the program you want and click OK to place in
the Program Name box.
Run if on Top
This option will play the macro back only if the program is the current top-most program (the one that is showing on
button.
Note: Since specific programs may be assigned to a hotkey, it is possible to assign the same hotkey to multiple
programs. You will only be able to assign one Global Macro to any given hotkey.
Additional notes about Scope: Let's say, for example, that you create a hotkey macro of F12. The scope is set to
program specific so that the macro will only work with Notepad. If you run Wordpad and press F12 the macro will not
work. If you run Notepad and press F12 the macro will play back. Now, this F12 macro may insert text into Notepad and
then later switch over to Wordpad during the same macro. The macro scope does not prevent this. The scope only refers
to the program or window that is open when the macro starts.
Security
Macro Express - Explorer > Direct or Scripting Editor Button > Security tab
This option allows you to set up a password that is required before the macro can be edited, played back or both. From
the Macro Explorer, click on the Scripting Editor icon to open the Scripting Editor or click on the Direct Editor icon to open
the Direct Editor. Or double click on a defined macro in the list of macros to open your Default Editor. Then click on the
Security tab to enter your passwords.
Use Different Passwords for Edit and Run

Select this option if you want to create one password to edit the macro and another password to run the macro. Or you
may decide to have a password for either the Edit or Run and not use a password for the other.
Prompt for Password on Edit
Place a check in the box and click on the Change button to set up a password. With the password information set up,
you will be required to enter your password before you can view the contents of the macro in the Scripting Editor or
Direct Editor. This is one way to prevent others from viewing your macros or being able to alter them.
Prompt for Password on Run
Place a check in the box and click on the Change button to set up a password. With this password information set
up, you will be required to input your password before the macro will run.
Use Same Password for Edit and Run

Select this option and click on the Change button to set up a password. With the password information set up, you will be
required to enter your password before you can view or edit the contents of the macro in the Scripting Editor or Direct
Editor. This same password will also be required before you can run the macro.
Note: You can password protect your entire macro file from viewing or editing. You can also prevent Macro Express from
playing back any macros until a proper password has been entered.
Related Topics
Encrypted Text
Password Protection in Macro
Password Protect Macro File
Notes
Macro Express - Explorer > Direct or Scripting Editor Button > Notes tab
From the Macro Explorer, click on the Scripting Editor icon to open the Scripting Editor or click on the Direct Editor icon to
open the Direct Editor. Or double click on a defined macro in the list of macros to open your Default Editor. Then click on
the Notes tab to enter your notes.
This tab opens the Notes field. This is a free form text editor for you to keep notes about your macro. You may want to
make some notes about what the macro does, how it is to be used or how frequently. Essentially this field can be used to
input any information about your macro that you want to record.
CD-ROM
If you enjoy listening to audio CD's while working at your computer, you can create a number of macros to automate
features found in the CD-Player application shipped with Windows. You can create macros to replay a favorite track, open
and close the tray, start, stop or pause the CD for an interruption, or skip tracks -- practically anything except physically
inserting the CD into your drive.
Scripting Editor > CD-ROM
Commands
Play
Starts the play of a CD already inserted in the CD-ROM drive.
Stop
Stops the play of the CD.
Pause
Pauses the CD which could be handy when the phone rings or you have some other type of interruption.
Next Track
Skips forward to the next track of the CD.
Previous Track
Backtracks to the previous track of the CD.
Go To Track
Automatically forwards to the track number selected.
Step
Specify the number of seconds that you want to fast forward through the CD.
Back
Specify the number of seconds that you want to backtrack through the CD.
Eject
Opens the CD tray to ejects the CD.
Close CD Tray
Closes the CD tray.
CD-ROM Drive
If you have multiple CD-ROM drives on your computer, such as a standard drive and a CD-ROM burner, you can select
which drive to use in your macro.
First Available
This option selects the first available CD-ROM drive.
Choose
This option allows you to select which drive to use.
CD-ROM Drive Letter
Use this in conjunction with the Choose option. Use the drop down list to select which drive to use in the macro.
Clipboard
A number of clipboard options are available in Macro Express. These are described below.
Scripting Editor > Clipboard
Start Clipboard Copy / End Clipboard Copy

This command instructs the macro to consider anything that follows in the macro to be copied to the clipboard. This will
almost always be text. It copies everything until it finds the End Clipboard Copy Command. This command is useful if you
have text such as your address that remains unchanged that you want to be able to place in any program at will.
Copy Text File To Clipboard

Copy the contents of a text file directly to the clipboard. Rather than opening the file, highlighting the text and copying to
the clipboard, this command reads the contents directly from the file and places the contents into the clipboard. Issuing a
subsequent Paste command pastes the contents of the text file into the application currently open.
Copy Graphic to Clipboard

Copies a Windows Bitmap, Windows Metafile or JPEG image directly into the Windows clipboard. Issuing a subsequent
Paste command pastes the image into the application currently open.
Issue Clipboard Copy Command (CTRL+C)

This is the same as issuing a CTRL+c which is the standard in most Windows programs to copy whatever is selected
(highlighted) to the clipboard. This function should follow commands in the macro script that highlight the text or image.
Issue Clipboard Paste Command (CTRL+V)

Clipboard Paste is the same as issuing a Ctrl + v in Windows. The Paste command inserts the contents of the Windows
clipboard into the application currently running.
Issue Clipboard Cut Command (CTRL+X)

Clipboard Cut is the equivalent of issuing a Ctrl + x in Windows. It deletes the selected (highlighted) text or image and
copies it to the Windows clipboard. Follow this command by saving the clipboard contents to a variable or issuing a
clipboard paste command.
Empty the Clipboard

Clears or empties the clipboard of all its contents.
Type Out Text From the Clipboard

This option types the clipboard text letter by letter into another application instead of pasting the entire contents.
Although this method inserts the text slower, (especially large blocks of text), there are applications which do not accept
standard Windows clipboard paste commands.
Ignore CR/LF
The Ignore CR/LF function instructs the macro to type the clipboard text without any carriage returns or line feeds
that may have been copied to the clipboard.
Select this option to ignore carriage returns and line feeds.

Leave the box unchecked to include the carriage returns and line feeds in the text playback.
Save Clipboard Text to a Text File

Save the text contents of the clipboard to a text file. Any images, etc. are ignored.
Prompt for File Name at Macro Run Time
Select this option to be prompted at macro runtime to enter the file name to store the clipboard contents.
To not receive a prompt, enter a file name and the full path or click on the Browse button to search for the desired
text file. Click the OK button to save when finished.
Note: When using Macro Express on Windows 95, 98 or Me, only the first 64K of data is copied to or from the clipboard.
Append Clipboard Text to a Text File

The Clipboard Append Text option appends (adds) the text contents of the clipboard to the end of an existing text file.
Choose this option to be prompted, when running the macro, to enter the file name that will receive the text from
the clipboard.
text file. When finished click the OK button to save.
Save Clipboard Graphic to a Graphic File

Save the graphic content of the clipboard to either a Windows Bitmap file or a JPG file.
Choose this option to be prompted, when running the macro, to enter the file name to store the graphic image from
the clipboard.
text file. When finished click the OK button to save.
Additional Options for the Clipboard Commands that Require Files

With this option checked, you will be prompted when you run the macro to enter a file name for saving or appending text
or saving a graphic image from the clipboard.
Bypass File Existence Check
With this option not checked, Macro Express will verify that the file you selected exists on your computer. If it doesn't,
you will be prompted to select a valid file before being able to continue. Placing a check next to this option will bypass
this file checking process. One reason you may want to do this would be to write a macro for use on another computer
and the file doesn't exist on the machine you are presently using.
If the file cannot be opened, would you like to:
If during the playback of the macro, the file that you have selected could not be found, you can have the macro do one
of the following things.
Halt the Macro: The macro terminates at this point.

Continue the Macro: The macro continues even though the file wasn't found.
Be Asked What to Do: A message pops up during playback of the macro stating that the file was not found
and asking whether you would like to terminate the macro or continue anyway.
Log Messages
The log messages and error messages will help keep track of a macro's progress. If the Log Errors to File command is
placed in the macro, any error occurring in the macro is placed in the Default Error Log File that is defined in the Options
| Preferences | File Paths menu. Or select a new file to log the errors.
The Log Data to File command may be used to state that macro proceeded to a certain point in the script and then
create subsequent messages about the macro's progress.
Scripting Editor > Debug > Log Messages or Log Errors
Log Data To File

This command allows you to save messages to a text file. You can specify the file name or choose the default error
logging file. Optionally select whether to include Date/Time stamping on the message.
Text Variables can be placed in the input fields on this screen. For example, you may place the variable T1 (you would
actually enter %T1%) in the "Message To Log" edit box.
Log Errors To File

This command logs any errors that occur during the execution of a macro to a text file. When this command is
encountered, an entry is immediately made in the error log file allowing you to see that a macro has started. Place this
macro command first in your macro script to ensure that this entry is made when the macro runs. A macro completion
entry will be made in the log file when the macro completes. This will allow you to determine that the macro completed
successfully. All entries will be date/time stamped.
This command is especially helpful with unattended scheduled macros. You can also specify to turn off the display of
Macro Express error messages on the screen so that Macro Express will not be stuck waiting for user intervention in
cases where the macro is run unattended.
performance of certain aspects of Macro Express. Clearing the file or limiting its size will prevent this situation.
Related Topics
Error Log File Path
Error Log Viewer
Desktop
The Desktop commands provide a number of handy shortcuts for arranging your desktop.
Scripting Editor > Desktop
Desktop Cascade
Layers all open windows so that the caption bar of each window is displayed.
Tile Horizontally
Arranges all open windows horizontally on the screen.
Tile Vertically
Arranges all open windows vertically on the screen.
Minimize All Windows

Minimizes all active windows so that the desktop is visible. If you needed to click on an item on the desktop, just press a
hotkey and minimize all active windows, instead of reducing them one by one.
Restore All Windows

This restores all windows to their original size from a minimized state.
Multiple Choice
The Multiple Choice Menu command allows you to display a menu of choices. Choices can be displayed as either radio
boxes (one selection out of the group) or as check boxes (select as many as wanted). Up to 36 choices may be included
in the menu. The selection results are stored in a text string variable which can be tested for conditional processing of
the macro.
Note: To create Yes/No, True/False, or OK/Cancel type menu options, use the If Message command.
Scripting Editor > Dialogs > Multiple Choice Menu
Menu Options
Choose if you want to allow the user to have only one valid selection or multiple selections.
Radio Button Menu
This will display the choices in the menu. Click on the radio button next to the option you want and click OK. The
macro will continue based on your selection. Only one option may be selected.
Checkbox Menu
This will display the choices in the menu. Place checks in the boxes next to your choices and click OK. The macro will
continue based on your selection(s). More than one option may be selected. You will need to insert the logic into the
macro so that it can correctly handle more than one choice selected.
Edit Fields
Destination Variable
This is the variable that will get the result of the user choice(s) from the menu. The If Variable command is used to
test the value of this variable to determine what choice has been selected by the user. In the window displayed
above, the variable T1 was selected. To make the menu work correctly you would use the command "If Variable T1
contains A" to see if the user chose the first item in the Menu List. (Use "If Variable T1 contains B" to test for the
second item in the Menu List, and so on.)
Title
This is the text that will appear in the caption bar of the Window that displays the menu.
Description/Prompt
This is the text that will appear right above the menu choices. This should explain what the choices are all about. For
example, if your menu is a list of income ranges, this text could simply be something like "Please choose your income
bracket".
Menu List
This contains the list of choices for the menu. Each corresponding letter (A, B, C...) represents a different choice in
the menu. They will be displayed in the order shown on this screen. If only 3 entries are filled in (i.e. an entry for A,
B and C), then the menu will only show the 3 entries. Do not leave gaps in the entries or your menu will end up with
blank items in it. In other words, use the first 3, 5 or however many entries you need. Don't skip entries and select
choices A, D, E and G or the menu will display blank items for items B, C and F. The Menu List is a fixed length field.
Approximately the first 50 characters will be displayed in the Multiple Choice Menu during macro playback. Any
excess text will be truncated.
Note: Text Variables may be placed in the Title, Description/Prompt and Menu List input fields. For example, you
may place the variable T1 (you would actually enter %T1%) in the "Description/Prompt" edit box.
Positioning the Menu during macro playback

Dialog Position
You have the option of selecting where you would like the Multiple Choice Menu to appear on the screen when the
macro is run. This allows you to position the menu so that it will not display over top of something else that you want
to remain visible. The default is to position the menu in the center of the screen as shown above. You may also set
the position based on pixels. For example we could enter 300 in the Left field and 200 in the Top field. So in this case
the top of the menu positioned 200 pixels down from the top of the screen. The left edge of the window will be
positioned 300 pixels to the right of the screen's left edge.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the Pause window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the screen by
using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the Multiple Choice Menu Positioner
window. The Multiple Choice Menu Positioner window will move to the position on the screen where the menu will
display during the macro playback. Click on the Save button of the Dialog Positioner window to save the positioning.
Save Item Text

Selecting this item would require you to enter the menu list name used when writing the macro. Based on the example
above, you would use If Variable T1 = Go to Macro Express web site, If Variable T2 = Run Notepad, etc. to create the
rest of the Multiple Choice macro.
Save Item Value

Selecting this item would require you to enter the letter associated with the option. Based on the example above, you
would use If Variable T1 = A, If Variable T2 = B, etc. to create the rest of the Multiple Choice macro.
If Cancel is pressed, don't halt macro, but insert CANCEL in variable

When running the macro and the menu appears, pressing Cancel will not stop the macro. The macro will continue with
"Cancel" being inserted as the value for the variable you selected - T1 in the example above.
Sample Macro
This sample macro is based on the screen shot of the Create a Multiple Choice Menu window displayed in this topic.
Essentially the macro will display a menu of four choices. Select the option you want and then click OK. The macro then
continues based on the choice made. For example if you selected A, then your web browser would load in the Macro
Express web page.
Macro Script
Multiple Choice Menu: Menu
If Variable %T1% = "A"
Web Site: http://www.macros.com
End If
If Variable %T1% = "B"
Launch and Activate: "Notepad.exe"
End If
If Variable %T1% = "C"
Text Type: Insight Software Solutions, Inc.
End If
If Variable %T1% = "D"
FTP Connect
End If
Tips
Make one of the Multiple Choice selections the Default
Let's say you want option B to be your default selection. Use the Variable Set String command and select the Set Value
Now option. Set the value of variable T1 to B. Insert this command before your Menu command in the macro script.
When the macro runs, option B will display as the default selection.
Allow users to select a menu item with the keyboard instead of clicking with the mouse
Let's look at the Multiple Choice Menu image above. There are four entries in the Menu List. We want to set this up so
that when the menu is displayed, the user can press a keystroke rather than click on their choice with the mouse. To do
so we would modify the Menu List to look like the following:
A &Go to Macro Express web site
B &Run Notepad
C &Insert email tagline
D &Connect to FTP site
You'll notice that an ampersand "&" has been placed in front of each item in the menu list. When the list is displayed
during playback of the macro, the letter following the ampersand "&" will be underlined. The user can then press the
underlined letter for the choice they want. This will highlight their choice. Pressing the Enter key will perform the macro
selection chosen.
The ampersand may be placed anywhere in the text string. It doesn't need to be placed before the first letter as in the
example above. For example, we could set item A to read as follows: Go to &Macro Express web site. In this case the M
will be underlined and pressing the "m" key during playback will highlight this menu option.
Note 1: Be careful not to duplicate the underlined letters. Otherwise the first duplicate letter will be the default choice
each time the letter is pressed.
Note 2: If you are using the If Variable Contains command with the Multiple Choice Menu and you have Save Item
Text checked, be sure to change the text you are comparing so that it includes the ampersand "&". For example, change
If Variable %T1% contains "Choice One" to If Variable %T1% contains "&Choice One".
Text Box Display
Scripting Editor > Dialogs > Text Box Display
Macro Express can create popup reminder windows to help make sure that you don't forget something important. The
reminders can be set up as monthly, weekly, daily or a one time occurrence. You may want a message to pop up on your
screen reminding you to pick up a few items at the grocery store on the way home from work. Or you can create a
reminder to make that important phone call at a specific time, or any number of other reminders about things you don't
want to forget.
The reminders are simple to set up. For them to work properly, you will need to create your macro as a scheduled macro.
Otherwise you would need to press a hotkey, click on an icon or type a shortkey to activate the reminder, which
essentially defeats the purpose of the reminder.
This option is also useful for displaying instructions for a macro user to follow. You can have a text box display during the
playback of a macro to give the user additional instructions. This command is also useful for debugging macros. Use this
command to display the contents of variables, to make sure they match what you think they should be. For example, to
display the contents of T1, insert %T1% into the Box Content field. When playing back the macro, the value for T1 will
display in the text box. Then you can see what is actually being saved to variable T1.
Text Box Type / Command

Box remains until user clicks on "OK" button
With this option checked macro execution stops and the user has to click on the "OK" button to close the Text Box and
allow the macro to continue.
Timed Floating Box
With this option checked the execution of the macro continues. The text box stays floating on top until either the
specified time passes or the macro completes its course.
Floating Box until close box command or end of macro
With this option checked the execution of the macro continues. The text box remains on top until the macro finishes, a
"Close Text Box" command inserted in the macro is reached or the box is manually closed.
Close text box

This closes an existing text box that is being displayed. The Box Header must match exactly (uppercase/lowercase
sensitive) in order for this to close the text box. If no match is found on the header, this command is ignored during the
playback of the macro. Note: All floating text boxes will be closed at the end of the macro run.
Box Header
The Box Header allows you to place a title for your reminder. When the reminder displays, the text in the Box Header will
appear in the blue caption bar.
Box Content
The Box Content field provides space to place a more detailed message or instructions. You may also have contents of
variables displayed in this window. To display the contents of T1, insert %T1% into the Box Content field. When playing
back the macro, the value for T1 will display in the text box.
Size and Position
Use these coordinates to size and position the text box for display during the playback of the macro.
Left - Top
Use this option to specify the position of the text box to appear. Insert the pixel coordinates for the left edge of the
text box and for the top edge of the box. For example, entering the coordinates of 0,0 would position the text box in
the upper left hand corner of the screen.
Width - Height
Insert the pixel values for the Width and Height of the text box to be displayed. In the example above, the text box
would display with a width of 278 pixels and a height of 200 pixels.
Set Manually
The set manually option allows you to visually set and view where the text box will be positioned. You can also view
and set the size of the text box by dragging the edges to resize to your requirements.
More info on Set Manually

Dialog Positioner
Instead of using pixels, you can have the Pause window appear in the center, corners or
midpoints of the screen by using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate
the Dialog Positioner and Dialog Sizer windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button. This will move the Dialog Sizer window
relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper left corner, the
Dialog Sizer window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save and this is
where the Text Box will display during playback of the macro.
Dialog Sizer
This window displays the text of your message. It also shows the exact size of the window
as it will appear during macro playback.
You can drag the edges of this window to resize it to your specifications. Click OK to save
the size. The new pixel numbers will be displayed in the Display a Text Box Window.
Always on Top
With this box checked the text box will always remain visible on the screen (on top of other running applications)
until the box is closed.
Keep Focus
With this box checked the text box will be the window that has focus. Leaving this option not checked will leave
focus with another application. So when the text box appears with instructions, you could immediately enter
information into your application without first giving focus back to your program.
Quick Wizard Option
Using the Quick Wizard for creating a reminder gives you a couple of additional options. If you are creating a one-time
reminder, you can select the option to have the macro automatically deleted after playback. You can also choose to tack
on a beep or a .wav (sound) file to the macro to alert you that your message is being displayed. The scheduler is built
into the wizard to make the whole process quick and easy.
Using one of the other methods, you can also play back a sound with your reminder. You'll just need to add the Set
Sound command to your macro script to insert the sound.
Open Explorer To
Scripting Editor > Explorer > Open Explorer To
This command provides a quick way to get to some of the most frequented folders or dialog boxes. Other Explorer
folders not listed below can be directly accessed with a macro using the Open Folder in Explorer command.
Use this option to quickly go to any of the 14 Windows Explorer folders listed below. Select the folder you want and click
OK.
Explorer Folders Available
Control Panel
Desktop Folder
Desktop Programs
Favorites
Fonts
My Computer
Network Neighborhood
Printers
Programs Folder
Recent Documents
Recycle Bin
Start Menu
Startup Folder
User Documents
Open Folder in Explorer
Scripting Editor > Explorer > Open Folder in Explorer
This option provides a shortcut to specific folders found in Windows Explorer. Set up a hotkey or other activation type to
instantly go several layers deep in Windows Explorer. An example might be creating a shortcut to your StartUp folder to
periodically make adjustments. Or you may want to create shortcuts to your Cookies folder to see what a day of Internet
usage has added to this folder. Another folder you may want to monitor is a Temporary folder full of old downloads or
email attachments that might require a periodic cleaning. In short, this option provides you a quick way to get to the
folders you most want to access.
To use this command, just click on the Browse button to locate the Explorer folder that you want. After finding the folder,
click the OK button to save your selection.
Bypass Existence Check
With this option not checked, Macro Express will verify that the folder you selected exists on your computer. If it
doesn't, you will be prompted to select a valid folder before being able to continue. Placing a check next to this
option will bypass this checking process. One reason you may want to bypass this check would be to write a macro
for use on another computer and the folder doesn't exist on the machine you are presently using.
Open Folder
Scripting Editor > Explorer > Open Folder
This command is similar to the Open Folder in Explorer command. "Open Folder" opens a window with only the contents
of a folder displayed. "Open Folder in Explorer" opens a window with two panes that displays the Folders tree view on
the left and the contents of the selected folder on the right.
The Open Folder command provides a shortcut to folders on your computer. Set up a hotkey or other activation type to
instantly go several layers deep in the File/Folder structure. An example might be creating a shortcut to your StartUp
folder to periodically make adjustments. Or you may want to create shortcuts to your Cookies folder to see what a day of
Internet usage has added to this folder. Another folder you may want to monitor is a Temporary folder full of old
downloads or email attachments that might require a periodic cleaning. In short, this option provides you a quick way to
get to the folders you most want to access.
To use this command, just click on the Browse button to locate the folder that you want. After finding the folder, click the
OK button to save your selection.
Bypass Existence Check
With this option not checked, Macro Express will verify that the folder you selected exists on your computer. If it
doesn't, you will be prompted to select a valid folder before being able to continue. Placing a check next to this
option will bypass this checking process. One reason you may want to bypass this check would be to write a macro
for use on another computer and the folder doesn't exist on the machine you are presently using.
Convert File Name

Some programs or systems may display file names and paths in a truncated format, shortening any names in the path to
eight characters or less. Select the file and path and choose whether to convert it to a long or short file name. Note: The
file or folder must already exist before calling the Convert File Name command or this command will not work.
Scripting Editor > Files/Folders > Convert File Name
File Name to Convert

Select the file name to be converted. The folder and entire path must be entered. Or click on the Browse button to
navigate to the desired file. The file name must be a valid file in order for the conversion to work properly.
Action
Select whether to convert the file to a short name or a long name.
Variable to Receive Result

The converted file name is saved to a Text String variable for later use in the macro.
File Manipulation
These file commands allow you to change or create folders, copy file(s), rename file(s), delete file(s), move file(s), or
rename or delete a folder.
Scripting Editor > Files/Folders > File Command needed
Change Default Folder

With this option you would enter in the name of the folder you would like to change. You may use the browse button to
go and find a specific folder. Some programs require a specific default folder to be set before they are run. This option
will allow you to do so.
Create Folder
Use this option to create a new folder. Enter the folder name and the path to the new folder in the edit box.
Rename Folder
Use this option to rename an existing folder.
Delete Folder
This option deletes an existing folder and all of its contents, including subfolders.
Copy File or Files

Enter the name of the file you want to copy in the Text File Path/Name field. Or use the Browse button to find the file to
be copied. In the New Name field type the name you want to give the copied file. Or click on the Browse button to copy
over top of an existing file or to insert the file path and edit the file name.
Note: The Copy File or Files function may also be used for copying folders and the contents of the folder. Insert the path
and the name of the folder in the edit field. Or use the browse button to select a file in the folder to be copied. Remove
the file name from the edit field so that just the path and folder name remain.
Rename File or Files

Enter the name of the file you want to rename in the Text File Path/Name field. Or use the Browse button to find the file
to be renamed. In the New Name field type in the new name you want to give the file.
Move File or Files

Enter the name of the file or files you want to move in the Text File Path/Name field. Or use the Browse button to find
the file to be moved. In the New Path field, enter the path where you want the file(s) moved.
Note: This function may also be used for moving folders and the contents of the folder. Insert the path and the name of
the folder in the edit field. Or use the browse button to select a file in the folder to be moved. Remove the file name from
the edit field so that just the path and folder name remain.
If creating a new folder - the Destination Path/Name, the original folder will be deleted and all of the contents moved to
the new folder. If moving the files to an existing folder, the original folder is not deleted but the files are moved into the
existing folder.
Delete File or Files

Enter the name of the file to be deleted or use the Browse button to find the file to be deleted. This option can be
especially helpful when you are creating temporary files and want them deleted when you are finished.
Note: You can use wild cards in the copy, rename, move and delete "File" commands. Use *.* to retrieve all files, *.doc
to retrieve all the doc files, f*.* to retrieve all the files that start with an f, etc.
Show Progress Dialog Box

If this is checked, then a standard Windows dialog box pops up showing each file being copied. If the action takes only a
very short time to perform, then the dialog box will not show up.
Recurse into subfolders if using Wild Card names
This allows action to be taken on any folder inside the folder you are in if that folder matches the wild card. For example,
if you use *.*, then you will have a match on every folder name. If the command is to copy *.* and you have this option
checked, then all the subfolders and their contents will be copied as well.
Get File Version

This command allows you to obtain the file version number and save this information to a text string variable or integer
variables. This can be useful in comparing two program files to determine which is the later file. Use this command
primarily with executable (.exe) files, .dll files, and similar, as these files normally contain version number information.
Scripting Editor > Files/Folders > Get File Version
Options
Retrieve entire version as a string
This will save the entire version number to a text string variable such as T1. The resulting version number would look
something like 3.8.1.1.
Retrieve individual numbers
Save the components of the version number that you want. You can select from the major, minor, retrieve release or
retrieve build number.
We'll use Macro Express as an example. The major version number is 3. The minor version is 8. This corresponds to
version 3.8 of Macro Express. In this example the retrieve release number would be 1, which also corresponds to the
letter "a". The retrieve build number is 1, which represents build 1. So the version number is Macro Express v3.8a build
1, represented as 3.8.1.1.
Each one of these components may be saved to an Integer variable for later use in the macro.
File to retrieve version from

Press the browse button to locate the file you want to use. Or type in the full file path and name into the edit box. You
can also insert variables in to this field.
Process an ASCII Delimited Text File
Scripting Editor > Files\Folders > ASCII File Begin Process or ASCII File End Process
These commands allow you to process a Delimited Text File. You can choose one of several commonly used file formats,
Comma Delimited, Tab Delimited, or ASCII Delimited. Most spreadsheet and database programs can export information
in one of these file formats.
Open and Start Processing a Delimited Text File

File Name
This displays the name and location of the file to be processed. Click on the Browse button to find the file and path or
enter it directly.
With this option not checked, Macro Express will verify that the file you selected exists on your computer. If it
doesn't, you will be prompted to select a valid file before being able to continue. Placing a check next to this option
will bypass this file checking process. One reason you may want to do this would be to write a macro for use on
another computer and the file doesn't exist on the machine you are presently using.
Start Processing Record
This allows you to specify the record to start processing in the file. If you plan to process the entire file, you would enter
1 in the value field to indicate starting with the first record. For processing ASCII Delimited Text Files, you can now use
an Integer variable when specifying which record to start processing and the number of records to process. This means if
you wanted to open a single record in an ASCII delimited file, you could choose what that record would be from an
outside source.
These outside sources could be a value that you prompt for. This would allow you to choose which record to perform an
action on during the playback of the macro. Or you could have the variable set to a random number. This would allow
you to randomly load in a text value (say you had a list of email taglines--save them in a text file and let the macro
randomly pick one for you).
What To Process
If you want to process all the records that follow after the specified starting record, then choose "Process All Records". If
you only want to process a certain range of records (or lines of text), then choose the "Process Partial Records". With this
option checked, you will be able to enter the number of records you wish to process.
Variable To Receive First Field

This is the text variable that will receive the first field in a record. Sequential text variables will receive sequential field
numbers. For example, if you were to specify T1 as the starting text variable, T1 would get the first field in the record, T2
would get the second field in the record and so on. Since only 99 text variables are available in Macro Express, there is a
limitation of a maximum of 99 fields that can be read out of an ASCII Delimited Text File. These variables may then be
used and processed by other macro commands.
End Processing Loop

This command instructs the File Processing command to go and get the next record out of the file and to start processing
the macro commands that immediately follow the Open and Start Processing an ASCII Delimited Text File command. If
all records have been read out of the text file as instructed, then control goes to the macro command that immediately
follows this command.
Note: Text Variables can be placed in the input fields on this screen. For example, you may place the variable T1 (you
would actually enter %T1%) in the "File Name" field.
Sample Text Files

Comma Delimited Text
In a Comma Delimited Text file, every field in each record is separated by a comma. Any field that contains a comma
must be surrounded by a double quote (").
MC,"98 SE, 2000",,Athlon,750 MHz,256 M,,83
JH,95 B,5.00.3314.2101,P II,333 MHz,65 M
KH,"98 SE, 2000",5.00.3314.2101,P III,550 MHz,384 M,,,"17"" Flat"
KG,XP,5.50.4807.2300,P 4,1.7 GHz,256 M,,,"17"" Flat, 15"" LCD"
SJ,98 SE,,Athlon,900 MHz,128 M,,,"17"""
CM,2000 SP1,,Athlon,650 MHz,128 M,,,"17"""
BW,98,,P II,300 MHz,192 M,,79
JW,NT SP6,,Celeron,600 MHz,256 M,35 Gig,83
JW,98 SE,,P III,700 MHz,256 M,18 Gig
JW,95,,Pentium,200 MHz,80 M,500 M
JC,2000,,PII,,128 M,,76
BF,Win 95,,,,,,78
BL,2000,,Dual PIII,1GHz,256M,30G raid,83
SP,2000 SP2,,Mobile Pentium MMx,233MHz,128M,,76
Tab Delimited Text
In a Tab Delimited Text file, every field in each record is separated by a Tab character.
MC<tab>98 SE, 2000<tab><tab>Athlon<tab>750 MHz<tab>256 M<tab><tab>83
JH<tab>95 B<tab>5.00.3314.2101<tab>P II<tab>333 MHz<tab>65 M
KH<tab>98 SE, 2000<tab>5.00.3314.2101<tab>P III<tab>550 MHz<tab>384 M<tab><tab><tab>17" Flat
KG<tab>XP<tab>5.50.4807.2300<tab>P 4<tab>1.7 GHz<tab>256 M<tab><tab><tab>17" Flat, 15" LCD
SJ<tab>98 SE<tab><tab>Athlon<tab>900 MHz<tab>128 M<tab><tab><tab>17"
CM<tab>2000 SP1<tab><tab>Athlon<tab>650 MHz<tab>128 M<tab><tab><tab>17"
BW<tab>98<tab><tab>P II<tab>300 MHz<tab>192 M<tab><tab>79
JW<tab>NT SP6<tab><tab>Celeron<tab>600 MHz<tab>256 M<tab>35 Gig<tab>83
JW<tab>98 SE<tab><tab>P III<tab>700 MHz<tab>256 M<tab>18 Gig
JW<tab>95<tab><tab>Pentium<tab>200 MHz<tab>80 M<tab>500 M
JC<tab>2000<tab><tab>PII<tab><tab>128 M<tab><tab>76
BF<tab>Win 95<tab><tab><tab><tab><tab><tab>78
BL<tab>2000<tab><tab>Dual PIII<tab>1GHz<tab>256M<tab>30G raid<tab>83
SP<tab>2000 SP2<tab><tab>Mobile Pentium MMx<tab>233MHz<tab>128M<tab><tab>76
ASCII Delimited Text
In an ASCII Delimited Text file, every field in each record is surrounded by double quote marks (") and separated by a
comma. If the text contains a double quote it must use two double quotes in a row or it will be interpreted as the end of
the field. This is the file format used and supported by prior versions of Macro Express.
"MC","98 SE","2000","","Athlon","750 MHz","256 M","","83"

"JH","95 B","5.00.3314.2101","P II","333 MHz","65 M"
"KH","98 SE","2000","5.00.3314.2101","P III","550 MHz","384 M","","","17"" Flat"
"KG","XP","5.50.4807.2300","P 4","1.7 GHz","256 M","","","17"" Flat, 15"" LCD"
"SJ","98 SE","","Athlon","900 MHz","128 M","","","17"""
"CM","2000 SP1","","Athlon","650 MHz","128 M","","","17"""
"BW","98","","P II","300 MHz","192 M","","79"
"JW","NT SP6","","Celeron","600 MHz","256 M","35 Gig","83"
"JW","98 SE","","P III","700 MHz","256 M","18 Gig"
"JW","95","","Pentium","200 MHz","80 M","500 M"
"JC","2000","","PII","","128 M","","76"
"BF","Win 95","","","","","","78"
"BL","2000","","Dual PIII","1GHz","256M","30G raid","83"
"SP","2000 SP2","","Mobile Pentium MMx","233MHz","128M","","76"
Example
Each field in a record (a record is a line of the text file) is loaded into a variable which can be used throughout the macro.
You can specify which line to start with in the text file and to either process all the records from that point or just a
specific number of records. Use of the variables and processing will take place between the command to open the file
and the command to end the file processing.
This example uses any one of the example data files shown above and this macro:
ASCII File Begin Process: "test.txt" (Tab Delimited Text )
Text Box Display: T1 T2 T3 T4 T5 T6 T7 T8 T9
ASCII File End Process
For this example, T1 is entered in the field labeled "Variable to Receive First Field" in the ASCII File Begin Process
command.
The first time through the Process loop the variables will be:
T1 = MC
T2 = 98 SE, 2000
T3 =
T4 = Athlon
T5 = 750 MHz
T6 = 256 M
T7 =
T8 = 83
T9 =
The second time through the Process loop the variables will be:
T1 = JH
T2 = 95 B
T3 = 5.00.3314.2101
T4 = P II
T5 = 333 MHz
T6 = 65 M
T7 =
T8 =
T9 =
The third time through the Process loop the variables will be
T1 = KH
T2 = 98 SE, 2000
T3 = 5.00.3314.2101
T4
T5
T6
T7
T8
T9
=
=
=
=
=
=
P III
550 MHz
384 MHz
17" Flat
Related Topic
Process a Text File
Process a Text File

These commands allow you to process a basic Text File where each line of the text file is considered as a single entry to
be read in.
Scripting Editor > Files\Folders > Text File Begin Process or Text File End Process
Each line in the text file is loaded into a variable which can be used throughout the macro. You can specify which line to
start with in the text file and to either process all the lines from that point or just a specific number of lines. Use of the
variable and processing will take place between the command to open the text file and the command to end the text file
processing.
Example
If you have a text file containing the following:
MC,"98 SE, 2000",,Athlon,750 MHz,256 M,,83
JH,95 B,5.00.3314.2101,P II,333 MHz,65 M
KH,"98 SE, 2000",5.00.3314.2101,P III,550 MHz,384 M,,,"17"" Flat"
and variable T1 is used as the "Variable to Receive First Field".
The first time through the Process loop the variables will be:
T1 = MC,"98 SE, 2000",,Athlon,750 MHz,256 M,,83
The second time through the Process loop the variables will be
T1 = JH,95 B,5.00.3314.2101,P II,333 MHz,65 M
The third time through the Process loop the variables will be
T1 = KH,"98 SE, 2000",5.00.3314.2101,P III,550 MHz,384 M,,,"17"" Flat"
Open and Start Processing a Text File

File Name
This is the name of the text file that should be opened and processed. Click on the Browse button to locate the file and
path on your computer.
Start Processing Record
This allows you to specify the line to start processing in the text file. If you plan to process the entire text file, you would
enter 1 in the Value field to indicate starting with the first record. Or you can use an Integer variable when specifying
which record to start processing and the number of records to process.
What To Process
If you want to process all the records that follow after the specified starting record, then choose "Process All Records". If
you only want to process a certain range of records (or lines of text), then choose the "Process Partial Records". With this
option checked, you will be able to enter the number of records you wish to process.
Variable To Receive Line of Text

This is the text variable that will receive the value of the text line in the file. This variable may then be used and
processed by other macro commands.
End Processing Loop

This command instructs the Text File Processing command to go and get the next entry out of the text file and to start
processing the macro commands that immediately follow the Open and Start Processing Text File command. If all entries
have been read out of the text file as instructed, then control goes to the macro command that immediately follows this
command.
Note: Text Variables can be placed in the input fields on this screen. For example, you may use the variable T1 (you
would actually enter %T1% in the Filename field) as your file name.
Related Topic
Process an ASCII Delimited Text File
Set File Attributes
Scripting Editor > Files/Folders > File Attributes
When using My Computer or Windows Explorer, right click on a file name. A menu appears. One of the menu items is
Properties. Left mouse click on Properties to see more details about the file. At the bottom of the Properties window you
may see the following file Attributes displayed - Archive, System, Hidden and Read Only.
The Set File Attributes command will allow you to change the file attributes of files you are working on without going
through My Computer or Windows Explorer. Select the filename that you want to work with. Then select the attributes
you want turned on or off. True will activate the attribute. False will remove the attribute from the file.
Dial-Up Commands
Dial-Up Networking allows you to connect your computer to another computer or the Internet using your modem. For
this option to work, you must have the Windows Dial-Up Networking option installed. You must also have created your
own phone book entries which can normally be done through the Windows Accessories folder. The Dial-Up Networking
commands allow you to dial up a connection, hang up a connection or keep trying until a successful connection is made.
Scripting > Internet > Dial-Up Networking
If Dial-Up Connection Successful

The If Dial-up Connection Successful feature allows you to test to see if your dial-up networking attempt was successful
or not. All commands following this statement, until an End If or Else command is reached, will be executed if the dial-up
connection is successful. If the dial-up fails and an Else command is used, then all commands following the Else until an
End If is reached will be executed. By placing this inside a "Repeat Until" loop, this command will repeatedly attempt to
dial until a successful connection is made.
Sample
This set of commands instructs the macro to keep trying to dial up and connect until
successful. After connecting, go to the www.macros.com site.
We've instructed the macro to repeat until variable T1 equals 1. If the dial up connection is
successful, then we set the variable T1 to 1. This will end the Repeat loop and load the
www.macros.com site. If the connection was not successful, the variable T1 is set to 0.
The macro will continue repeating until T1 equals 1.
Repeat Until %T1% = "1"
If Dial-Up Successful: my modem
Variable Set String %T1%"1"
Else
Variable Set String %T1%"0"
End If
Repeat End
WebSite: http://www.macros.com
If Online
The If Online feature allows you to test to see if you are currently connected to the Internet. All commands following this
statement, until an End If or Else command is reached, will be executed if you are currently online. If you are not online
and an Else command is used, then all commands following the Else until an End If is reached will be executed.
Sample
This macro simply instructs to go to the web site www.macros.com if you are connected to
the Internet. If not, dial and connect to the Internet. Then go to the www.macros.com
site. You could combine this macro with the previous example to have the macro continue
dialing until successfully connected.
If Online
Else
Dial-Up Networking: mymodem
End If
Dial a Phone Book entry

Choosing this option will display a list of all the phone book entries which you may have created. Simply choose the one
which you would like to dial up and connect to. You will also need to specify the User Name and Password associated
with the phone book entry. You can click on the retrieve button which will always automatically grab the currently defined
User Name for you. Depending on the security of your system, it may also grab the password for you. The actual
password is not displayed, but a series of asterisks are displayed in its place.
Hang Up
Choosing this option simply instructs the macro to hang up or terminate a Dial-Up Connection if one is currently active.
Get IP Address
This command will find the IP (Internet Protocol) address of the computer running the macro and save this address to a
Text String variable.
Scripting Editor > Internet > Get IP Address
IP Address
An IP address is an identifier for a computer on a TCP/IP network. Networks using the TCP/IP protocol route messages
based on the IP address of the destination. The format of an IP address is a 32-bit numeric address written as four
numbers separated by periods. Each number can be from zero to 255. An example IP address is 192.14.122.216.
Within an isolated network, IP addresses can be assigned at random as long as each one is unique. However,
connecting a private network to the Internet requires using registered IP addresses (called Internet addresses) to avoid
duplicates.
Store Address In
The Get IP Address command will identify the IP address of the network card on your computer - the IP address of your
computer within a private network. Or if you are connecting to the Internet, this command will identify the IP address
used to connect to the Internet. For a dial up connection, this IP address is assigned by your Internet Service Provider. It
may change each time you connect to the Internet.
The address is stored to the text string variable that you select. This command may also help in determining if an online
connection is active or not.
FTP ChMod Command

These commands assume that you are familiar with operating FTP servers and clients.
Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP ChMod
Select the filename that you want to edit. Select the attributes for the file you have selected. You can select file rights for
yourself, your group and all others. You can elect to make the file readable so that any of these three may have read
rights to the file. You can also elect to make this file writable, so that it may be edited by one or any of these three. Or
you can make certain files executable so that others may be able to access the file and run it.
You can place checks in the boxes or assign resulting numbers that would apply. When you check the box, a number is
automatically assigned below.
Save Result to Variable

The message generated by the FTP server, whether a success or failure message, is saved to the variable that you
designate. You will need to monitor the variable to determine the status of the operation. You can do this by placing the
variable in a Text Box Display command. A window would pop up at the end of your macro displaying the variable
results. Insert %T1% into the Box Content field to have the variable contents displayed, if you have assigned the variable
to T1. Or you could have the results of the variable sent to a text file to review later.
FTP Connect
Only one FTP connection can be used at any give time. These commands assume that you are familiar with operating
FTP servers and clients.
Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP Site Connect
FTP Site Connect

The options shown in the window above pertain to connecting to a FTP site.
Host - Insert the address of the FTP server to which you wish to connect.
Port - The port on which to connect to the FTP server. This is generally port 21.
Anonymous Login - This option allow you to connect to the FTP server anonymously. Most servers allow these
kinds of connections, though they restrict the user to specific directories.
User Name - The login name used to connect to the FTP server.
Password - Insert the password associated with the login name.
Passive Mode - This is used if the user is behind a firewall. Most firewalls do not allow users to connect to FTP
servers unless they are in passive mode. This is primarily for security reasons.
Save result to Variable - Any error or success messages are stored in the specified variable. It is up to the user to
determine if the connection to the FTP server was successful. You can do this by placing the variable in a Text Box
Display command. A window would pop up at the end of your macro displaying the variable results. Insert %T1%
into the Box Content field to have the variable contents displayed, if you have assigned the variable to T1. Or you
could have the results of the variable sent to a text file to review later.
FTP Site Disconnect

Disconnects a user from an FTP server. This doesn't have any effect if the user is not connected when this command is
executed.
FTP Directories
Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP List Directory or FTP Get Current Directory
Get Current Directory

This command retrieves the present working directory on the FTP Server. This information will be saved to a text string
variable. Or if for some reason the retrieval was not successful, the variable will contain the error message information.
List Directory
This command retrieves a listing of the files in the current directory on the FTP Server.
File Mask
Specifies the files you are looking for in the directory. Wildcards are permitted.
Detailed List
This returns all values about the files in the current directory, such as file size, permissions and the
owner.
Variable to Receive Result

The information retrieved is stored in the text string variable that you select.
FTP Directory Commands

Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP Change Directory
FTP Change Directory

This changes the current working directory on the FTP site. The user can select a specific directory to change to. This can
be an absolute path or a relative path. This functionality is identical to the Change Directory command that works on the
user's computer. However, this command also adds the ability to go up a level. This will just switch to the previous
directory in the hierarchy. Note: Path delimiters in an FTP server are the forward slash '/', not the backslash '\' that
Windows uses.
Go Up a Level
This options moves you up one folder in the FTP server folder hierarchy.
Specific Directory
This option moves you to a specific folder in the FTP server.
FTP Make Directory

This command creates the specified directory on the FTP server.
FTP Delete Directory

This command will delete a specified directory from the FTP server.

FTP File Commands
Scripting Editor > Internet > Choose FTP command needed
Get Filesize
This command will find the size of a FTP file. Note: A return value of -1 means that the FTP server does not support the
Size command.
Variable to Receive FTP Result
designate. You will need to monitor the variable to determine the status of the operation. You can do this by placing
the variable in a Text Box Display command. A window would pop up at the end of your macro displaying the
variable results. Insert %T1% into the Box Content field to have the variable contents displayed, if you have
assigned the variable to T1. Or you could have the results of the variable sent to a text file to review later.
Filename
Insert the name or path and name of the file for which you want to obtain the file size.
Variable to Receive Filesize
The file size will be stored in an integer variable. Select the variable you want this information saved to.
Rename File
This command allows you to rename a FTP file.
Variable to Receive FTP Result
designate. You will need to monitor the variable to determine the status of the operation. You can do this by placing
the variable in a Text Box Display command. A window would pop up at the end of your macro displaying the
variable results. Insert %T1% into the Box Content field to have the variable contents displayed, if you have
assigned the variable to T1. Or you could have the results of the variable sent to a text file to review later.
Filename
Insert the name or path and name of the file that you want to rename.
New Filename
Insert the new filename or new path and name of the file.
Delete File
This command will delete the FTP file that you specify. This command also accepts wildcards, such as *.*, in the filename
edit box.
FTP Keep Alive

This command sends a signal during macro playback to keep the FTP connection alive.
There is no dialog window associated with this command. From the list of commands in the Scripting Editor or Direct
Editor click on the Internet folder to expand the list of commands. Double click on the FTP Keep Alive command to insert
into the macro.
Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP Keep Alive
FTP Send File / Get File

Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP Send File
FTP Send File

Sends the selected file from the user's computer to the FTP server.
FTP Get File

Retrieves the selected file from the FTP server to the destination folder on the user's computer.
Transfer Type:
You need to determine if the file being sent or received is a Binary file or an ASCII file.
Note: The Scroll Lock + Pause or other methods available to abort the macro will not work during the playback of the
FTP Send File and FTP Get File commands.
FTP Site
You can insert into your macro a command to initiate an FTP transfer.
Scripting Editor > Internet > Web FTP Site
Just insert the FTP address you need and click the OK button. An FTP transfer will be initiated as part of your macro
when the macro is executed.
FTP Site Command

These commands assume that you are familiar with operating FTP servers and clients. This option allows you to send a
FTP command, one that we otherwise wouldn't support, to the FTP server.
Scripting Editor > Internet > FTP Site Command
Command to Send to FTP Server

This is essentially a freeform field where you can send a command to the FTP server. There are a large number of FTP
commands available. You will need to know the correct format of the command to send to the FTP server. This field is
case sensitive. You will also need to make sure that the FTP server supports the command that you want to send.
FTP Library Help Definition of FTP Site
"Site is a procedure used to send a site-specific FTP command directly to the FTP server. Site is used by an FTP
server to provide services specific to the host system that are essential to file transfer, but not sufficiently universal
to be included as commands in the FTP protocol."
In short, the FTP Site command will not send "normal" commands like "ls" mget or mput. The commands that are
sent have a syntax of "SITE something".

Ping Site
Scripting Editor > Internet > Ping Site
This command pings the web site or IP address that you select.
Address/Host Name
Insert the address of the site that you would like to ping. This can be an address such as www.macros.com or an IP
address.
Store Results In
The results of the ping are saved to a text string variable. Select which variable you want from the drop down list. The
results will indicate if the ping was successful or indicate various error messages.
Receive Timeout
Set the amount of time for the macro to ping the site.
Send Email
Sending messages by email can now be automated and activated by the touch of a key. Send to one or multiple
recipients, carbon copy (cc), and blind carbon copy (bcc). Select recipients at macro design time or at macro run time. A
built in email address manager allows you to maintain a list of frequent recipients.
You can generate the email message contents at macro design time, when the macro runs, from the contents of the
clipboard or from a text file. One or multiple attachments may be included with the email. Attachments may also be
specified at macro design time or at macro play back time. You can also maintain or browse a log of all email messages
sent. An email quick wizard prompts you through all aspects of creating a macro for sending email. This includes the
option to specify a dial-up Internet connection.
The Send Email command is divided into three sections, Recipients, Message and Attachments. These are each discussed
below.
Recipients
Scripting Editor > Internet > Email Send - Recipients
Modify Recipient List

Click on this button to add, remove or modify any names on your email recipient list.
Display Email Sent Notification
This option will pop up a small box during macro playback notifying you that the email was sent successfully.
Choose Now
With this option checked, you will select the name of the person(s) you want to send your email. Highlight the name of
the person you want to receive your email message. Click on the To button. That person's name will be added to the edit
box as the primary recipient. If you want to carbon copy someone else, highlight that person's name and click on the CC
button. Similarly if you want to Blind Carbon Copy your message to someone, highlight that person's name and click on
the BCC button. You may have more than one person listed in any of these fields.
Prompt for Recipients
With this option checked, a window similar to the one above will appear when you trigger your macro. Select the
person(s) you want to send the message to by highlighting the recipients' name(s) listed in the first column. Then select
the To, CC and BCC buttons for the appropriate option.
Name/Address
Each column gives you the choice of displaying either the recipient's name or their email address.
Message
Scripting Editor > Internet > Email Send - Message
Send Fixed Text

Using this option will send a fixed text script each time you invoke the macro. A text box will appear as shown above,
where you can type in the text that you want associated with this macro.
Prompt for Subject & Text
When selecting this option you will be prompted at the time you execute the macro to include a text message. Click on
the hotkey (or other macro activation type) you assigned for your email message and a window similar to the one
displayed above will appear. Type your subject heading in the Subject text box. In the text box type in the body of your
message. After entering the text message, click on the Continue button to send the email. Or you can click on the Abort
Macro button to not send the message.
Send Text From Clipboard
Click on the hotkey (or other macro activation type) you assigned for your email message and your message will be sent
to the person designated in your macro. The message sent will be whatever you currently have saved in the Windows
Clipboard. With this option, you could copy an item to the clipboard from the Web (or from any program), then press
your hotkey or other trigger and the clipboard contents will be sent via email to your designated recipient(s).
Send Text From File
This option will send the contents of a text file that you have selected. When selecting this option, a window similar to
the one above will appear. Instead of entering your own text, there will be a browse button allowing you to find the text
file you want to use as your message.
Attachment
Scripting Editor > Internet > Email Send - Attachment
No Attachment
Click on this option if you do not want to include an email attachment to your message.
Choose Attachment Now
Click on this option if you want to include an email attachment to your message. The window will appear as above. Click
on the add button and a window box will activate allowing you to browse your computer to find the attachment you want
to send. You can have multiple attachments. After you have selected your first attachment and it is placed in the list, click
on the Add button again to add another.
You can also highlight an attachment from the list and click on the Delete button to remove the attachment.
Prompt for Attachment
Selecting this option will allow you to also include an attachment to your message. You will be prompted at the time you
execute the macro to include the attachment. Click on the hotkey (or other macro activation type) you assigned for your
email message and the window similar to the one displayed above will appear. Click on the Add button and a window will
activate allowing you to browse your computer to find the attachment you want to send. You can have multiple
attachments. After you have selected your first attachment and it is placed in the list, click on the Add button again to
add another. You can also highlight an attachment from the list and click on the Delete button to remove the
attachment.
Once you have added your attachment(s), click on the Continue button to send the email.
Prompt Window Positioning

If you have selected any of the Prompt options - Prompt for Recipients, Prompt for Subject & Text or Prompt for
Attachment - you can specify where the email prompt window will display during playback of the macro. You can define
an area of the screen to display the window or insert the pixel coordinates directly.
Window Positioning
You can assign where you would like the email prompt window to appear on the screen during playback of the macro.
The coordinates allow you to position the email prompt window to an area of the screen most convenient for your use.
The default display is the center of the screen. You can also define the coordinates in pixels. Enter the pixel coordinates
into the Left and Top edit fields. If you entered 200 into the Left field, the window would be positioned 200 pixels to the
right of the left edge of the screen. Similarly, if you entered 200 into the Top field, the window would be positioned 200
pixels down from the top edge of the screen.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the email prompt window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the screen
by using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the email prompt window. This will move
the email prompt window relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper left corner, the email
prompt window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save on the Dialog Positioner and this is where the
email prompt window will display during playback of the macro.
Web Site
Scripting Editor > Internet > Web Site
Web Site
You can insert a command into your macro to launch an Internet web site. Just type in the web site address you need
and click the OK button. The web site you designated will be launched as part of your macro when the macro is
executed. If your browser is not open, the macro will also open the browser. If you want to have the macro go to a
secure web page, just insert the "s" in the default http:// setting - to https://.
Favorites
Rather than type in a URL, click on the Favorites button. This will bring up a list of URL's in your Favorites folder.
Navigate to the URL you want, highlight it and click OK to insert the URL into the Web Site field.
Launch Using
You can choose to have the macro open the browser you have set as your Windows default browser. The other
option is to select Internet Explorer as the browser. If macro timing is critical and you normally use a browser other
than Internet Explorer, you may want to select the Internet Explorer option to take advantage of the Wait for Web
Page command.
Wait for Web Page
This option is only functional with Internet Explorer. When selected, the macro will pause until the web page has
fully loaded. After the page has fully loaded, the macro will continue.
Keys Up or Down
The Keys Up or Down window (as shown below) allows you to simulate holding down or releasing the Control, Alternate,
Shift or Windows keys. This allows you to incorporate other functions that may require you to hold down one of these
keys and another key simultaneously to activate a function.
Scripting Editor > Keyboard > Select Key Option
To use one of these options, just click on the item you want and click OK to insert into your macro.
For example, if you wanted to highlight text you could do the following: Click on Shift Key Down and OK. Then using the
Text Type command you can add <right arrows>, <down arrows>, End or Home to highlight the amount of text you
need. Then return to the Keys Up or Down window to click on Shift Key Up and OK. This will release the Shift key before
continuing with the macro.
Note: Whenever you issue a Down key it is very important to issue a corresponding Up key, or it may appear that your
keyboard has become stuck.
Toggle Keys
Scripting Editor > Keyboard > Select Option
The Toggle Keys window (as shown above) activates or releases the Caps Lock, Num Lock or Scroll lock keys. To use
these options, select the desired option and click OK to insert into the macro script.
For example, if you wanted to capitalize a section of text (all caps), insert the Caps Lock On command before the text
that is to be replayed. If you want to revert back to regular text, place a Caps Lock Off command before the next section
of Text.
Note: If you set the Caps Lock, Num Lock or Scroll lock on during a macro, these items will remain locked after the
macro has completed, unless you issue a corresponding Lock Off command during the macro.
AND/OR/XOR Logic
These commands can be used to increase the power and flexibility of the If statements.
Scripting Editor > Logic > AND - OR - XOR
AND
Use this command if you require two or more conditions to be valid. Let's use variables T1 and T2 in an example. We
can create a macro that states If T1 = Test AND If T2 = Example, run the macro "Macrotest. If T1 does not = Test or if
T2 does not = Example, then a text box will open instead of running the "Macrotest" macro. Both IF statements must be
true in order for the "Macrotest" macro to continue.
You may use multiple AND commands placed between the If statements. In this scenario only one End If command is
required at the end of the string.
Sample Macro
If Variable %T1% = "Test"
AND
If Variable %T2% = "Example"
Macro Run: Macrotest
Else
Text Box Display: Not Found
End If
OR
Use this command if you require one of two or more conditions to be valid. In the example above, only one of the two If
statements must be valid. Either T1 can equal Test or T2 can equal Example. Both are not required in order for the
"Macrotest" macro to run.
You may use multiple OR commands placed between the If statements. In this scenario only one End If command is
required at the end of the string.
Sample Macro
OR
Else
End If
XOR
With this option, one of the variables must be false and the other valid. In the example above, T1 would equal Test and
T2 would NOT equal Example, or vice versa. In this case the "Macrotest" macro would run. If both If statements were
invalid or both were true, the macro would display a text box and not run the "Macrotest" macro.
Only one End If command is required for the two If statements, if the XOR command is placed between them.
Sample Macro
XOR
Else
End If
Related Topic
Case and Switch Commands
If Commands
If commands are useful in helping to determine a given condition. Based on the condition, you perform a set of macro
commands. The End If, Else and AND/OR/XOR commands are used in conjunction with the If Commands. Text Variables
can be placed in the input fields on this screen. For example, you may place the variable T1 (you would actually place
%T1% in the field) in the "program name" field when selecting the "If Program Running Command".
Scripting Editor > Logic > Select If Command
If File Exists / If File Does Not Exist

These commands test if the file selected does or does not exist on the computer.
If File Ready / If File Not Ready

These commands test if the file selected is or is not ready to accept input. They test if the file is still busy or not. During
macro playback it's possible that another application is still writing to it. These commands check to see if the file is still
being written to or not.
Insert the file name and path in the Filename edit field. Or click on the Browse button to locate the file needed.
Use Search Path
Use Search Path instructs Macro Express to look for the file in the directories listed in the Windows Path in addition to
the current directory.
If Folder Exists / If Folder Does Not Exist

These commands test if the folder selected does or does not exist on the computer. Insert the folder name or click on the
Browse button to locate the folder.
If Window On Top / If Window Not On Top

These commands test if the designated window is on top (has focus) or is not on top (does not have focus).
If Window Running / If Window Not Running

These commands test if a given window is running or not running anywhere on your computer. It does not have to be
the window that is on top.
Enter the name of the window title in the edit field. Or click on the Select button when using any of the four If Window
commands to retrieve a list of all Windows currently running on your computer. Highlight the window you want and click
on the OK button to insert this title as your window selection.
Exact/Partial Match
Select whether the window title must match exactly or whether a partial match is acceptable.
If Program On Top / If Program Not On Top

These commands test if a given program is on top (has focus) or not on top (does not have focus).
If Program Running / If Program Not Running

These commands test if a given program is running or not currently running on your computer. It does not have to be
the program that is on top. The application could be running in the background.
Insert the program name and path in the edit field. Or click on the Select button when using any of the four If Program
commands to retrieve a list of all programs currently running on your computer. Highlight the program you want and
click on the OK button to insert this as your program selection.
If Clipboard Text Equals

This command tests if the text contents of the clipboard are equal to a specified value.
If Clipboard Contains
This command tests if the text contents of the clipboard contain a specific value.
Must match uppercase and lowercase

Select this option if the text comparison is case sensitive.
If Macro Enabled - If Macro Disabled

These commands test if a macro is currently enabled or not. All commands following these statements, until an End If or
Else command is reached, will be executed if the statement is true. If it is not true and an Else command is used, then all
commands following the Else until an End If is reached will be executed. This command will typically be used to set the
enabled/disabled state of a macro.
Enter the macro name in the edit field or click on the Select button to find the macro name from a list.
If Mouse Cursor - If Not Mouse Cursor

These commands check the status of the mouse cursor. The macro takes action based on whether the status of the
mouse cursor matches the selection you have chosen or not. Twenty one different mouse cursor options are available to
choose from. As you scroll through the list, an image of the mouse cursor you have highlighted will be displayed.
Commands Used with the If Statements

The following commands are used with the If Statements. At least one of these options is necessary when using the If
Statements.
AND/OR/XOR - The AND/OR/XOR commands add a lot of flexibility to the If statements by requiring several If
statements to be true, one of several If statements to be true or for one If statement to be true and another
false.
Else - The Else command is used in conjunction with a conditional statement. Everything after an Else command
until an End If command is reached will be executed if the conditional is FALSE.
End If - The End If command is used to mark the place where macro control should stop after a conditional
statement is encountered.
Example
Below is a small example of how to use the If statements. For this example we selected
the If Clipboard Text Equals command.
If the text saved to the clipboard is "Macro Express" then the macro will open the
macros.com home page. The Else command separates the If statement. If something
other than "Macro Express" is saved to the clipboard, the web site command will be
skipped. Instead, the macro will activate the Notepad window and enter "This is a test".
If Clipboard Text Equals "Macro Express"
Web Site: http://www.macros.com [Default Browser - Wait to load]
Else
Activate Window: "Notepad"
Wait For Window Title: "Notepad"
Text Type: This is a test.
End If
<continue with remainder of macro commands>
This is essentially the format that you would use for any of the If statements when you
want to take two different actions based on the result of the If statement.
If you don't want two different actions, you can remove the Else statement as shown
below. In this case, if the clipboard contents equal Macro Express, the macro will open the
macros.com web page. If the clipboard contents are different, then the web site command
will be skipped. The End If command signifies that the If statement is finished and the
macro will continue with the rest of the commands.
If Clipboard Text Equals "Macro Express"
Web Site: http://www.macros.com [Default Browser - Wait to load]
End If
<continue with remainder of macro commands>
Look at the AND/OR/XOR commands to see other examples using the If statements.
Related Topics
AND/OR/XOR Logic
Switch/Case Commands
If Control
This is used to determine if the control in the C-variable is visible, enabled or focused. You would use this like any of the
other If Commands.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > If Control
Focused
This If statement is based on whether the control has focus or not. This control may be a Window Title, a button, an edit
box or some other part of the window.
Note: Not all controls are written so that they can receive focus. If this is the case for the control you are using, then
you would be better off using the Visible or Enabled options. Otherwise the If Control Focused option will always come
back false and the If Not Control Focused option will always test as true.
Visible
This If statement is based on whether the control is visible or not. The control does not need to have focus, it just needs
to be visible. This control may be a Window Title, a button, a toolbar, an edit box or some other part of the window. A
control on a window that is hidden or minimized may still be visible to this command.
Enabled
This If statement is based on whether the window with the control is the active window or not. In addition it checks
whether the control is enabled or not - if the control is grayed out or not.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
If Message
The If Message Command allows you to prompt with a question. The question that appears in the dialog box will also
display two buttons below the question. The buttons can be set to Yes/No, OK/Cancel, True/False or User defined. This
statement will require an End If statement and can optionally use the Else statement. Text Variables can be placed in the
input fields on this screen. For example, you may place the variable T1 in the message. To do this you would enter
%T1% into the Message field.
Scripting Editor > Logic > If Message
Caption
The caption is the text that will appear in the Window Title bar of the message window created.
Message
In this field, insert the message or question you want to pose.
Buttons To Use
Select from the four button types allowed - Yes and No, OK and Cancel, True and False or User Defined. These are the
labels for the buttons that will appear with the message during macro playback. The button names that you select should
correspond with the type of question asked. The User Defined option will allow you to create your own labels, such as
creating foreign language labels.
Choose Default
When the message displays you can select which button will have the default. One or the other button will be
highlighted, depending on which default you select.
Default Time Out
If a choice is not made within the Default Time Out that you have selected, the macro will continue, using the
Default Choice mentioned previously.
Message Positioning
You can assign where you would like the If Message prompt window to appear on the screen during playback of the
macro. The coordinates allow you to position the If Message prompt window to an area of the screen most
convenient for your use. The default display is the center of the screen. You can also define the coordinates in pixels.
Enter the pixel coordinates into the Left and Top edit fields. If you entered 200 into the Left field, the window would
be positioned 200 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen. Similarly, if you entered 200 into the Top field,
the window would be positioned 200 pixels down from the top edge of the screen.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the If Message prompt window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of
the screen by using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the If Message prompt window. This
will move the If Message prompt window relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper
left corner, the If Message prompt window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save on the Dialog
Positioner and this is where the If Message prompt window will display during playback of the macro.
Sample Macro
We'll create a simple example of how this works. The If Message was created using the
image shown above in this help topic. When running the macro and you answer yes to the
question, "Would you like to purchase additional copies of Macro Express", you are taken
to the order page at the Macro Express website. If you answer no, then a text box displays
with the message "Maybe I should rethink my answer".
Macro Script
If Message: "Become more Productive!"
Web Site: http://www.macros.com/order.htm
Else
Text Box Display: Macro Express
End If
If OS Version
Scripting Editor > Logic > If OS Version
As we're sure you are aware, not all MS operating systems work the same. Some things are done differently in each OS.
The "If OS Version" command can help with this problem. A macro can be tailored to the operating system of the user.
In the sample below we've made a simple macro that does something different based on the operating system in use.
This is how it would be displayed in the Scripting Editor. This macro basically states that if you are running Windows 95,
98 or Me, then call and run the macro named 9xmacro. The OR command lets you choose between two or more IF
commands. If you are running Windows NT, run the NTmacro. Or if you are running Windows 2000, Windows Server
2003 or WinXP, the macro will run the 2000XPmacro.
Sample Macro
If OS Version: "Win95"
OR
OR
If OS Version: "WinME"
Macro Run: 9xMacro
Else
If OS Version: "WinNT"
Macro Run: NTMacro
Else
OR
If OS Version: "WinXP"
OR
Macro Run: 2000XPMacro
End If
End If
End If
If Ping Successful
Scripting Editor > Logic > If Ping Successful
This option will first attempt to ping the server you have designated. Insert your address in the field above. If the server
responds within the specified time frame, which you can define in the Maximum Time to Wait field, then the result will be
true.
Example
Here is a simple example of how you may use this command. The macro is pinging the www.macros.com site to make
sure that the server is running. If the ping is successful a message is logged to the ping.log file with a date and time
stamp. If the server is down and the ping was not successful, an email is sent for someone to look into the problem. This
could be set up as a scheduled macro to run every 30 or 60 minutes.
If Ping Successful: "www.macros.com"
Log Message to "ping.log"
Else
E-Mail Send: Know Recipients, Fixed Text, No Attachments
End If
If Registry
This command allows you to take action based on whether a Windows Registry Key or Value exists or does not exist. Use
this command as you would any other If statement. You will need to close the If statement with an End If command.
Scripting Editor > Logic > If Registry
If Registry
This consists of two parts. Select either the registry value or key. Then select the If Exists or Does not Exist option. The
macro will then look to see if the registry key or value exists or does not exist on the computer.
Path
Select the registry path. You can either type in the full path, or click on the Browse button to navigate to the key or value
needed.
Note: ALL registry commands (except the registry read and If Registry commands) REQUIRE full Read/Write access to
the registry in those parts that the user is wishing to modify. This is only an issue with Windows NT/2000/XP where
security permissions can be set. The system administrator is responsible for these settings as we do not have the ability
to modify them.
Related Topics
Create or Delete Registry Keys
Read Registry Keys
If Variable Command
If commands insert logic statements into macros. The If Variable command is one of the most powerful If commands
available. Use it to compare a previously saved variable value such as a text string, window title, a number, or anything
else for that matter with another value. If the values match (or don't match), the macro can take a specific course of
action based on the results.
The If Variable command compares either a text, integer or decimal variable to a fixed value or to another variable.
Comparisons may be equal, not equal, less than, greater than, less than or equal to or greater than or equal to.
The "Contains" and "Does not Contain" conditions are available for use with Text variables to test if specific characters
are found or not found in the string variable.
Scripting Editor > Logic > If Variable
Variable
Select the variable to compare and insert in this field. The example above shows variable N[1] being compared.
Condition
If Commands help determine a given condition. Based on the condition, you perform a set of macro commands. The End
If, Else, AND, OR and XOR commands are used in conjunction with the If Commands.
Select the action needed for comparing the variable with another value or variable. Below is a list of the actions
(comparisons) available.
= Equals
< > Does not Equal
< Is Less Than
> Is Greater Than
>= Is Greater Than or Equal To
<= Is Less Than or Equal To
Contains
Does Not Contain
Value or Variable
Insert the value to compare with the variable selected. Or insert a variable in this field to compare the value of one
variable against another.
Ignore Case
When comparing Text String variables, select this option if the comparison does not need to be case sensitive. If
selected, the upper or lower case status of the text is ignored.
Switch / Case Commands

The Switch/Case group of commands allow you to write complicated conditional statements that are simpler and more
readable than using a lot of nested If Variable statements. If you are a C or Pascal programmer you will recognize that
these commands are similar to the Switch/Case statements in C and the Case statement in Pascal.
Scripting Editor > Logic > Case or Switch
The Switch/Case commands allow you to test the content of a single variable against a series of values and execute
specific macro commands based on the value in the variable.
A Switch/Case block of macro commands always begins with the Switch command and ends with the End Switch
command. You place one or more Case/End Case blocks inside the Switch/Case block. The Case/End blocks begin with a
Case command and end with an End Case command. You may also include one optional Default Case/End Case block.
Example
This example tests the value in the T1 variable for the words Done or Found and displays a
message accordingly.
Switch (T1)
Case: Found
Text Box Display: T1 equals Found
End Case
Case: Done
Text Box Display: T1 equals Done
End Case
Default Case
Text Box Display: T1 does not equal Done or Found
End Case
End Switch
Switch
The Switch command requires a variable. You may choose any type of variable (%T1%, %N1%, %D1%) but all values in
the Case statements that follow must be consistent with the type of variable you chose for the Switch statement. If the
values are not consistent, the result may be unpredictable.
Case
The Case command starts a Case/End Case block of macro commands.
The Case command may contain a variable or it may contain a value that you enter directly in the Case command. For
example, you may use a value of %T2% or enter a text string such as "Done".
A Case/End Case block may contain more than one Case command with a single End Case command at the end of the
block.
Example
This example tests the value in the T1 variable for the word Found or any of the words
Done, Finished or Completed.
Switch (T1)
Case: Found
End Case
Case: Done
Case: Finished
Case: Completed
Text Box Display: The comparison is done
End Case
End Switch
Default Case
The Default Case/End Case block is optional. This command is similar to the standard case, but acts like an "Else"
command. Basically, if none of the conditions are met in the previous case statements, then the default case will be
executed.
If used, the Default Case/End Case block must be placed after all other Case/End Case blocks. Any Case commands that
follow the Default Case command will not run.
Example
This example tests the variable T1 for the word Found.
Switch (T1)
Case: Found
End Case
Default Case
Text Box Display: T1 does not equal Found
End Case
End Switch
You may combine a Case command and a Default Case command in a single block.
Example
In this example, if the variable T1 either contains the word Searching or if it does not
contain the word Found, then the commands in the Default Case block will run.
Switch (T1)
Case: Found
End Case
Case: Searching
Default Case
Text Box Display: T1 does not equal Found
End Case
End Switch
End Case
The End Case command defines the end of a Case/End Case or Default Case/End Case block of macro commands.
End Switch
This is required to end a Switch Block. It's similar to the "End If" command.
Related Topic
AND/OR/XOR Logic
Load Macro Text File

Macro Express allows a text file to be loaded in during the playback of a macro and execute the text as part of the
macro. This can be particularly helpful in cases where you want part of the macro to be dynamic. You change the text file
to fit the specific need before playing the macro.
Scripting Editor >Macro Control > Load Macro Text File
File Name/Path
After clicking on the Load Text option, the window above will appear. Enter a file name or click on the Browse Button to
search for the text file desired. Click the Ok button when finished.
Edit in Scripting Editor

Click on this option to view the text file you selected in the Scripting Editor. You can view the text to see if you selected
the correct file or you can make changes to the file. When in the Scripting Editor, highlight the line of text you want to
edit and then click on the edit button. You can then make any changes necessary. When finished, click on the Save
button to return to the Load Text from a Text File window. Then you can click OK to insert the text file into your macro or
Cancel to exit.
Edit in Notepad
Click on this option to view the text file in Notepad. The Notepad program will run and the text will be loaded in. You can
make any changes to the text and then click on File | Save in Notepad. The changes will be saved and you will return to
the Load Text from a Text File window. Then you can click OK to insert the text file into your macro or Cancel to exit.
Load New Macro File

Macro Express allows you to load in (or swap) a new macro file with the use of a hotkey. This is the same as performing
a "File | Open" from the Macro Express menu and opening another macro file.
Scripting Editor >Macro Control > Load New Macro File
This particular function can be quite handy if you are using multiple sets of macro files where you have different sets
designed for different tasks, users, etc. You can set up hotkeys to automatically load in a specific user's set of macros or
a set of macros for a given task.
Macro Commands
Scripting Editor >Macro Control > Select Option Needed
These commands may be used with macros you have already created. The current list of macro nicknames is sorted by
the categories you have assigned in the Macro Explorer. Select the Display all Macros option to not use the category
view. In this case, all macros will be listed individually.
Run A Macro
This function is the key to stringing macros together. You can incorporate one or several macros into another
macro. Select the macro you want to include into the new macro by looking through your list of macros. Double click on
the one you want. This will insert the macro in the Macro Nickname edit box. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to
quit.
Note: Variable values will be passed from one macro to another when the macros are strung together using the Run a
Macro Command. For example if variable N1 were assigned a value of "123" in the main macro and the called macro
types out the value of N1 to another application using the Text Type command, "123" would be typed. There is no need
to set N1 to a value of "123" again in the called macro.
When the entire macro is complete, the variable values are cleared. If you want to save the variable values for use with
another macro, which is not part of the original macro and called macros, use the Variable Save and Variable
Restore commands.
Delete A Macro
This function allows you to delete a macro as part of your existing macro. A typical use for this function would be with
the creation of reminder messages. If you create a one time reminder message - to run an errand, make a call at a
specific time, etc. - you can place the Delete a Macro command after your message. After the message pops up on your
screen, the macro will be deleted - saving you the trouble of having to remember to delete it later.
Double click on the macro you want to have deleted from the List of Current Macro Nicknames. This will insert the macro
in the Macro Nickname edit box. Or type the name of the macro you're working on in the Macro Nickname edit box, if
that is the macro you want to have deleted. Click OK to save your changes or Cancel to quit.
Skip Recycle Bin
Select this option if you do not want the deleted macro to be placed in the Macro Express Recycle Bin.
Enable A Macro
This function allows you to place a command in your macro to enable another macro that had previously been disabled
(not currently available for use). Select the macro you want to enable by scrolling through your list of macros. Double
click on the one you want. This will insert the macro in the Macro Nickname edit box. Click OK to save your changes or
Cancel to quit.
Disable A Macro
This function allows you to place a command in your macro to disable another macro. A common use for this command
would be to disable the macro you are currently creating. After the macro plays back it would deactivate itself, so that
you don't accidentally trigger the macro later until ready. Select the macro you want to disable by looking through your
list of macros. Double click on the one you want. This will insert the macro in the Macro Nickname edit box. Click OK to
save your changes or Cancel to quit.
Macro Control Commands

Macro Return
This command is to be used with the Macro Run command to return to the top level macro.
Here's an example of how this works. Macro A is the top level macro. During the playback of this macro, it uses the
Macro Run command and executes Macro B. You may have some conditional logic in Macro B looking for a particular
value. The value is not found so you want to stop Macro B but continue with Macro A. Inserting a Macro Return
command in Macro B will stop Macro B and return to Macro A where it can continue with the rest of its commands.
Macro Stop
The Macro Stop command allows you to stop the execution of a macro. You may want to use this in conjunction with a
conditional statement. If a desired condition is not met, you may wish to terminate the macro.
Scripting Editor >Macro Control > Macro Return or Macro Stop
Password Protection
The password protection feature requires that a password be entered before the macro will continue. In addition, a
macro that contains this command cannot be edited unless the password is first entered. This prevents someone from
simply looking at the macro or deleting the password command and then playing the macro to get at sensitive
information. The encrypted text command gives additional security for sensitive information.
Scripting Editor > Macro Control > Password Protection
Insert the password protection command as the first item of your macro script if you want the entire macro to be
password protected. Or insert the password protect command before the portion of the macro that you want protected.
In the latter case, the first part of the macro will play and when it reaches the password protection command, a box will
pop up asking you to type in your password and click OK for the rest of the macro to play back. If the password
protection command is the first item of your macro, activating the macro will first prompt you to type in your password
and click OK before the macro will play back.
The password field will hold up to 19 characters. Input your password in the Password edit box. You can use a
combination of letters, numbers and symbols found on the keyboard. Type your password in again in the Enter Again
field to make sure you input what you thought you did the first time. If you type in the password differently, a message
will pop up telling you that the passwords do not match and to try again.
Window Positioning
You can assign where you would like the password window to appear on the screen during playback of the macro.
The coordinates allow you to position this window to an area of the screen most convenient for your use. The default
display is the center of the screen. You can also define the coordinates in pixels. In the above example, the top of
the pause window will be positioned 15 pixels down from the top of the screen. The left edge of the window will be
positioned 15 pixels to the right of the screen's left edge.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the password window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the screen
by using this option. Pressing this button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the Password window. This will
move the Password window relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper left corner,
the Password window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save and this is where the Password
window will display during playback of the macro.
Related Topics
Encrypted Text
Password Protect on Startup
Remarks
If you have created a large or complex macro, you may want to consider placing remarks or comments within the macro
script itself to help you keep track of what each portion of your macro script does. The remarks are placed within the
macro and are not played back as part of the macro. This will help you to easily identify what each piece of a macro
does, so that you can more readily find, edit or change any of the macro commands or components.
Scripting Editor > Macro Control > Remark
In the edit box, type in the comments you want to make and then click OK. The Remarks edit box will hold up to 240
characters of text. The comments will be inserted into the macro script where you positioned them. The remarks will be
displayed in blue in the Scripting Editor so that you can easily distinguish comments from commands that will play back in
the macro.
Macro Express Commands

Empty Macro Recycle Bin
Macro Express has its own Recycle Bin. Any macros deleted from the Macro Explorer are sent to the Macro Express
Recycle Bin. This macro command will empty the Macro Express Recycle Bin during the playback of a macro. At this point
the macros will be permanently deleted from the program and cannot be recovered.
Reload Macro Express Preferences

This command reloads the Preference settings from the Windows Registry.
Reset Hooks
Windows keyboard and mouse hooks. This causes Macro Express to no longer be able to monitor keystrokes or mouse
movements and clicks.
This command will reinstall the Windows keyboard and mouse hooks used by Macro Express while your macro is playing
so that Macro Express will have the first look at the keystrokes and mouse movements/clicks and be able to monitor
them again.
Terminate Macro Express

The Terminate Macro Express command will shut down the Macro Express Player (which will also shut down the editor if
it is running) from within a macro. This is obviously only to be used as the last command in a macro as no more
commands will execute after this one. This command would ideally be used in a situation where unattended automation
is needed and you do not wish to have Macro Express running after the macro completes its job.
Scripting Editor >Macro Express Commands > Select Option Needed
Restart Macro Express
Scripting Editor > Macro Express > Restart Macro Express
This command will close Macro Express and restart the program. Note: The Restart Macro Express command should be
the last command in the script. Any commands in the script after the Restart Macro Express command will be ignored
and will not play back.
Run startup macros on restart

If you have any Scheduled Macros scheduled to play back on startup of Macro Express, you can choose to have the
macros run after the restart of Macro Express or not. Check the box if you want the startup macros to run after using this
command.
Run "File Load" macros on restart

If you have any macros scheduled to start when a macro file loads, a restart of Macro Express will cause these macros to
play back. You can select whether to have the macros play back on startup of Macro Express or not. Check the box if you
want the File Load macros to run after using this command.
Mouse Click on Control

General
This command allows the user to send a click command to the specified control. This is most useful with buttons because
it will make the button think that the user clicked on it, even if the mouse is not on the control.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > Mouse Click on Control
Select whether to double or single click on the control. Also choose which control variable to have the mouse click on and
which button to use, left, right or center button.
Advanced
By default, this command sends the click to the center of the control, but the position can be set manually by the user.
Just enter the X and Y coordinates, which are relative to the control.
Mouse Commands
Macro Express will incorporate mouse functions within macros. You can position the mouse to the correct coordinates
and then add mouse clicks or wheel movements as necessary. Another alternative is to record the mouse movements
and clicks with the Capture function. In the capture mode, the Mouse Commands window is not utilized.
Scripting Editor > Mouse > Select the Mouse Option Needed
The most common use of the mouse in macros is to move the cursor to a particular spot and click on a button or menu
command. The first step in this process is to click on the Mouse Move command. This activates the Movement portion
of the window where you can position the mouse cursor over the button or menu command you want. You will need to
know the exact coordinates of the button or menu command on the window or screen for the mouse functions to be
accurate. The Mouse Locator function will help you determine the mouse coordinates.
Launch Mouse Locator

Clicking on the Launch Mouse Locator button activates the Mouse Locator utility. If this window pops up in an area of
your screen that covers important data, click on the window, hold the left mouse button down on the blue bar at the top
of the window and drag to another area of your screen.
Screen Position
you move the mouse, you will notice the numbers changing in relation to the mouse cursor position. The number to
the left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels from the left edge of the screen. The number on the right is the Y
Active Window
window that has the focus. When first activating the Mouse Locator window, it will have the focus. Clicking on a
window outside of the Mouse Locator will bring focus to that window. The Mouse Locator window will remain on top
so that you can read the coordinates for the window you want to use. As you move the mouse, you will notice the
numbers changing in relation to the mouse position. The number to the left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels
the mouse is positioned from the left edge of the active window. The number on the right is the Y coordinate, or how
many pixels the mouse is positioned from the top of the active window.
Pixel Color
This option will display the color of the pixel that the mouse is pointing to. Windows assigns a numeric value to each
color, normally from 6 to 8 digits in length. The pixel color is used with the Get Pixel Color command.
Click the X in the upper right corner to close the Mouse Locator window.
Movement
To Text Cursor Position
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse to the location of the text cursor. The text
cursor is the flashing bar that appears on screens where text input is to be made. This can be particularly useful for
applications which do not support the SHIFT and Arrow Keys for highlighting text for clipboard copying. You can use
the keyboard to tab to the desired field and the arrow keys to position the cursor and then use the "Move Mouse To
Text Cursor Position" to position the mouse cursor to the same location. A mouse down and a mouse move relative
to position followed by a mouse up will allow you to highlight text for a clipboard capture. Note: This function will
not work on programs that create and use their own text cursor. Programs that do so do not use the built in
Windows Text Cursor functions. Ironically, MS Word appears to fall into this category.
Relative to Screen
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse cursor relative to its position on the computer
screen. You would use the "Screen Coordinates" numbers from the Mouse Locator with this option.
Relative to Window
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse cursor relative to its position within the
window that is active. You would use the "Active Window" numbers from the Mouse Locator with this option.
Relative to Last Position
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse cursor relative to the last position of the
cursor. In this case you would not input new coordinates, but just the number of pixels that you want the mouse to
move. Let's take an example, with the last mouse position relative to the screen being X = 100, Y = 200. This means
the cursor is 100 pixels from the left edge of the screen and 200 pixels from the top edge of the screen. If we were
to plug in X = 20, Y = 50, then the mouse would move to an X coordinate of 120 and a Y coordinate of 250. Or, if
we plugged in X = -20, and Y = -50 then the mouse would move to an X coordinate of 80 and a Y coordinate of 150
based on our previous example.
By using some simple math, you can use the Mouse Locator to tell you how many pixels you need to move. Start
with your first position and jot down the X and Y coordinates. Move the cursor to your new location and subtract the
difference. If your starting position is X = 400 and Y= 450 and your new position is X = 500 and Y = 500, then you
would plug in the values of X = 100 and Y = 50.
You can select coordinates by either entering the coordinates directly or assigning the coordinate value to a variable.
An example of using variables might be to save the original mouse location into variables and then move the mouse
back to the original location when finished processing the macro.
Once you move the mouse to the correct coordinates, then you would select one of the mouse clicks or other actions
listed below.
Relative to Control
This option assumes that you have previously defined a Window Control and saved it to a variable. Select the control
you want from the drop down list of variables. Select the coordinates. For example, if you inserted 1 as the X
variable and 1 as the Y variable, then the mouse cursor would point to the upper left corner of the control - one pixel
down from the top and one pixel to the right of the left edge.
Note 1: When using the Relative to Screen or Relative to Window options, first position the mouse to the location you
want. Then press the Ctrl Key and Space Bar. This will insert the coordinates into the X and Y fields.
Note 2: With each of the above options, except for the Text Cursor Position, you can use Integer variables for the
coordinate values. For example, if you previously assigned a value of 50 to variable N1 and selected N1 as your X
coordinate, then the X coordinate would be 50.
Left Button Click

Clicks the left mouse button one time.
Left Button Double Click

Double clicks the left mouse button.
Left Button Down

Holds down the left mouse button without releasing it.
Left Button Up
Releases the left mouse button from its held down position.
Right Button Click

Clicks the right mouse button one time.
Right Button Double Click

Double clicks the right mouse button one time.
Right Button Down

Holds down the right mouse button without releasing it.
Right Button Up
Releases the right mouse button from its held down position.
Middle Button Click

Clicks the middle button of a three button mouse one time.
Middle Button Double Click

Double clicks the middle button of a three button mouse one time.
Middle Button Down

Holds down the middle button of a three button mouse without releasing it.
Middle Button Up
Releases the middle button of a three button mouse from its held down position.
Mouse Wheel Forward

Moves one wheel click forward when using a mouse with a wheel. Note: This is not available in Windows 95, 98 or Me.
Mouse Wheel Backward

Moves one wheel click backward when using a mouse with a wheel. Note: This is not available in Windows 95, 98 or Me.
Get Mouse Position

This option will find the position of the mouse cursor on the screen or window. The X and Y screen coordinates will be
saved to Integer Variables. This is an easy way to return the mouse cursor to an original position after the macro has
completed.
Sample Macro
What this macro does is capture the initial position of your mouse cursor and saves the coordinates to variables N1 and
N2. The macro then moves the mouse cursor to the screen coordinates of 300 and 300. The last command instructs the
mouse to go to coordinates N1 and N2. This should return the cursor to the original position. The delays are added so
that you would be able to see the mouse move. Without the delays the movements would be too quick to really notice
what was happening.
Macro Script
Get Mouse Position Screen: %N1%, %N2%
Delay 2 Seconds
Mouse Move Screen 300,300
Delay 2 Seconds
Mouse Move Screen %N1%, %N2%
Move Mouse to Tray Icon

This command will allow you to select the system tray icon that you want and move the mouse cursor to that icon.
Scripting Editor > Mouse > Move Mouse to Tray Icon
Move the mouse to the following tray icon

Press the browse button and select the system tray icon that you want. The names of each of the icons that are
displayed will be available in the drop down list. Or type in the name of the icon into the field.
Exact Match / Partial Match
When you hover the mouse cursor over an icon, a yellow text box opens that displays the icon name. If you
manually insert the icon name in the field above, you can decide whether you want the text to match exactly or just
a partial text match.
Move the mouse to

The mouse cursor will move the position on the icon that you select. This command defaults to the center of the icon.
The other option is to select your own coordinates. The coordinates 0, 0 are in the top left corner of the icon. You can
change the coordinates to move a number of pixels to the right and down from the top.
Note 1: Windows XP, Vista and 7 have options to collapse the system tray. If the icon is hidden behind the collapsed
tray, then this command will not work.
Note 2: When moving to the tray icon for a Macro Express Popup Menu macro, you must specify Partial Match. Exact
Match will not work because the name associated with the Popup Menu tray icon is changed when a macro is running.
Audio Controls
These functions will allow you to create macros to adjust the volume on your computer's sound system. Not all functions
will be available on a particular computer. Speaker support is dependent upon the audio device in your computer. Any
option not available on your computer will have a line drawn through it. You may still add these commands to a macro
for use with another computer that has these capabilities.
Scripting Editor > Multimedia > Audio or MIDI function
Audio
The audio controls apply to your computer's speakers. The treble and bass are audio controls. You can issue macro
commands to turn the volume off, set it on its highest setting, nudge it up, nudge it down, toggle it between muted and
not, nudge the balance to the left or right, center the audio balance, nudge the treble up or down or nudge the bass up
or down.
MIDI
The MIDI options control the volume for any MIDI instruments you may have installed on your computer. You can issue
macro commands to turn the volume off, set it on its highest setting, nudge it up, nudge it down, toggle it between
muted and not, nudge the balance to the left or right or center the balance.
Note: For most computers, the audio range, from lowest to highest, is comprised of 20 increments. Each volume
command that you insert will change the status by approximately 5%.
Set Sound
Macro Express allows you to add sound to your macros to help bring attention to a particular action or to just liven up the
macro as it plays back.
Scripting Editor > Multimedia > Sound Beep or Sound Wave File
Beep
Click on this to have a "Beep" sound placed in the macro.
Wave File
Select this option to have a wave (.WAV) file played back during the execution of the macro.
Browse
Allows you to search your hard drive for a wave file to insert in the Wave File edit box.
Test
Allows you to test out the wave file to determine if it is the correct file. (The wave file will play back immediately so
you can listen to it before inserting.)
Bypass File Existence Check: With this option not checked, Macro Express will verify that the file you selected
exists on your computer. If it doesn't, you will be prompted to select a valid file before being able to continue.
Placing a check next to this option will bypass this file checking process. One reason you may want to do this would
be to write a macro for use on another computer and the file doesn't exist on the machine you are presently using.
Wait for wave file to finish
With this option checked, the execution of the macro will stop until the wave file has played in its entirety. If not
checked, then the wave file plays while the macro executes.
Video Clip
Scripting Editor > Multimedia > Video Clip Play
Macro Express allows you to incorporate the playback of video files into your macros.
File Path/ Name - Browse

Click on the browse button to find the video file from your computer that you want to play back in the macro. After
finding the file, click on the Open button to insert the file into the File Path/Name box. Or you may manually enter the file
path and name into this field.
Play Immediately
This option will launch the AVI player and play back the video.
Play Immediately & Exit When Done

This option will launch the AVI player, play back the video and then close the AVI player.
Wait to Play
This option will load the AVI player and wait for your command (clicking on the Start button of the AVI player) to begin
the video play.
Window Positioning
You can assign where you would like the video player window to appear on the screen during playback of the macro.
The coordinates allow you to position the video player window to an area of the screen most convenient for your
use. The default display is the center of the screen. You can also define the coordinates in pixels. In the above
example, the Top of the video player window will be positioned 15 pixels down from the top of the screen. The Left
edge of the window will be positioned 15 pixels to the right of the screen's left edge.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the video player window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the
screen by using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the Video Clip Player window. This
will move the Video Clip Player window relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper left
corner, the Video Clip Player window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save on the Dialog
Positioner and this is where the Video Clip Player window will display during playback of the macro.
Map a Drive
This macro command allows you to connect, disconnect or toggle network drives. You may wish to do this in order to
access a network server or another computer, bypass the network neighborhood or quickly make temporary network
connections.
Scripting Editor > Network > Select Option Needed
The three network options are described below:
Connect Drive
This instructs Windows to map a drive letter to a drive on another computer. The "Connect" field allows you to choose
from available drive letters on your computer. The "Network Drive" is the name of the drive you wish to connect up to.
You may type this in directly or you may click on the "Browse" button which will display all the possible network drives
available to you.
Make Connection Permanent instructs Windows to remember this network connection so that the next time
Windows is started, it will make the connection.
Choosing Use Default Name and Password will instruct Windows to attempt to make the network connection using
your logon name and password. If you do not choose this option, then you need to enter the logon name and
password required to access the network drive or drive located on the other computer.
The Display Connection Status option instructs the macro to display a dialog box indicating whether the
connection succeeded or not. This occurs when the macro is played.
Disconnect Drive
This instructs Windows to unmap a drive letter from a network drive. The "Disconnect" field allows you to select the drive
letter that is to be disconnected from the network.
Make Disconnection Permanent instructs Windows to remember that this drive is not to be connected to a network
drive the next time Windows is started.
The Force Disconnection Even if Drive in Use instructs the macro to disconnect the network drive even if a
program is using a file on the drive which is being disconnected. Normally you would not want to do this unless you
are absolutely sure that disconnecting will not have any adverse effects on programs which might be using the drive.
The Display Connection Status option instructs the macro to display a dialog box indicating whether the
connection succeeded or not. This occurs when the macro is played.
Toggle Connection
This command is a combination of the Connect Drive and Disconnect Drive. It first checks to see if the drive is already
connected to the network. If it is, it disconnects the drive. If the drive is not currently connected, then it makes the
network connection. All the fields and options for this command are the same ones used in the Connect Drive and
Disconnect Drive. Please refer to these commands above for more information on them.
List Currently Mapped Drives

This list displays what drives you currently have mapped to network drives.
List Drives that Map on Startup

This list displays which drives are mapped as permanent connections -- ones that connect when you boot up the
computer.
Create / Delete Registry Key

These commands allow you to create or delete Windows Registry keys.
A word of caution is in order here. Only those who have experience working with the Windows Registry should be using
these commands. Otherwise you may create some serious problems with your operating system.
Scripting Editor > Registry > Create Registry Key
Create Registry Key

Creates the specified Windows registry subkey in the key that you select.
Delete Registry Key

Deletes the specified Windows key from the registry.
Path
Select the registry path. You can either type in the full path or click on the Browse button to navigate to the key needed.
to modify them.
Related Topics
Read/Write Registry Keys
If Registry
Read/Write Registry Value

These commands allow you to read values from the Windows Registry and save them to a variable. Other commands
allow you to write to the Windows Registry. Use these to change program information or adjust another program's
settings, etc. The last option is to delete a value from the Windows Registry
A word of caution is in order here. Only those who have experience working with the Windows Registry should be using
these commands. Otherwise you may create some serious problems with your operating system.
Scripting Editor > Registry > Read Registry
Select from the command choices, choose a variable and then click on the Browse button to locate the registry value
needed.
Read Registry Decimal

Reads a decimal value from the specified Windows registry key. The value will be saved as a decimal variable such as D1.
This does not require Write access to the registry.
Read Registry Integer

Reads an integer value from the specified Windows registry key. The value will be saved as an integer variable such as
N1. This does not require Write access to the registry.
Read Registry String

Reads a string value from the specified Windows registry key. The value will be saved as a text string variable such as
T1. This does not require Write access to the registry.
Write Registry Decimal

Writes a decimal value to the specified registry key. The value of a decimal variable will be written to the key you have
selected. This option REQUIRES Write access to the registry.
Write Registry Integer

Writes an integer value to the specified registry key. The value of an integer variable will be written to the key you have
Write Registry String

Writes a string value to the specified registry key. The value of a text string variable will be written to the key you have
Delete Registry Value

This option will delete a value from a registry key. This option REQUIRES Write access to the registry.
the registry in those areas that the user is wishes to modify. The system administrator is responsible for these settings
as we do not have the ability to modify them.
Related Topics
If Registry
If Registry
This command allows you to take action based on whether a Windows Registry Key or Value exists or does not exist. Use
this command as you would any other If statement. You will need to close the If statement with an End If command.
Scripting Editor > Logic > If Registry
If Registry
This consists of two parts. Select either the registry value or key. Then select the If Exists or Does not Exist option. The
macro will then look to see if the registry key or value exists or does not exist on the computer.
Path
Select the registry path. You can either type in the full path, or click on the Browse button to navigate to the key or value
needed.
to modify them.
Related Topics
Read Registry Keys
Break Command
The Break command may be used with the Repeat commands, Process a Text File or Process ASCII Text File commands.
Each of these commands processes data in a loop. Use the Break command to exit out of a loop before the entire cycle is
completed.
When using the Process File or Repeat commands, you may set up a conditional statement within the loop using IF
statements. If the condition is met, you may want to include a Break command to exit out of the loop instead of
continuing the entire process. When the condition is met and the macro gets to the Break command, the macro will skip
all other steps in the loop. It will next play back the first command after the End Repeat or End Process command and
continue with the rest of the macro.
Example
Here's an example of how this would work. The first few commands are counting the number of files in a folder. When
the macro gets to the 30th file, it will break out of the loop and send an email containing the data appended to the text
file selected in line 7 of the macro.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Variable Set Integer %N1% to 0

Repeat with Folder
Variable Modify Integer: %N1% = %N1% + 1
If Variable %N1% = 30
Break
End If
Variable Modify String: Append %T1% to Text File
Repeat End
E-Mail Send: Know Recipients, Text from File, No Attachments
Note: The Repeat Exit command and the Break command, when used with the Repeat commands, essentially perform
the same function.
Scripting Editor > Repeat > Break
Repeat Options
Macro Express allows you to repeat a portion of your macro any given number of times. You can optionally choose to
have an incremental counter used inside the repeat loop. All macro repeat loops must include an End Repeat command.
All commands immediately following the Repeat command will be repeated until an End Repeat command is found.
Scripting Editor > Repeat > Select a Repeat Option
Start Repeat
To insert the start of a repeat in your macro, first select the location in the text where you want to start the repeat. Next
activate the Repeat Options window by one of the methods mentioned above. Then click on the "Start Repeat" button
and enter the number of times you want to repeat a portion of your macro in the Repeat Count box. Click on OK to save
your settings. All macro commands after the Start Repeat will be repeated until an End Repeat command is found.
Repeat Count
This is the number of times you want to repeat a portion of your macro.
Counter Start
This is currently only used in conjunction with a repeat counter. This specifies the starting point of the repeat
counter.
Counter Step
This is currently only used in conjunction with a repeat counter. This specifies an increment to apply to the repeat
counter each time the repeat loops.
Example
Let's look at an example using the Counter Start and Counter Stop. If we set the counter start to 5 and the counter step
to 10 and had a repeat count of 3 then a repeat counter would have the following values:
During the 1st of 3 loops: 5
During the 2nd of 3 loops: 15
During the 3rd of 3 loops: 25
Start Repeat with Prompt

You may create a macro where you need a portion of the macro or the entire macro to be repeated a variable number of
times. Click on the Start Repeat with Prompt option. Each time your macro plays and reaches this command, a window
will pop up asking you how many times you want to repeat the macro string. Type in the number you want and the
macro string will repeat that number of times. So depending on circumstances, you may want to repeat the macro 5
times the first time you execute the macro. The next day you may need to repeat the macro 10 times. You can use this
option to avoid having to rewrite or edit the macro each time you need to increase the number of repetitions.
Start Repeat With Variable

This option allows you to repeat a portion of your macro. The number of times the macro will repeat is based on the
value placed in the variable you have selected.
Repeat Until
You may repeat a portion of a macro over and over until a condition is met. The condition is the comparison of either a
text, integer or decimal variable to a fixed value. Comparisons can be equal, not equal, less than, greater than, less than
or equal to or greater than or equal to. The comparison can also check to see if the variable contains or does not contain
a specific text string, number, decimal, etc. An example: Prompt a user for an integer value less than 10--you could put a
Repeat Until around the integer prompt command until the correct type of input was entered.
Sample
Here is an example of using the Repeat Until command. In this example, we want to make sure that Microsoft Word is
closed before the macro continues. The command to close Word would be placed before the macro commands listed
below. This macro has been set up in a repeat loop. Variable N1 has been set to 0. The macro will repeat this loop until
N1 has been changed to 1. In this macro we have instructed the N1 variable to change to 1 when it is detected that
Word has closed.
Repeat Until %N1% = 1
If Not Program Name "Word" running
End If
Repeat End
Note: The macro commands between the Repeat Until and Repeat End commands are always executed at least once,
because the Until condition is not evaluated until after the first iteration.
Repeat With Folder

This command will scan through a folder and find each file or subfolder in the folder. During the repeat process each
successive file name or subfolder will be placed in a text variable which can then be processed by other macro
commands. Click on the Files or Folder option to select what will be processed.
Sample Macro
Here is a simple macro that counts the number of files in a particular folder. The count is saved to variable N1.
Before starting the repeat loop, Integer variable N1 is set to 0. Each time the macro repeats through the files, N1 is
incremented by one until a final count is made. After the loop is completed, a Text Box Display command has been added
to display the file count.
Repeat with Folder
Variable Modify Integer: %N1% = %N1% + 1
Repeat End
Text Box Display: Files in folder
File Name Only | Full File Path

If you are processing file names then you can optionally choose just the file name or full path of the file name to be
placed in the variable.
Process Sub Folders
Optionally choose to have the macro recursively process all subfolders. This will place into the variable all the file
names or sub folders that are located in the folder or subfolders being processed.
End Repeat
To insert the end of a repeat in your macro, you choose the location in the text where the repeat is to end. Next activate
the Repeat Options window by one of the methods mentioned above. Then click on End Repeat and OK to save your
work. All macro commands after the Start Repeat will be repeated until an End Repeat command is found.
Repeat Counter
Note: This command is included for backward compatibility only. We recommend that you use the Place Counter in
Variable option that is part of the Repeat Start command.
A repeat counter command can be placed inside a repeat loop. What this does is type via the keyboard the current count
of the repeat loop. For example, if you created a repeat that repeated 5 times and the only thing inside the repeat loop
was the incremental counter, then when you played the macro back inside of something like the Windows Notepad, it
would type out "12345".
The repeat counter can be especially useful when you have a situation where you want to create a unique name for each
repeated loop. For example, say you are running through a process multiple times and you want to save the results out
with a different name. Here you could set up a repeat and when it came time to save out the file name, you could tack
on the incremental counter to the end of the file name that is to be saved out. This way you would have a unique file
name for each repetition.
If leading zeros are desired on counter values, then you can specify the "Counter Width". For example, to ensure that all
values are at least 3 characters long, enter 3 for the width. This will produce 001, 002, etc.
The syntax for the repeat command with a counter would be:
Repeat Start
Repeat Counter: Width 1
Text Type: This is my macro text.
Repeat End
Repeat Exit
This command can be used to exit out of a repeat loop early, before the entire cycle is completed. You may use some
type of conditional statement within the loop. If the condition is met, exit the repeat loop before the entire cycle is
complete. The newer Break command will serve the same purpose as Repeat Exit.
Repeat with Windows

This command is similar to the Repeat with Folder command. This command will scan through all of the windows running
on the computer, both visible and invisible. During the repeat process each successive window title will be placed in a
text variable which can then be processed by other macro commands.
Windows to Retrieve
Select whether to process through all windows, visible windows or hidden windows.
Sort Order
Select whether to process through the windows alphabetically or the way the windows are currently saved by the
operating system.
Repeat with Processes

This command is also similar to the Repeat with Folder command. Repeat with Processes will loop through all processes
currently running on the computer. During the repeat loop the name of each successive process will be placed in a text
string variable which can then be acted upon by other macro commands. Note: Running processes are displayed in the
Windows Task Manager.
Place Counter in Variable

For the Start Repeat, Start Repeat with Prompt and Start Repeat with Variable commands, you can place the repeat
counter into a variable so that the counter value can be used and manipulated during the repeat process.
Notes:
1. Repeat commands may be nested (placed inside of each other).
2. Repeat commands can cause excessively long macros. Remember, there is a way to abort a macro! Press the Scroll
Lock and Pause buttons to stop the macro.
Control Panel
Commands are available to run any of sixteen different Control Panel applets. Using the Enter the Name of an Applet
option will allow you to open other applets not predefined.
Scripting Editor > System > Control Panel Run
Open Main Control Panel

Selecting this option opens the Windows Control Panel.
Run Control Panel Applet

This option will open the Control panel and the particular applet that you have selected.
Choose an applet
This option is available when the Run Control Panel Applet option has been selected. This option is only available for
backward compatibility with older versions of the software and older versions of Windows. Use the"Enter the name of
an applet" option to ensure that the macro opens the correct Control panel applet.
Enter the name of an applet
This option is available when the Run Control Panel Applet option has been selected. To open a Control Panel applet
enter the applet file name in this edit box and select the number of Tabs. Control Panel applets have a file extension
of .cpl.
For example, access.cpl with 0 set for the Tab will open the Accessibility Options window to the first Tab. If the Tab
were set to 1, then the Accessibility Options window would open to the second Tab.
Default Printer
If you have more than one printer connected to your computer or network, you may find this feature to come in handy.
For example, you can create a macro to quickly change your computer's default printer from the laser to the ink jet for
color printing.
Scripting Editor > System > Default Printer
To select a new default, just click on the printer needed to highlight the selection. Click on the OK button to incorporate
the printer change into the macro. When the macro is run, the printer selected becomes the new default printer for the
computer.
Empty Recycle Bin

This command essentially does what its name implies. Inserting this command into a macro will empty the Windows
Recycle Bin. From the Scripting Editor or Direct Editor expand the System category in the Commands list. Double click on
the Empty Recycle Bin command and it will be inserted into the Macro Script or Macro Text. No intermediate dialog
window opens when selecting this option. The command is inserted directly into the script.
Scripting Editor > System > Empty Recycle Bin
Get Pixel Color
Scripting Editor > System > Get Pixel Color
Use this option to obtain the pixel color underneath the tip of the mouse cursor. The pixel color is assigned a numeric
value by windows, normally 6 - 8 digits in length. This numeric value is then saved to an integer variable such as N1.
Underneath Mouse
This option will get the pixel color of the pixel located directly underneath the mouse pointer. The pixel color is obtained
wherever the mouse cursor is located at the time this command takes place during the macro.
At Specific Coordinates
With this option you assign the specific mouse coordinates based on the active window or the entire screen.
Relative to Screen
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse cursor relative to its position on the computer
screen. You would use the "Screen Coordinates" numbers from the Mouse Locator with this option.
Relative to Window
With this option checked you are telling the macro to move the mouse cursor relative to its position within the
window that is active. You would use the "Active Window" numbers from the Mouse Locator with this option.

The mouse locator is an easy way to obtain the pixel coordinates if you selected the At Specific Coordinates option. If the
Mouse Locator window pops up in an area of your screen that covers important data, click on the window, hold the left
mouse button down on the blue bar at the top of the window and drag to another area of your screen.
Screen Position
you move the mouse, you will notice the numbers changing in relation to the mouse cursor position. The number to
the left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels from the left edge of the screen. The number on the right is the Y
Active Window
window that has the focus. When first activating the Mouse Locator window, it will have the focus. Clicking on a
window outside of the Mouse Locator will bring focus to that window. The Mouse Locator window will remain on top
so that you can read the coordinates for the window you want to use.
As you move the mouse, you will notice the numbers changing in relation to the mouse position. The number to the
left is the X coordinate, or how many pixels the mouse is positioned from the left edge of the active window. The
number on the right is the Y coordinate, or how many pixels the mouse is positioned from the top of the active
window.
Integer Variable
Assign the variable to the pixel color obtained.
Example
We want to know when a page has finished loading before continuing with the macro.
There is nothing to indicate that the page has loaded except for the word "Ready" in the
program status bar.
Here is how you could use the Get Pixel command to solve the problem:
1. Find a location on the screen that changes colors when the page has finished loading.
In this case, the word "Ready".
2. Use the Mouse Locator in the Get Pixel command to find the coordinates and the color
value of the pixel to check.
3. Use the If Variable command to see if the color value matches. If it does, then the
macro exits out of the Repeat loop and continues with the rest of the macro. If it doesn't,
then the macro repeats the loop again, looking for the change.
4. You may also want to add a Wait Time Delay to check every so second or so, rather
than constantly checking. Use the Wait Time Delay rather than a standard Delay. This will
free up CPU cycles during the wait time.
Macro Script
Repeat Until %N1% = 1
Get Pixel: Screen Coords: 100,100 into %N2%
Wait Time Delay 1 Seconds
If Variable %N2% = 186023
End If
Repeat End
--Page loaded and continue with rest of macro
Hibernate
This command places the computer in hibernate mode. Hibernate saves everything in memory on disk, turns off the
monitor and hard disk, and then shuts down the computer. When the computer is restarted, the desktop is restored
exactly as it was when you put it in hibernation. Normally you would put a computer in hibernation when you plan to be
away from the computer for an extended period of time.
To access this command from the Scripting or Direct Editors, click on the System category to expand the listing. Double
click on Hibernate or highlight it and click on one of the arrows to insert into the script. There is not a dialog window
associated with this command.
Scripting Editor > System > Hibernate
Lock Workstation
This command will lock a computer workstation. To access this command from the Scripting or Direct Editors, click on the
System category to expand the listing. Double click on Lock Workstation or highlight it and click on one of the arrows to
insert into the script. There is not a window associated with this command.
Note: This command is designed to only work with Windows 2000 and later.
Scripting Editor > System > Lock Workstation
Post Message
The PostMessage command allows the user to send a Windows message to the specified control.
Note: This command is designed for experienced users of Windows messaging. We are unable to provide support for
explaining how Windows messages work, what are the various messages available and what they do, etc.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > PostMessage
Use Constant Name

The user specifies an ini file containing a list of constant names and their values. The "Message to Post" field should
contain a constant name from this file.
An example would be the WM_LBUTTONDOWN message in the PostMessage.ini file. In the file, the following line
appears:
WM_LBUTTONDOWN=513
This means that when the user specifies WM_LBUTTONDOWN as the message, message 513 is actually sent.
Use Constant Value

The user specifies in the "Message to Post" field a message number to send to the specified control.
Offset from WM_USER

WM_USER is a Windows constant that marks the beginning of the messages that programmers can use for anything. In
this case, the user specifies either a positive or negative number that is added to WM_USER. Currently, Windows defines
WM_USER as 1024.
WParam - LParam
These fields allows the user to specify the WParam and LParam parameters. The contents of these parameters
depend upon the message being sent. These values can be found in the Platform API library at
http://msdn.microsoft.com.
Use RegisterWindowMessage
This command allows the user to enter a constant string that can be used by Windows to generate a message. This is
primarily used to communicate with other applications that have registered the same message.
Microsoft Definition of RegisterWindowMessage
The RegisterWindowMessage function defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be unique throughout the
system. The message value can be used when sending or posting messages.
The RegisterWindowMessage function is typically used to register messages for communicating between two cooperating
applications.
If two different applications register the same message string, the applications return the same message value. The
message remains registered until the session ends.
Only use RegisterWindowMessage when more than one application must process the same message. For sending private
messages within a window class, an application can use any integer in the range WM_USER through 0x7FFF.
Note: When Macro Express is installed, three .ini files ( PostMessage.ini, PostCommCtrl.ini and PostRichEdit.ini ) are also
installed into the Macro Express folder. The default path is C:\Program Files\MacExp3.0. These .ini files contain message
definitions that you can use for reference. Double click on the files to open and view in Notepad or Wordpad.
Additional Window Message Information

The following quotes from Microsoft provide additional information about Windows Messages.
"The system passes input to a window procedure in the form of messages. Messages are generated by both the system
and applications. The system generates a message at each input event for example, when the user types, moves the
mouse, or clicks a control such as a scroll bar. The system also generates messages in response to changes in the system
brought about by an application, such as when an application changes the pool of system font resources or resizes one of
its windows. An application can generate messages to direct its own windows to perform tasks or to communicate with
windows in other applications.
The system sends a message to a window procedure with a set of four parameters: a window handle, a message
identifier, and two values called message parameters. The window handle identifies the window for which the message is
intended. The system uses it to determine which window procedure should receive the message.
A message identifier is a named constant that identifies the purpose of a message. When a window procedure receives a
message, it uses a message identifier to determine how to process the message. For example, the message identifier
WM_PAINT tells the window procedure that the window's client area has changed and must be repainted.
Message parameters specify data or the location of data used by a window procedure when processing a message. The
meaning and value of the message parameters depend on the message. When a message does not use message
parameters, they are typically set to NULL. A window procedure must check the message identifier to determine how to
interpret the message parameters."
Note: Do not confuse the PostMessage command with the Windows SendMessage command. The Windows SendMessage
command allows several different types of data to be sent to an application. For example, a message parameter may
contain an integer, packed bit flags, a pointer to a structure containing additional data, and so on.
In addition, the SendMessage command allows a value to be returned to the program that sent the message. However,
the Macro Express PostMessage command is patterned after the Windows PostMessage command. PostMessage only
supports integer values in these parameters and does not support a returned value.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Reboot or Shut Down

These commands can be used to shut down your computer, reboot, or log off in one simple step.
Logoff
This option will close all programs currently running and allow you to log on as a different user.
Reboot
This will close all programs, shut down and start the computer up again.
Shut Down
This option will shut down the computer.
Shut Down & Power Off

This option will shut down the computer and also shut down the power to your computer. Note: This function is only
available for computers that support the power off feature.
Scripting Editor > System > Select the Option Required
Screen Display Settings

Macro Express provides a convenient method to quickly change your screen display resolutions. You may be working on a
project and need to see how your work looks at various screen resolutions. This option will allow you to quickly change
between settings.
Scripting Editor > System > Default Display Size
To select a screen display setting, just click on the screen resolution that you want. Your choice should now be
highlighted. Then click on the OK button to incorporate the screen resolution change into your macro. Click Cancel to
exit.
Note: Depending on your video driver, you may need to reboot your computer before the new screen resolution
settings take effect. If this is the case with your system, you can place a Reboot command in your macro - after your
screen setting command. This will allow you to change the screen resolution and then reboot your computer to initiate
the settings.
Set System Date/Time

This option allows you to change your system's date and time. There are two ways to adjust the date and time. The first
option changes the date and time based on the current settings, moving them ahead a fixed number of hours, days, etc.
The second option will set the clock to a specific time and date.
Scripting Editor > System > Set System Date/Time
Adjust Current Date/Time

Adjust Time
Use this option to set the system clock ahead by the number of hours, minutes or seconds you specify.
Adjust Date
Use this option to set the system date ahead by the number of months, days or years you specify.
Set a Specific Date/Time

Set Time
Select a specific time. When the macro is run, the system clock will be changed to the time you designated.
Set Date
You can manually enter a date or click on the arrow to display a calendar that will allow you to select a date. When the
macro is run, the system date will be changed to the date you selected.
Sync with Time Server

This option will synchronize the system time with a Time Server that you connect to. Enter the server address in the field
provided. The system time on your computer will be updated to match the time of the server.
System Controls
The System Controls window provides a number of handy commands that will help save time. If you use screen savers,
like to swap out desktop wallpaper frequently or need to adjust keyboard speeds, you'll find these commands quite
useful.
Scripting Editor > System > Select the Option Required
Screen Saver Activate

This command will immediately turn on your screen saver if you have your screen saver option enabled in Windows.
Screen Saver Disable

This command deactivates your screen saver setting. It changes your screen saver setting to read "none" meaning that
no screen saver will activate. This is the same as selecting "Display" in the Control Panel and setting the "Screen Saver"
to none.
Screen Saver Set Time Out

This allows you to change the minutes of inactivity required before a screen saver starts. This is the same as selecting
the "wait minutes" under the screen saver tab when selecting "Display" in the Control Panel.
Set Keyboard Repeat Delay

This allows you to change the amount of time it takes before holding a key down on the keyboard starts to repeat the
key. Valid values are 0 through 3 with 0 being the shortest delay. This is the same as selecting the "repeat delay" under
the speed tab when selecting "Keyboard" in the Control Panel.
Set Keyboard Repeat Speed

This allows you to change the speed of keys being repeated when it is being held down on the keyboard. Valid values are
0 through 31 with 0 being the slowest speed. This is the same as selecting the "repeat rate" under the speed tab when
selecting "Keyboard" in the Control Panel.
Set Desktop Wallpaper

If you get tired of looking at the same Desktop Wallpaper day after day, you can set up macros to incorporate images
into the wallpaper. After setup, just press a hotkey to change the wallpaper. Or create several scheduled macros to
change the wallpaper at regularly scheduled intervals. This option will allow you to change your desktop wallpaper or the
background of your desktop. The wallpaper is automatically updated in the Active Desktop as well, if the Windows
operating system supports it.

Click on the browse button to find an image on your hard drive that you would like to use as background wallpaper. A
Windows bitmap is the default file format. Other image types that can be used (depending on your Windows operating
system) are .jpg, .gif and .png image file types. After locating the image, click on the Open button to save the file
path/name. Then select one of the following options:
Tile Bitmap - This option will make copies of the image to tile across and fill the entire screen.
Center - This will center the image on your desktop.
Stretch - This option will stretch the image to fill the entire screen.
Position - You can position the image anywhere on the screen. With this option checked, fill in the X and Y
coordinates to position the image on the desktop.
No Bitmap: Select this option to not have an image displayed.
Set Window Sizing Border

This allows you to set the sizable borders that appear around any window that is sizable. Valid values are from 1 to 10.
The larger the number, the larger the border will be. This can be useful if you have difficulty positioning the mouse on a
resizable border.
System Dialogs
Scripting Editor > System > Run Dialog Window
Commands
Suspend Computer
Place laptops in a suspend mode to save on battery power.
Undock Computer
Allows a laptop or notebook computer to undock from a docking station.
Dialog Windows
Date and Time
Activates the Date and Time window so that you can reset your computer's clock, adjust the date or change your time
zone.
Find Computers
Activates the Find Computer window so that you can locate a computer on a network.
Find Files
Activates the Find Files window so that you can search your computer for a particular file.
Run Programs
Activates the Run Programs window so that you can run a program, install a new one, etc.
Terminal Services Session ID
Scripting Editor > System > Terminal Services Session ID
Windows Terminal Services provides the ability for several users to run Windows-based applications on a single server.
The applications for each user run in a session. Each session is assigned a unique number. The "Store Terminal Services
Session ID" command allows a macro to obtain this session ID number.
Some resources, such as the hard drive, are shared between sessions. If a macro attempts to write to and then read
from a file, macros used by different sessions may attempt to write to or read from the same file. This can lead to file
corruption. By using the Session ID as part of the filename, the macro running on each session will be assured of using a
unique filename.
The session ID can be saved in either a text string variable such as %T1% or in an integer variable such as %N1%.
Date
Insert the system date into your macro for use as a date stamp or insert the date into a variable for macro manipulations
based on the current date. This command is maintained for backward compatibility. We recommend using the
Date/Time command.
Scripting Editor > Text > Date
A variety of date formats are available. Use the scroll bar to find the format that you need, as shown in the example
above. The left hand column shows the date formats while the right hand column shows how the date format will appear
in your macro. Highlight with the mouse the option you want and then click OK. Click cancel to exit and not put the
current date in your macro.
Show Leading Zeros

Choose to show all leading zeros in numbers, such as 03 for March instead of 3.
Future or Past Date

Insert a future or past date your macro text. Choose if you need a prior date or future date by clicking on either the
Future or Past buttons. In the Set Date box, type in the number of days beyond today's date or prior to today's date that
you want inserted into the macro. You can insert up to 999 days in this field.
Type Out or Place in Variable

This option allows you to place the date into a text variable or type the date directly into another application.
Related Topic
Customize Date and Time
Date and Time

This option may be used instead of the Date and Time commands. It provides much flexibility in displaying dates and/or
times. With this option you can build your own date and time formats. Many of these formats are based on what you
have defined in the Regional Settings of the Control Panel. The month, day, etc. will display in the language defined in
your Regional Settings.
Scripting Editor > Text > Date/Time
Format
We have created a few sample formats that can be selected. At the bottom of this page, we have listed below all of the
format options available. You can create formats for just the date, the time or both. Just enter the letters into the format
field that correspond with the results that you want.
Place in Variable
Saves the date and/or time to a text string variable. You can then use this with other variable actions later in the
macro.
Type Out
This option types the text (date and/or time) into the application currently open when the macro runs.
Date/Time
Use Current Date / Time
This will use the date and time from your system clock at the time you run the macro.
Specific Date / Time
You can use this option to have a specific date or time played back in a macro. You can set the value to a specific
date or time, either in the past or future.
Adjust Current Date/ Time
You can adjust the date or time to Days, Months, Hours or Minutes into the future or past. The calculations are
based on your computer's system time and date.
Prompt User
This option will open a small dialog window during macro playback requesting the user select a date and or time. The
date and/or time will be displayed in the format selected.
Prompt
Enter any instructions for the macro user in the Prompt field. The instructions will display in the window that opens
during macro playback. The current date will be displayed in the edit field. The user can either overwrite any of the
date information or use the attached calendar to select a date. If a time prompt is selected the current time will be
displayed in the edit field. Highlight the hours, minutes or seconds to edit by overwriting the current entry or using
the up or down arrows on the keyboard to change the values.
Set Manually
This button will open a window that allows you to determine where you would like the Prompt window to appear on
the screen during macro playback.
Prompt for Date/Prompt for Time
You can select to have the macro prompt the user for a date, a time or both.
Halt Macro if Canceled
If the user exits out of the Prompt message without entering a value, then the macro will not continue and is
terminated.
List of Format Options

c Displays the date using the Short Date Format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings, followed by the time
using the Long Time format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings. The time is not displayed if the fractional
part of the Date Time value is zero.
d Displays the day as a number without a leading zero (1-31).
dd Displays the day as a number with a leading zero (01-31).
ddd Displays the day as an abbreviation (Sun-Sat) using the Short Day Name format defined in the Control Panel Regional Settings.
dddd Displays the day as a full name (Sunday-Saturday) using the Long Day Name format defined in the Control Panel Regional Settings.
ddddd Displays the date using the Short Date format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
dddddd Displays the date using the Long Date format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
m Displays the month as a number without a leading zero (1-12). If the m specifier immediately follows an h or hh
specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
mm Displays the month as a number with a leading zero (01-12). If the mm specifier immediately follows an h or hh
specifier, the minute rather than the month is displayed.
mmm Displays the month as an abbreviation (Jan-Dec) using the Short Month Names format defined in the Control
Panel - Regional Settings.
mmmm Displays the month as a full name (January-December) using the Long Month Names format defined in the
Control Panel - Regional Settings.
yy Displays the year as a two-digit number (00-99).
yyyy Displays the year as a four-digit number (0000-9999).
h Displays the hour without a leading zero (0-23).
hh Displays the hour with a leading zero (00-23).
n Displays the minute without a leading zero (0-59).
nn Displays the minute with a leading zero (00-59).
s Displays the second without a leading zero (0-59).
ss Displays the second with a leading zero (00-59).
z Displays the millisecond without a leading zero (0-999).
zzz Displays the millisecond with a leading zero (000-999).
t Displays the time using the Short Time format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
tt Displays the time using the Long Time format defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
am/pm Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays 'am' for any hour before noon, and 'pm'
for any hour after noon. The am/pm specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed case, and the result is displayed
accordingly.
a/p Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays 'a' for any hour before noon, and 'p' for any
hour after noon. The a/p specifier can use lower, upper, or mixed case, and the result is displayed accordingly.
ampm Uses the 12-hour clock for the preceding h or hh specifier, and displays AM symbol defined in the Control Panel Regional Settings for any hour before noon, and the contents of the PM setting defined in the Control Panel - Regional
Settings for any hour after noon.
/ Displays the date separator character defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
: Displays the time separator character defined in the Control Panel - Regional Settings.
'xx'/"xx" Characters enclosed in single or double quotes are displayed as-is, and do not affect formatting.
Encrypted Text
Scripting Editor > Text > Encrypted Text
When viewing or editing the contents of the macro, the encrypted text will display as encrypted text - *****. Useful for
passwords and the like so that people snooping through the program cannot readily uncover passwords. Use this along
with the Password command for additional security.
Type in your password or other text into the text field. Whatever is typed into this field will appear as above with stars,
one star representing each character you input. When the macro is played back, the full text will appear, not the
encrypted text.
Place in Variable
Place the encrypted text into a variable with this option. Select the variable name from the drop down list.
Related Topics
Password Protection in Macro
Password Protect on Startup
Symbols
Scripting Editor > Text > Text Type > Symbols Button
Any of the symbols or characters in the Insert Symbols window displayed below are available for input into macros.
Highlight the symbol or character you want to use and click OK. The symbol will be placed in your macro text. You can
also double click on the symbol to place it directly in the macro. Click Cancel to exit without inserting symbols. The
symbol or character you selected will be typed during the playback of the macro.
Alt Keypad Sequence

You can also embed an Alt Keypad Sequence directly into a macro. The Alt Keypad Sequence is a method of inserting
symbols into most Windows applications and is done by holding the ALT key down and pressing digits on the keypad.
Clicking on the "Alt Keypad Sequence" button will present a window asking for the numeric digits that you would
normally type via the numeric keypad.
Text Type
When in the Scripting Editor, use this window to enter text and a variety of other keystrokes as part of your macro script.
The text or keystrokes that you enter will play back into the application that you have open when running the macro. The
Text Type command is not necessary when using the Direct Editor. Text and the keystrokes displayed below may be
input directly to the Direct Editor.
Scripting Editor > Text > Text Type
Text Type
Type the text that you want to include in your macro script directly into the edit box as shown above. Click on one of the
entries, such as Delete, in the yellowed area to insert it into the edit box. Or Tab and arrow to the entry and press enter
to insert the item. This will insert a Delete command into your macro script. Clicking on one of the F1 - F12 buttons will
insert the F1 - F12 command you selected into the edit field.
Symbols: To insert symbols or characters into your macro text click on the Symbols button. An Insert Symbol
window will appear. Locate the symbol or character you want, highlight it and click on the OK button to insert it into
the script. Or double click on the symbol to insert to the script.
Variables: You can place variables into the macro text. Anything you have saved to the variable you select will be
typed during the playback of the macro. Click on the Variables list box to select the desired variable and then click on
the Insert button. If you selected T1 as the variable, it should display as %T1% in the macro script.
Misc Keys: Miscellaneous keystrokes such as the Print Screen, Left CTRL Key, Win Key, etc. can be inserted by using
the "Misc Keys" list box. Select the key and then click on the Insert button to add to the Text Type.
List of all Misc Keys

Left Window
Right Window
Application
F13 - F24
Attn
CrSel
ExSel
Erase EOF
Play
Zoom
PA1
Number Pad 0 - 9
Number Pad / * - + .
Print Screen
Scroll Lock
Pause
Caps Lock
Num Lock
Left CTRL
Right CTRL
Note: Make sure that you have the cursor located in the proper position before inserting symbols, variables, etc.
Symbols, keystrokes, variables, etc. will be positioned in the script wherever the cursor is located.
Playback Options
Text Type Normally
With this option selected the text entered in this command will be typed out into the receiving application. This is the
default selection.
Caution: It is possible when typing back long strings of text that the Keyboard Buffer may overflow. When this happens
you will notice some missing or scrambled text among the text that played back. Sometimes you may also hear a strange
high pitched sound. The text is trying to play back too fast. If you are experiencing this problem, you can either select
the Use Clipboard to Paste Text option, set a standard Text Type Delay from the Preferences window, or use the
Keystroke Speed command to control the text playback speed.
Use Clipboard to Paste Text
With this option selected, the text will be played back through the Windows clipboard when the macro is run. This option
should only be used with text. If you have inserted other keys such as Alt, Ctrl, Shift, etc. into this command when using
the Clipboard option, then these keys will paste back as <ALT>, <CONTROL>, <SHIFT>, etc. instead of playing the
keystroke.
Send Text to Control
If you have previously defined a Control Variable, the text entered in this command will be typed into the Window Control
that you have selected. The control that you select must be able to accept text input. Otherwise this command will
appear to do nothing.
Time
Insert the system time into your macro for use as a time stamp or insert the time into a variable for macro manipulations
based on the current time. This command is maintained for backward compatibility. We recommend you use the newer
Date/Time command.
Scripting Editor > Text > Time
Select a Time Format

A variety of time formats are available. Use the scroll bar to find the format that you need, as shown in the example
below. The left hand column shows the time formats while the right hand column shows how the time format will appear
in your macro. Highlight with the mouse the option you want and then click OK. Click cancel to exit and not put the
current time in your macro.
Show Leading Zeros

This will display leading zeros such as 03 for 3:00am when the time is played back in the macro.
Set Time
You can also have a future or past time placed in your macro text, to match another time zone, for example. Choose if
you need a prior time or future time by clicking on either the Future or Past buttons. In the Set Time box, type in the
number of hours beyond or prior to the current hour.
Playback of Time in Macro

You can select one of the two alternatives for having the time played back in a macro. You can select to either have the
time type out into an application or store the value in a variable.
Type Out
This will type the system time into an application that accepts text input.
Place in Variable
This option allows you to place the time into a text variable. The variable can then be manipulated to the results you
need. Assign the variable in the Variable Name field.
Note: If you are using this in conjunction with a date stamp, the future or past hours functions will not adjust the date,
only the time. For example, let's say you set the time stamp for 6 hours in the future and set a date stamp with today's
date. If you run the macro at 7:00pm, the date stamp will have today's date while the time stamp will display 1:00am,
which in theory would be tomorrow's time.
Related Topic
Customize Date and Time
Delay
Use this function to add Delay timing to macros. Delays may be necessary to allow time for a window to gain focus
before the macro can proceed correctly or for any number of other reasons. The delay helps ensure that the macro
doesn't play back faster than Windows can keep pace.
Scripting Editor > Timing > Delay
Timed Delay in Seconds

The Timed Delay in Seconds option puts Macro Express into a "wait state" where virtually no CPU cycles are used, thus
allowing CPU intensive programs to continue uninhibited. This is similar to the Wait for Time to Elapse command.
Note: This command suspends Macro Express for the amount of time specified. During this time the macro cannot
be terminated by pressing the Scroll Lock+Pause keys or by right clicking on the "Running Man" icon in the system
tray.
Delay in Seconds / Delay in Milliseconds

Delays may be set in seconds (up to 99999 seconds allowed) or in milliseconds (thousandths of a second). Just click on
the option you want and then enter the number of seconds or milliseconds in the edit box next to Delay Time. Seconds
can be in fractions of a second by using a decimal point such as .5 to signify a half second delay. In the example above
350 milliseconds equates to a little over 1/3 of a second delay.
Ignore Macro Speed Factor

This option instructs the delay command to ignore the macro playback speed so that the delay will always be for the
amount of time specified. If this option were not checked and you instructed the macro to play back at four times its
normal speed, the delay would also be sped up. For example, a one second delay would only be a one quarter second
delay if the macro were played back at four times its normal speed.
Note: Delay timing will delay the macro for at least the amount of time specified. The delay works by continually
checking to see if the specified time has elapsed. While checking, any waiting or new windows commands are
processed. If a windows command that takes a bit of time happens to be processed, then the delay may last longer
than the time specified.
Related Topics
Pause
Wait for Commands
Keystroke and Mouse Speed
Pause Macro
Scripting Editor > Timing > Pause
Macro Express allows for pauses to be placed in macros. When you invoke a macro, it will begin to play back until the
script reaches the pause command. When the pause is reached, playback will stop and a new small window will appear
indicating that your macro has been paused. You may then do whatever you like. At any time you may choose to either
continue the playback or to cancel the macro by clicking the appropriate button on the pause window. You may also
continue the playback of the paused macro by pressing the hotkey assigned to the macro. This way you do not have to
use the mouse to continue. For scheduled macros, shortkeys, etc. where there is no hotkey to press, you can use the
System Macro to resume macro playback. The default setting for this hotkey is Ctrl-Alt-Shift-Y.
Keep Focus
With this option selected the Pause window gains window focus (is the active window). If this option is not selected
the Pause window opens but does not have focus. The window currently in use when the Pause window opens
retains focus.
Basic Pause
The Basic Pause will stop the macro where you inserted the pause and pop up a window in the center of the screen
stating that the macro pause is in effect. You can then click on the Resume button to continue the macro playback or the
Abort button to cancel the remainder of the playback. You may also continue the playback of the paused macro by
pressing the hotkey again or using the system hotkey.
Complex Pause
Selecting the Complex Pause activates the above window.
Location
With the Complex Pause you will be prompted for screen coordinates to position the pause window on the screen.
The coordinates allow you to position the pause window so that it does not pop up over the area of the screen that
you want to work with. The coordinates are in pixels. So in the above example, the top of the pause window will be
positioned 15 pixels down from the top of the screen. The left edge of the window will be positioned 15 pixels to the
right of the screen's left edge.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the Pause window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the screen by
using this option. Pressing this button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the Pause Positioner window. The
Pause Positioner window will move to the position on the screen where the Pause window will display during the
macro playback. Click on the Save button of the Dialog Positioner window to save the positioning.
Message
An optional message can be added which displays with the pause to give additional instructions to the user. Just type
the message in the edit box. The message box will hold up to 180 characters of text.
When the pause message appears during the playback of your macro, click on the Resume button to continue the
macro playback or the Abort button to cancel the remainder of the playback. You may also continue the playback of
the paused macro by pressing the hotkey assigned to the macro or by pressing the system hotkey.
Related Topics
Delays
Wait for Commands
Speed
The Speed window allows you to adjust the playback speed of keystrokes or mouse movements or to adjust the playback
rate of the entire macro.
Scripting Editor > Timing > Keystroke Speed
Keystroke and Mouse Speed

You would normally set the speed of keystrokes and mouse movements if you are entering them directly as there will be
no set delays or timing between the keystrokes and mouse movements. It is sometimes possible for the keystrokes or
mouse movements themselves to be sent too quickly for the desired actions.
For example, you may have a keystroke that causes a new window to pop up and the next keystroke is to perform a
command in this new window. It's possible that the new window may not be ready to receive the keystroke when it is
sent. The solution is to place a short delay (1/2 a second or so) right after the keystroke that invokes the new window or
use the "Speed" command to slow down all the keystrokes.
Click on the option that you want, Keystroke or Mouse speed. In the edit box enter the delay, in milliseconds
(thousandths of a second), that you want to place between each keystroke or mouse playback. Click OK to save your
settings or Cancel to exit.
You may only need to slow down a portion of your macro. In this case place your speed command before the portion of
your macro that needs to be slowed down. Then place another speed command after the slowed down section of your
macro with a delay set to "0" zero. This will set the remainder of the macro so that there are no delays between
keystrokes and mouse movements.
You can place a Keystroke Speed delay and a Mouse Speed delay in the same macro. The delays will remain constant
throughout the macro until you place another speed command with a different delay setting.
Macro Speed
You would normally set the macro speed factor if you have captured (recorded) a macro at actual speed. With all the
timing delays between each keystroke and mouse movement recorded, you may wish to speed up or slow down the
macro. To slow down a macro, you place a number greater than one in the Playback Factor field.
For example, placing a "4" in this field will make the macro play back 4 times slower. If you want to speed up the macro,
you would place a value less than one in the Playback Factor field. For example, placing a 0.5 will speed up the macro by
a factor of 2, using 0.25 by a factor of 4, etc.
Wait For Commands

It is possible that a macro can get ahead of itself - play back faster than the computer can move between windows or
programs. These Wait For commands instruct the macro to wait until a specific action occurs, such as a mouse click or a
window to appear on the screen, before continuing.
Scripting Editor > Timing > Select the Wait for Command Needed
Wait for Window Title to Appear

If you are creating a macro that changes windows during playback, your macro commands may be ready to execute
before the correct window has been activated. This will either cause the macro to abort because it didn't find the correct
window or it will play back in the wrong window. To make sure this doesn't happen, you can insert a command
instructing the macro to wait until the proper window has focus.
For example, if you are doing a copy and paste routine between two applications, you will want the macro to wait for the
second application's window to appear before pasting the copy from the first.
With the Wait for Window Title to Appear option checked, an edit box will request the name of the window title you want
the macro to wait for. Just type in the name of the window title that you want active. The Window Title edit box requires
the name of a window title (the title in the caption bar of a window). This window title does not have to be an exact
match. You can use the full Window Title or a partial name. For example, "notep" would be sufficient to find the
"notepad" window. With this option in place, your macro will now wait for the window title you specified to appear on
screen before it will continue.
Wait for Window Title to Lose Focus

This option will instruct the macro to continue after the Window you have specified has lost focus or been minimized and
another window is now on top. With the Wait for Window Title to Lose Focus option checked, an edit box will request the
name of the window title you want to lose focus. Just type in the name of the window title. The Window Title edit box
requires the name of a window title (the title in the caption bar of a window). This window title does not have to be an
exact match. You can use the full Window Title or a partial name. For example, "notep" would be sufficient to find the
"notepad" window. During macro playback, the macro will pause until the window title you selected has lost focus.
Note: For the two Wait for Window commands you can also click on the button to the right of the edit box to get a list of
all Windows currently running on your computer. Highlight the window you want and click on the OK button to insert this
as your window selection.
Wait for Program to Terminate

The macro will wait until the program you specified has terminated completely. A box will appear after selecting this
option requesting the name of the program. You can either type in a partial name of the program or click on the List
Programs button to select from the list of programs installed on your computer. If using the list, highlight the program
you want and click OK. When you play back your macro, the macro will stop at this point and wait for the program you
selected to terminate.
Wait for Key Press

The macro will wait until the key you specified has been pressed. When using this option a drop down list will
appear. Select the key you want to use by highlighting your choice and clicking OK. When you play back your macro,
the macro will stop at this point and wait for you to press the key you selected. Choices range from letters of the
alphabet to the function keys to several other common keys such as Enter, Tab, etc.
Note: Use caution when this command follows a Text Type command. For example, let's say that you use the command
"Text Type: <TAB>" and the next command in the script is the Wait for Key Press command. Since the previous
command is to play back the TAB key, do not select the TAB key as the key to wait for. Macro Express will see the TAB
from the Text Type command, think it is finished waiting and continue with the macro. It will look like the Wait for Key
Press did not wait. In this situation, either select a different key or insert a Delay command after the Text Type
command. Or use the Wait for Text to Play Back command. This will ensure proper macro functionality.
Wait for Text

The macro will wait until you type in the text that you specified. When using this option a box will appear requesting the
text to be typed. Input the text you want to use and click OK. When you play back your macro, the macro will stop at this
point and wait for you to type the text you selected. Placing a check in the Case Sensitive box will require you to type the
text exactly as originally input, using capital and lower case letters.
Wait for Text to Play Back

This option would only be used immediately after a Text command. You don't want the macro to continue on before the
text from your text command has finished playing back. Selecting this option will stop the macro from continuing until the
text has finished playback.
Wait for Mouse Click

These options require a mouse click before the macro will resume.
Wait for Left Mouse Click - The macro will wait until the left mouse button has been clicked to resume.
Wait for Middle Mouse Click - The macro will wait until the middle mouse button has been clicked to resume.
Wait for Right Mouse Click - The macro will wait until the right mouse button has been clicked to resume.
Wait for Time To Elapse

The macro will wait a specified number of minutes and seconds before continuing. This command is similar to
the Delay command, but with a couple noticeable differences. First, you can specify a much longer wait period (up to
about 7 days). And perhaps more important, this command puts Macro Express into a wait state where virtually no CPU
cycles are used thus allowing CPU intensive programs to continue uninhibited.
Or instead of using a specified time, you can place the wait time into an integer variable, so that the macro will wait the
amount of time specified in the variable.
Note: This command suspends Macro Express for the amount of time specified. During this time the macro cannot be
terminated by pressing the Scroll Lock+Pause keys or by right clicking on the "Running Man" icon in the system tray.
Warning: By putting Macro Express into this wait condition, you will not be able to access Macro Express at all, including
stopping the macro until the specified time has elapsed. Use this command with caution.
Wait for Web Page to Load

The macro will wait until a web page has finished loading before it will continue. This command usually follows a "Web
Site" command. You may enter a partial or complete URL in the URL field of the Wait for Web Page command.
This command waits for Internet Explorer to report the URL that it last loaded. With some web pages, the URL you
request is not the last URL that is loaded. For these web sites you have two choices.
1. Leave the URL field of the Wait for Web Page command empty. Doing this will cause the macro to wait until
Internet Explorer reports that it is not busy. This will work correctly for many web pages.
2. Enter the actual URL that is loaded last into the URL field. To discover what the last URL loaded is, enter some
text in the URL field, perhaps "JUNK" and set the "Wait a Maximum of:" field to something short, like 45 seconds or 1
minute. Then run the macro containing the Wait for Web Page command. After 45 seconds or 1 minute a message
will pop up that includes the last loaded URL. You may have to repeat this step with a longer wait time to make sure
the web page has actually been loaded. Then, once you know the actual URL that is loaded last, you can enter all or
part of that URL in the Wait for Web Page command.
Note: The Wait for Web Page to Load command only works with Internet Explorer. It requires Internet Explorer 4.0 or
greater, except v5.0 which will not work due to an IE bug. If you are using this version, v5.0, you will need to upgrade to
at least version 5.01 of Internet Explorer.
Wait for Control

This command allows the user to create a macro that will wait for a specific control to gain focus, become visible or
become enabled. Or you can have the macro wait for their opposites - wait for control to lose focus, become invisible or
become disabled. So, the user could write a macro that looks like the following:
Wait for Control (C1) to be Enabled
Mouse Click on Control (C1)
This would cause the macro to click on the control as soon as the control would allow it.
Wait File Exist

This option waits for the file to exist. You may have a macro that creates a new file and use this command to instruct the
macro to wait until the file has been created before continuing. The entire file path and drive information must be
inserted.
Wait File Ready

This command instructs a macro to wait until a file is ready before continuing. If you have a macro launch a particular
file, you could have the macro wait until the application is loaded and the file is ready, before allowing the macro to
continue. This is another approach, rather than using a Wait for Window Title command.
Use this command in situations where the macro should continue only after an application has finished writing to the file.
The file may exist for some time before the application has finished writing to it. The Wait File Ready command waits
until the file is no longer being written to.
File Must be Ready for xx Seconds
As part of the Wait File Ready command, you can instruct the macro to make sure that the file has been ready for a
specified number of seconds before continuing.
Wait for Folder to Exist

This option is similar to the Wait File Exist command. This command instructs the macro to wait until a specific folder has
been created or exists on your computer before continuing. The entire folder path and drive information must be
inserted.
Wait for Mouse Cursor

This option instructs the macro to wait until the mouse cursor type that you selected appears on the screen. There is a
drop down list of different mouse cursor types to choose from, along with an image of each mouse cursor type. When
the specific mouse cursor type that you selected appears on the screen, the macro will continue processing.
Instead of waiting for a specific mouse type, you can also select the Wait for Cursor Change option. This instructs the
macro to wait until the mouse cursor has changed from one cursor type to another. It is not looking for a specific cursor
type.
Note: The mouse cursor must remain in the requested state for at least one half second in order for Macro Express to
recognize the cursor type.
Wait for Not Mouse Cursor

This command is essentially the opposite of the Wait for Mouse Cursor option mentioned above. With this command the
macro is waiting until the mouse cursor changes to a different type from the one you have selected. When the cursor
changes to something different, the macro will continue. There is a drop down list of different mouse cursor types to
choose from, along with an image of each mouse cursor type.
Wait Indefinitely
With this option checked, the macro will not resume until the Wait For action you specified has occurred.
Wait a Maximum of ___ Minutes ____ Seconds
With this option checked, the macro will wait the number of minutes and seconds specified for the appropriate Wait For
action to occur. If that action does not take place within the specified time frame, the macro will abort. A window will pop
up at that time explaining that the macro has aborted and state the reason(s) why. A maximum number of 999 minutes
and 59 seconds is allowed in these fields, longer than most of us would want to wait for a window to appear.
Related Topics
Delays
Pauses
Variables Overview
Variables and conditions add an intelligence element to your macros. It also brings an added level of power to your
macros. It gives you the capability that software developers find when writing software programs. However, we have
integrated the use of variables into our commands so that they are easy to implement and use.
A variable is simply something that holds a value. The value can be changed and modified. In other words, it is variable
because it can be anything.
Variables allow input of data into the macro from a variety of sources such as from the macro itself, a file, user input, the
Windows clipboard, a .INI file, the title of a window and many others. The variables can then be manipulated, processed
and tested. Actions can be taken on the results of the test or on the variables themselves. We'll give some specific
examples below to help cement the idea behind the use and power of variables.
Types of Variables
We support 4 different types of variables. These are Text String, Integer, Decimal and Control variables.
1. A Text String variable can hold any type of character, number, word, phrase or paragraph. Anything you can type
into a word processor can basically be held in a text string variable.
2. An Integer variable is one that can hold a "whole" number. Whole numbers are values that do not contain
fractions (... -2, -1, 0, 1, 2 ...). Note: An integer variable (N1, etc.) can range from 2147483648 to
2147483647. When the value exceeds 2147483647, it wraps. If an integer variable contains 2147483647 and
you add 1 to it, the integer variable will contain 2147483648.
3. A Decimal variable is one that can hold any type of number, such as 12.432 or -1.3. Note: A decimal variable
(D1) can range from 5.0 x 10^ -324 to 1.7 x 10^308 with 15 to 16 significant digits. This first example is a
decimal expanded to include 324 leading zeros followed by the number 5, represented as .000(321 more zeros)5.
The second range extends to 17 followed by 308 zeros which would look like 1700000000(300 more zeros).0.
The numbers are rounded to 15 or 16 significant digits.
4. A Control variable captures information from a window control, such as an edit box, window title, button, etc.
This information can then be manipulated to work with other Variables in Macro Express are represented by a
letter followed by a number.
Text string variables always start with the letter "T" and can be followed by the numbers 1 - 99 as there are 99 available
text variables. Integer variables always start with the letter "N" and can be followed by the numbers 1 - 99 as there are
also 99 available integer variables. Similarly, decimal variables always start with the letter "D" and can be followed by the
numbers 1 - 99 as there are 99 decimal variables available. Control Variables always start with the letter "C" and can be
followed by the numbers 1 - 99 as there are 99 control variables available.
Defining Variables
There are numerous commands that allow you to define an initial value for a variable. See the Set String Variable, Set
Integer Variable and Set Decimal Variable commands. In addition, variables can be set using the date, time, encrypted
text, repeats, processing a text file, processing an ASCII delimited text file macro and other commands.
There are methods also available to modify or manipulate the variables once they have been created. See the Modify
String Variable, Modify Integer Variable and Modify Decimal Variable commands. See the Controls section to learn more
about how to use these variables.
Playback of Variables
Text Variables can be placed in the input fields of practically all macro commands. To do so, you would place the name of
the text variable surrounded by percent signs (%). This would look like %T1% for the variable T1. For example, if you
wanted to launch a program, you could put %T1% for the file name of the program to launch. When the macro is
executed, it will attempt to run the program that is defined by T1.You will assign a value to T1 at some other point in
your macro and this value is what will be used as the file name.
Or you may find that you have a inserted a number of delay commands in your macro script. Instead of inserting 5
seconds as the delay time, you could insert %N1%. The macro will delay the number of seconds defined in N1.
There are many ways to use variables. Besides placing variables in commands as described above, there are some
commands that can accept and use a variable directly as part of the command. These include window resizing and
repositioning commands, mouse movement commands, repeat command and processing text or ASCII delimited text
files.
Some examples of using variables:

1) Load the mouse cursor position into variables at the beginning of a macro. Restore the mouse location at the end
of a macro.
2) Load the position and size of a window into variables at the beginning of a macro. Restore the size and position
after manipulating the window.
3) Prompt the user for information and load the information into variables. Save the information to a file and send it
via email.
4) Processing a text file or processing an ASCII delimited text file uses variables to load values from the files. These
values can be loaded in and pasted into other applications.
5) Prompt for a text variable. Create boilerplate text that uses the text variable (such as a name) throughout the
boilerplate text to customize it. Paste the text into an application.
6) Process a whole set of files by loading in the file names from a text file (i.e. use the process text file command).
7) Manipulate text strings, such as extracting the last 10 characters from a string, finding all characters before the
@ symbol, etc.
Clear Variables
Use this option to clear the value of a variable during macro playback. You can select to clear all variables or a subset of
all variables.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Clear Variables
Variable Type to Clear

Select the variable type that you want to clear. You may select Text, Integer, Decimal, Control Variables or all variables
used in the macro.
Clear All
Clears all variables for the variable type selected.
Clear Range
Clears a range of variables for the variable type selected. Enter numbers from 1 to 99 in the range fields.
Note: This command will not affect variables saved through the Variable Save command.
INI Files and Variables

INI Overview
An .INI or initialization file (pronounced either 'eye-en-eye' or 'inny') is generally used to store configuration information
for Windows or a program that runs on Windows. Once widely used, many programs now use the Windows Registry
instead of an .INI file. It is likely that you will find many .INI files in the Windows folder on your computer.
An .INI file can be used to read information from an existing .INI file but it is also a convenient way to save and retrieve
macro variables. The "Variable Modify String: Save %T1% to INI File" command saves a macro variable to an .INI file
and the "Variable Set String %T2% from INI File" reads information from an .INI file and places it into a variable. To
understand how to use these commands, you need to understand the structure of an .INI file.
An .INI file contains one or more 'Sections'. Each section is given a name and is stored within square brackets, '[' and ']'.
Under each section are 'keys' and 'values' separated by an equals sign, ('='). An .INI file may contain many sections but
each section name must be unique. Likewise, a section in an .INI file can contain many keys but each key name within a
section must be unique. However, keys with the same name can be placed in different sections in an .INI file.
The .INI file syntax looks like this:
[sectionName1]
param1=string
param2=string
[sectionName2]
param1=string
param2=string
Here is an example from an actual SYSTEM.INI file found in the Windows folder of a computer:
[drivers]
wave=mmdrv.dll
timer=timer.drv
[386enh]
woafont=dosapp.FON
EGA80WOA.FON=EGA80WOA.FON
EGA40WOA.FON=EGA40WOA.FON
CGA80WOA.FON=CGA80WOA.FON
CGA40WOA.FON=CGA40WOA.FON
This example contains two Sections, "drivers" and "386enh". The "drivers" section contains two Keys, "wave" and "timer".
The Key "wave" has a Value of "mmdrv.dll".
Use with Variable Modify String and Variable Set String Commands
The "Variable Modify String: Save %T1% to INI File" and "Variable Set String %T2% from INI File" commands require
that you specify a filename, a Section Name, a Key Name and a string variable (T1 through T99).
When you use the "Variable Modify String: Save %T1% to INI File" macro command, the content of the variable
is written as the value of the specified Key.
When you use the "Variable Set String %T2% from INI File" macro command, the value of the specified Key is
read and placed into the specified variable.
Modify Decimal Variable
Scripting Editor > Variables> Variable Modify Decimal
Use the Set Decimal Variable command to assign a decimal value to a variable. Then use the commands below to modify
or manipulate the original decimal variable. Note: A decimal variable (D1) can range from 5.0 x 10^ -324 to 1.7 x
10^308 with 15 to 16 significant digits. This first example is a decimal expanded to include 324 leading zeros followed by
the number 5, represented as .000(321 more zeros)5. The second range extends to 17 followed by 308 zeros which
would look like 1700000000(300 more zeros).0. The numbers are rounded to 15 or 16 significant digits.
Add
This allows you to add a decimal variable to a number or to another decimal variable and place it in a decimal variable of
your choice.
Subtract
This allows you to subtract a decimal variable from a number or from another decimal variable or subtract a number from
a decimal variable. The result can be placed in a decimal variable of your choice.
Multiply
This allows you to multiply a decimal variable with a number or with another decimal variable and place it in a decimal
variable of your choice.
Divide
This allows you to divide a decimal variable with a number or with another decimal variable or divide a number with a
decimal variable. The result can be placed in a decimal variable of your choice.
Round
This command will round the value of a decimal variable to the number of decimal places you select. If you are copying a
decimal value and saving it to a variable or modifying a decimal variable such as multiplying or dividing, you may want to
trim the number of decimal places. Just select the variable to round and insert the number of decimal places.
Note: The Round Decimal Variable command uses asymmetric arithmetic rounding to determine how to round values
that are exactly midway between the two values that have the desired number of significant digits. This method always
rounds to the larger value.
The following examples illustrate the use of Round Decimal Variable:
For example:
If %D1% is 1.234 then Round Decimal Variable %D1% to 2 decimal places results in 1.23
If %D1% is 1.235 then Round Decimal Variable %D1% to 2 decimal places results in 1.24
If %D1% is -1.235 then Round Decimal Variable %D1% to 2 decimal places results in -1.23
Convert To Text String

This allows you to convert the decimal variable to a text variable. You can specify the number of decimal places to use.
Truncate To Integer
This allows you to convert a decimal variable to an integer variable. Any fractional part of the decimal value will be
truncated.
Copy Value
This allows you to copy one decimal variable to another decimal variable.
Related Topics
Save or Restore Variables
Setting Decimal Variables
Variables Overview
Modify Integer Variable
Scripting Editor > Variables> Variable Modify Integer
Command Options
These commands let you modify or manipulate an integer variable.
Add
This allows you to add an integer variable to a number or to another integer variable and place the sum into an integer
variable of your choice.
Subtract
This allows you to subtract an integer variable from a number or from another integer variable or subtract a number from
an integer variable. The result can be placed in an integer variable of your choice.
Multiply
This allows you to multiply an integer variable with a number or with another integer variable and place the result into an
integer variable of your choice.
Divide
This allows you to divide an integer variable with a number or with another integer variable or divide a number with an
integer variable. The result can be placed into an integer variable of your choice.
Convert To String
This allows you to convert the integer variable to a text variable.
Convert To Decimal
This allows you to convert an integer variable to a decimal variable.
Copy Value
This allows you to copy one integer variable to another integer variable.
Increment
This option will increase the variable selected by one. For example, if variable N1 had an original value of 25, the value
would change to 26 after running this command.
Decrement
This option will decrease the variable selected by one. For example, if variable N1 had an original value of 25, the value
would change to 24 after running this command.
Related Topics
Setting Integer Variables
Variables Overview
Modify String Variable
Scripting Editor > Variables> Variable Modify String
After you have created a text variable, you can use these commands to modify the value of that variable.
Option 1
Trim
This allows you to remove all spaces and control characters on the left and on the right of the variable value.
Left Trim
This allows you to remove all spaces and control characters to the left of the variable value.
Right Trim
This allows you to remove all spaces and control characters to the right of the variable value.
Strip CR/LF
This allows you to remove any Carriage Returns and Line Feeds embedded in the variable value.
Convert To Integer
This allows you to convert the text variable to an integer variable. If the text variable does not contain a valid value to be
converted to an integer (i.e. non numeric characters), then the integer value will be set to zero.
Convert To Decimal
This allows you to convert the text variable to a decimal variable. If the text variable does not contain a valid value to be
converted to a decimal (i.e. non numeric characters), then the decimal value will be set to zero.
Append Text
This allows you to add text to the end of a variable. The text to be appended is entered in the "Text To Append" field.
Append Text String Variable
This allows you to add or combine the contents of one text variable with another text variable.
Copy Whole Text
This allows you to copy the entire contents of one text variable to another text variable.
Copy Part Of Text
This allows you to copy a portion of one text variable to another text variable. You specify the starting position and the
number of characters to copy. The starting position and the characters to copy can be set to either a value you select or
can be set by an integer variable. Because integer variables can be set with the length of a text variable or the position of
text in a text variable, you have much greater flexibility in determining what you want to copy.
Delete Part of Text
This allows you to delete a portion of a text variable. You specify the starting position and the number of characters to
delete. The starting position and the characters to delete can be set to either a value you select or can be set by an
integer variable. Because integer variables can be set with the length of a text variable or the position of text in a text
variable, you have much greater flexibility in determining what you want to delete.
Uppercase
This allows you to convert the entire contents of a text variable to uppercase letters.
Lowercase
This allows you to convert the entire contents of a text variable to lowercase letters.
Pad Left
This allows you to pad the left side of a text variable with spaces. You specify the width that the resulting variable should
have. For example, if the text variable contained the name "Fred" and you specified a width of 15, a total of 11 spaces
would be added to the left side of "Fred" since "Fred" takes up 4 spaces (4 + 11 = 15). The pad left can be used for right
justifying values such as columns of numbers.
Pad Right
This allows you to pad the right side of a text variable with spaces. Specify the width that the resulting variable should
have. For example, if the text variable contained the name "Fred" and you specified a width of 15, a total of 11 spaces
would be added to the right side of "Fred" since "Fred" takes up 4 spaces (4 + 11 = 15). The pad right can be used for
left justifying values.
Replace Substring
This option allows you to find a string of text within your variable and replace it with another set of text. In the example
above, the macro is looking for "2001" in the text string saved to variable T1. Any instances of "2001" will be replaced
with "2002".
Replace All Instances
Check this box to have every instance of your text string replaced. With this box not checked, the first instance of the
text string will be replaced. Any other instances will not be changed.
Ignore Case
With this option checked, the substring that the macro is looking for will ignore whether the text uses upper and
lower case letters.
Option 2
Save to Clipboard
This option allows you to save the variable to the Windows Clipboard.
Save to Text File
This option allows you to save the variable to a text file.
Append to Text File
Use this option to have the variable append to a text file.
Save to INI File
Use this option to save the variable to an INI file. See the topic INI Files and Variables for more information.
Save to Environment Variable
Windows maintains "global" variables that the system can access at any point. Some common ones are as follows:
temp -- holds the location of the temporary folder on your computer
windir -- holds the folder name where windows is installed
path -- holds a number of folder names where files should be searched if a file cannot be found in the current folder
Use this command to set up your own environmental "global" variables that you can use later or use to modify existing
variables. A complementary command that can "read" an environment variable is part of the Variable Set String
commands.
Additional information from Microsoft about Environmental Variables

Below is some additional information from Microsoft about Environment variables. To determine what Environment
variables exist on your computer, run the MS-DOS prompt. From the prompt that displays C:\Windows>, type set and
press enter.
--- Definition #1 --Environment variable
An element of the operating system environment, such as a path, a directory name, or a configuration string.
Environment variables are typically set within batch files.
--- Definition #2 --Environment variables specify search paths for files, directories for temporary files, application-specific options, and other
similar information. The system maintains an environment block for each user and one for the computer. The system
environment block represents environment variables for all users of the particular computer. A user's environment block
represents the environment variables the system maintains for that particular user, including the set of system
environment variables.
--- Definition #3 --To set environment variables with Windows NT
1. On the Start menu, point to Settings, then click Control Panel.
2. In the Control Panel, double click System.
3. In the System Properties dialog box, click the Environment tab, and specify your environment variable setting, using
the User Variables for, Variable, and Value boxes.
4. Exit the development environment and restart it for the changed environment variable to take effect.
To set environment variables with Windows 95
1. Add the environment variable to the autoexec.bat file.
2. Restart Windows 95 for the change to take effect.
Related Topics
Setting Text String Variables
Variables Overview
Run Macro in Variable
Scripting Editor > Variables > Run Macro in Variable
Macro Express allows the content of a variable to be loaded during the playback of a macro and executed as part of the
macro. This can be particularly helpful in cases where you want part of the macro to be dynamic. You change the content
of the variable to fit the specific need before playing the macro.
The "Run Macro in Variable" command is similar to the "Load Macro Text File" command but, because there is no file I/O,
the "Run Macro in Variable" command is much faster.
Many macro commands require one or more Separator Characters. The Separator Character is used to indicate the end of
a command or the end of a parameter within a command. Putting the Separator Character directly inside a macro
command is not supported. When putting the ASCII macro commands in a variable to use with the Run Macro in Variable
command, you can include \s wherever the Separator Character is needed.
For example, the ASCII representation of the Text Type command looks like this:
<TEXTTYPE:A text type example|>
Note: A Separator Character | is required after the word 'example'.
To use the Run Macro in a Variable command successfully, use the following to assign this command to a variable
without using the separator character:
<TEXTTYPE:A text type example\s>
resulting in:
Variable Set String %T1% "<TEXTTYPE:A text type example\s>"
This table shows several other substitutions for characters that cannot be added directly to a macro command:
Code
Hexadecimal
Value
08 hex
Character Description
\b
Decimal
Value
8 dec
\n
10 dec
0A hex
LF - Line Feed
\r
13 dec
0D hex
CR - Carriage Return
\t
9 dec
09 hex
HT - Horizontal Tab
BS - Backspace
\s
1 dec
01 hex
Separator Char
\\
92 dec
5c hex
\ character
\xHH HH = string of 2 hex digits. Use this to add any character, specified in hexadecimal format, to the Run Macro in
Variable command.
Additional Information
When including file paths in the Run Macro in Variable command, you will need to be careful when including certain
characters in your path. For example, if you need to include a path like c:\temp the \t will be interpreted as a HT or
horizontal tab character. To avoid this you can change the case.
c:\Temp
or you can use a double \
c:\\temp
You may also want to include variables in the Run Macro in Variable command. If you include %T1%, then the %T1%
will be changed to the content of the T1 variable. This may not be what you want. Suppose variable T1 contains one, T2
contains two and T3 contains three. Inside the Run Macro in Variable command the following:
T1=%T1%\r\nT2=%T2%\r\nT3=%T3%
would be changed to this:
T1=one\r\nT2=two\r\nT3=three
To include %T1% and not the content of %T1% do this:
T1=\x25T1\x25\r\nT2=\x25T2\x25\r\nT3=\x25T3\x25
This works because the % character can be replaced by \x25.

These commands allow you to save your variables and then restore the same variable values for use again in another
macro or later in the same macro.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Save or Variable Restore
Save
The four save commands allow you to save variables to memory. You can select from the commands to save all
variables, save all text variables, save all integer variables or save all decimal variables. Used in conjunction with the
restore variables command, variables can be passed quite easily from one macro to the next on independent running of
macros. Where one macro does a save variable command, the next macro can do a restore variable command to obtain
the values used in the first macro.
Restore
The four restore commands allow you to restore variables from memory. You can select from the commands to restore
all variables, restore all text variables, restore all integer variables or restore all decimal variables. Used in conjunction
with the save variables command, variables can be passed quite easily from one macro to the next on independent
running of macros. Where one macro does a save variable command, the next macro can do a restore variable command
to obtain the values used in the first macro.
Set Decimal Variable

This command lets you assign a value to a decimal variable. Up to 99 decimal variables can be used in a macro. Use the
Modify Decimal Variables command to manipulate the original values assigned to a macro.
Note: A decimal variable (D1) can range from 5.0 x 10^ -324 to 1.7 x 10^308 with 15 to 16 significant digits. This first
example is a decimal expanded to include 324 leading zeros followed by the number 5, represented as .000(321 more
zeros)5. The second range extends to 17 followed by 308 zeros which would look like 1700000000(300 more zeros).0.
The numbers are rounded to 15 or 16 significant digits.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set Decimal
Set Value Now

This allows you to specify what the original value of the variable is going to be. Enter this value in the "Initial Value" field.
Prompt For Value

This will pop up an input box when the user runs the macro and allows the user to input the decimal value. You can
enter text in the "Prompt Text" field that helps explain the type of value you want the user to input.
Mask Input - When the macro user inputs a decimal value, the input will be masked if this option is selected. All that
will be visible during the input are **** characters.
Prompt Always on Top - With this option checked, the Prompt for Value box will remain on top of all windows
during playback of the macro, until you close the box. If you open another window while the prompt box is open, the
prompt box will still remain on top of the window you just opened.
Store "0" if cancelled - If the user closes the input window without entering or saving an entry, 0 (zero) will be
saved as the decimal variable.
Hint: Setting a Default Value in the Prompt Window

First use the Set Value Now option. Insert the decimal value that you want set as the
default. Then use the Prompt for Value option. Both options must reference the same
variable, such as D1. When the macro is run, the prompt window will display the default
value. The user can overwrite, amend, accept or append to this value.
Below is a sample of the commands as they would look in the Scripting Editor. The decimal
.52 is the default value.
Variable Set Decimal %D1% to .52
Variable Set Decimal %D1% from Prompt
Prompt Window Positioning

You can assign where you would like the Decimal Prompt window to appear on the screen during playback of the
macro. The coordinates allow you to position the decimal prompt window to an area of the screen most convenient
for your use. The default display is the center of the screen. You can also define the coordinates in pixels. Enter the
pixel coordinates into the Left and Top edit fields. If you entered 200 into the Left field, the window would be
positioned 200 pixels to the right of the left edge of the screen. Similarly, if you entered 200 into the Top field, the
window would be positioned 200 pixels down from the top edge of the screen.
Set Manually
Instead of using pixels, you can have the Decimal Prompt window appear in the center, corners or midpoints of the
screen by using this option. Pressing the Set Manually button will activate the following two windows.
Click on one of the arrows or the center button of the Dialog Positioner to move the Enter Value window. This will
move the Enter Value window relative to the button you selected. If you click on the button in the upper left corner,
the Enter Value window will move to the upper left corner of the screen. Click Save on the Dialog Positioner and this
is where the Enter Value window will display during playback of the macro.
Set From Clipboard

This will examine the text contents of the clipboard. It will take this value and strip off any spaces and any carriage
returns and line feeds. It will then attempt to convert it to a decimal value and place it in the variable. If a non-decimal
value (i.e. a string of text) is in the clipboard or the text clipboard is empty, the variable value will be set to zero.
Related Topics
Modify Decimal Variables
Variables Overview
Set String Variable

This command lets you assign a value to a text string variable. Up to 99 text variables can be used in a macro. Once you
have defined the string variable value, you can use the Modify String Variables command to manipulate the original
values assigned in the macro.
Note: An integer variable (N1, etc.) can range from 2147483648 to 2147483647. When the value exceeds 2147483647,
it wraps. If an integer variable contains 2147483647 and you add 1 to it, the integer variable will contain 2147483648.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set String
Set Value Now

This option allows you to assign a value to the variable right now. Enter this value in the "Initial Value" field.
Prompt For Value

This will pop up an input box when the user runs the macro and allow the user to input the text value. You can enter text
in the "Prompt Text" field that helps explain the type of value you want the user to input. You can also define the
position on the screen where you want the input box to appear during the playback of the macro.
Mask Input - With this option selected, the text entered into the input box will be masked. Entries will show as
***.
Prompt Always on Top - This options makes sure that the prompt window is always on top of other windows
open on the computer.
Store "CANCEL" if cancelled - If the user closes the input window without entering or saving an entry, CANCEL
will be saved as the variable.

First use the Set Value Now option. Insert the text that you want set as the default. Then
use the Prompt for Value option. Both options must reference the same variable, such as
T1. When the macro is run, the prompt window will display the default value. The user can
overwrite, amend, accept or append to this value.
Below is a sample of the commands as they would look in the Scripting Editor. "This is a
test" is the default value.
Variable Set String %T1% "This is a test"
Variable Set String %T1% from Prompt
Set Value From Clipboard

This will extract the current text value saved to the clipboard and place it into the variable. Note: When using Macro
Express on Windows 95, 98 or Me only the first 64K of data is copied to or from the clipboard.
Set Value From File

This will load the contents of a text file into the variable.
Set Value To Top Most Program Name

This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and determine what program it is from. It will then
place the program name (i.e. the EXE file name) into the variable.
Set Value To Top Most Window Title

This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and take the name that is in the caption bar (i.e. the
Window Title) and place it in the variable.
Set Value To Current Folder Name

This will obtain the folder name that Windows is currently pointing to and place it in the variable.
Set Value From INI File

This will obtain a value from an INI file and place it into a variable. This requires that you specify the file name of the INI
file, the section name and the key name. See the topic INI Files and Variables for more information.
Set Value From Environment Variable

This will obtain a value from an environmental variable and place it into another variable. The complementary command
to write a text value to an environmental command can be found in the Modify String Variables window.
Additional information about Environmental Variables from Microsoft

Below is some additional information from Microsoft about Environment variables. To
determine what Environment variables exist on your computer, run the MS-DOS prompt.
From the prompt that displays C:\Windows>, type set and press enter.
--- Definition #1 --Environment variable
An element of the operating system environment, such as a path, a directory name, or a
configuration string. Environment variables are typically set within batch files.
--- Definition #2 --Environment variables specify search paths for files, directories for temporary files,
application-specific options, and other similar information. The system maintains an
environment block for each user and one for the computer. The system environment block
represents environment variables for all users of the particular computer. A user's
environment block represents the environment variables the system maintains for that
particular user, including the set of system environment variables.
Set Value To File Name (Prompt)

This will prompt the user with a standard "Open File" dialog box. The file name chosen by the user will be placed in the
variable. You can specify the title that you want the dialog box to use.
Set Value To Folder Name (Prompt)

This will prompt the user with a standard "Browse For Folder" dialog box. The folder name chosen by the user will be
placed in the variable. You can specify message text that you want the dialog box to use.
Related Topics
Modify Text String Variables
Variables Overview
Set Integer Variable

This command lets you assign a value to an integer variable. Up to 99 integer variables can be used in a macro. Once
you have defined the integer variable value, you can use the Modify Integer Variable commands to manipulate the
original values assigned in the macro.
Note: An integer variable (N1, etc.) can range from 2147483648 to 2147483647. When the value exceeds 2147483647,
it wraps. If an integer variable contains 2147483647 and you add 1 to it, the integer variable will contain 2147483648.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set Integer
Option 1
Set Value Now
This option allows you to assign a value to the variable right now. Enter this value in the "Initial Value" field.
Prompt For Value
This will pop up an input box when the user runs the macro and allows the user to input the integer value. You can enter
text in the "Prompt Text" field that helps explain the type of value you want the user to input. You can also define the
position on the screen where you want the input box to appear during the playback of the macro.
Mask Input - With this option selected, the text entered into the input box will be masked. Entries will show as
***.
Prompt Always on Top - This options makes sure that the prompt window is always on top of other windows
open on the computer.
Store "0" if canceled - If the user closes the input window without entering or saving an entry, 0 (zero) will be
saved as the integer variable.

First use the Set Value Now option. Insert the integer value that you want set as the
default. Then use the Prompt for Value option. Both options must reference the same
variable, such as N1. When the macro is run, the prompt window will display the default
value. The user can overwrite, amend, accept or append to this value.
Below is a sample of the commands as they would look in the Scripting Editor. The number
10 is the default value.
Variable Set Integer %N1% from Prompt
Set Value From Mouse X Position

This will examine the current mouse position and place the X coordinate of this position in the variable.
Set Value From Mouse Y Position
This will examine the current mouse position and place the Y coordinate of this position in the variable.
Set Value From the Size Of A File
This will examine the size of a file in bytes and place this value into the variable. You will need to enter the name of the
file to check in the "File Name" field.
Set A Random Value
This will place a random number in the variable. The random number will be between 0 and the value entered for the
"Random Range". For example, if you enter 15 as your random value, each time the macro plays back, the variable will
be a random number between 0 and 15.
Set Value From Screen Width
The integer value will be set to the width of the screen. The value that is assigned is the number of pixels in the width of
the screen.
Set Value From Screen Height
The integer value will be set to the height of the screen. The value that is assigned is the number of pixels in the height
of the screen.
Set Value From Current Window Top
This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and examine its location on the screen. It will obtain
the top position (in X,Y screen coordinates) of this window and place it in the variable. Note: You can obtain the bottom
position of the Window by adding the Window Top to the Window Height.
Set Value From Current Window Left
This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and examine its location on the screen. It will obtain
the left position (in X,Y screen coordinates) of this window and place it in the variable. Note: You can obtain the right
position of the Window by adding the Window Left to the Window Width.
Set Value From Current Window Width
This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and examine its size on the screen. It will obtain the
width (in pixels) of this window and place it in the variable.
Set Value From Current Window Height
This will examine the window that is currently on top of all others and examine its size on the screen. It will obtain the
height (in pixels) of this window and place it in the variable.
Set Value From Clipboard
This will examine the text contents of the clipboard. It will take this value and strip off any spaces and any carriage
returns and line feeds. It will then attempt to convert it to an integer value and place it in the variable. If a non integer
value (i.e. a bunch of text) is in the clipboard or the text clipboard is empty, the variable value will be set to zero.
Get Length of a Text Variable
This option allows you to set an integer to the length of a text variable. For example, if the length of the text string (T1)
is 100 characters, then the value saved to the Integer variable such as N1 is 100. Below is an example of how to use this
command to extract a set number of characters from the end of variable length strings.
Example
This example shows how to obtain the last 14 characters of a text string
when the string is of varying lengths. For this example, the text string is
saved to variable T1. The text string could have been copied to the
clipboard and then saved to a variable, extracted from a Text File, input by
a user, or any number of ways.
1. Variable Set Integer %N1% from Length of Variable %T1%
2. Variable Modify Integer: %N1% = %N1% - 13
3. Variable Modify String: Copy Part of %T1% to %T2%
Step one calculates the length of the text string variable and saves
the value to N1.
Step two subtracts 13 characters from the length of the string and
saves the new value to N1.
The last step copies just the last 14 characters of the string and
saves the text to a new value of T2, as shown in the image below.
Get Position of Text in a Text Variable

This command is also useful for text string manipulation, as is Get Length of a Text Variable. Use this command to find
the location of text within a text string variable and save the value to an Integer variable.
For example, if variable T1 contained "myemailaddress@myisp.com", this command could find the location of the @
symbol in the string. The integer variable would be set to 15 as @ is the 15th character. You could then use this
information to delete or copy all of the text found before the @ symbol, or after. Below is an example of how you would
do this.
Example
This example shows how to save all characters before the @ symbol to a
new text string variable when the string is of varying lengths. For this
example, the text string is saved to variable T1. The text string could have
been copied to the clipboard and then saved to a variable, extracted from a
Text File, input by a user, or any number of ways.
1. Variable Set Integer %N1% from Position of Text in Variable %T1%
2. Variable Modify Integer: %N1% = %N1% - 1
3. Variable Modify String: Copy Part of %T1% to %T2%
Step one calculates the position of the @ symbol in the text string variable
and saves the value to N1.
Step two subtracts one character from the length and saves the new value
to N1.
The last step copies all of the characters before the @ symbol and saves
the text to a new value of T2.
Option 2
The first seven options, those in the left hand column, are based on the computer's system clock. If the clock is incorrect,
the integer values will also be incorrect. An example of using one of these options would be the Set Value From Current
Hour. You could have the macro play one set of instructions if the system clock reads before 5:00pm or play back
another set of instructions if the system clock reads after 5:00pm.
Set Value from Current Day
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current date, 1 -31.
Set Value from Current Month

This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current month.
Set Value from Current Year
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current year.
Set Value from Current Day of Week
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current day of the week. The day of the week is an integer
between 1 and 7. Sunday is the first day (i.e. 1) of the week and Saturday is the seventh (i.e. 7).
Set Value from Current Hour
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current hour. The hours are set in military time. For
example, 5:00pm would be set as 17:00, or 8:00am would be set as 8:00. The integer variable would then display as 17
for 5:00pm or 8 for 8:00am.
Set Value from Current Minute
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current minute.
Set Value from Current Second
This option allows you to set the integer value based on the current second.
Controls
These four Set Value from Control commands are similar to the Set Values from Current Window commands. But rather
than look at the current window, these commands set the value from a specific control. Controls refer to the identifiable
parts of a specific application window. Controls may include such things as a button, an edit box, a toolbar, a window title
bar or other items. The control may be part of the main application window or be part of a child window (a window
within a window). Depending on how the application was written, the entire window may just be a single control.
Set Value from Control Left
This will examine the Control designated its location on the screen. It will obtain the left position (in X,Y screen
coordinates) of this Control and place it in the variable. Note: You can get the right position of the Control by adding
the Control Left to the Control Width.
Set Value from Control Top
This will examine the Control designated and its location on the screen. It will obtain the top position (in X,Y screen
coordinates) of this Control and place it in the variable. Note: You can get the bottom position of the Control by
adding the Control Top to the Control Height.
Set Value from Control Width
This will examine the Control designated and its size on the screen. It will obtain the width (in pixels) of this Control
and place it in the variable.
Set Value from Control Height
This will examine the Control designated and its size on the screen. It will obtain the height (in pixels) of this Control
and place it in the variable.
Computer Monitor
These two options will obtain the width or height of a monitor in pixels. In essence these commands determine the
screen resolution of a monitor. Then use the If Variable command to take specific actions based on which screen
resolution is found on the monitor.
Set Value from Monitor Width
Save the width of the monitor in pixels to an Integer variable. If you have a single monitor, then insert 0 (zero) as
the monitor number. If you have multiple monitors connected to your system, then insert 0 as the first monitor, 1
(one) as the second monitor, 2 (two) as the third monitor, etc.
Set Value from Monitor Height
Save the height of the monitor in pixels to an Integer variable. If you have a single monitor, then insert 0 (zero) as
the monitor number. If you have multiple monitors connected to your system, then insert 0 (zero) as the first
monitor, 1 (one) as the second monitor, 2 (two) as the third monitor, etc.
Related Topics
Modify Integer Variables
Variables Overview
Variable Set From File

This command allows you to obtain either the date and time of a specific file or the path of the file and save the
information into variables. You can then compare the variables to take further action. For example, you can check to see
if you want to replace a file with one that has a more recent date and time.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set from File
Get File Date/Time

This option allows you to obtain the date and time of the file you specify and save the information into Integer variables.
You have three different time frames to choose from, based upon what you need to compare.
Creation Date/Time - The date and time that the file was originally created.
Modified Date/Time - The date and time that the file was last modified or updated and saved.
Last Accessed Date/Time - The date and time that the file was last accessed or opened.
Note: Not all file systems will support all three of these date/time formats. Macro Express will warn you when you try to
run the macro if the format you selected is not available .
The date and time components are broken down to six different variables as described below.
Month/Date/Year
In the example above, the month is saved to Integer variable N1, the day to N2 and year to N3. So if the file date was
December 25, 2001, the value saved to variable N1 would be 12. The value saved to N2 would be 25. And the value
saved to N3 would be 2001.
Month - The month is saved to the variable as 1 through 12.

Day - The day is saved to the variable as 1 through 31.
Year - The year is always saved to the variable as a four digit number.
Hour/Minute/Seconds
Hour -The hour is saved in a 24 hour format. So if the file time were between midnight and 1:00am, the hour
would be saved to the variable as 0. If the file time was between 11:00 am and noon, the hour would be saved
to the variable as 11. If the file time was between 11:00 pm and midnight, the hour would be saved to the
variable as 23.
Minute - Minutes are saved to variables as 0 to 59.
Seconds - Seconds are also saved to variables as 0 to 59.
Get File Path Info

This option allows you to obtain the file path of a particular file and save the information into text string variables. The
file path is split into four distinct pieces, as explained below.
Drive - This is the letter drive on your computer, including the colon.
Path - This variable contains the folders where the file is located.
Filename - This variable contains just the name of the file without the file extension.
Extension - This variable contains the file extension, such as .txt, .bmp or .exe.
Expand Filename
The Expand Filename converts a relative file name into a fully qualified path name. For example, if the current directory
is c:\Temp and the Filename/Path is "..\work.txt" and Expand Filename is unchecked, then resulting values would be:
Drive:
Path: ..\
Filename: work
Extension: .txt
But if Expand Filename is checked, then the resulting values would be:
Drive: c:
Path: \
Filename: work
Extension: .txt
Example
For the file displayed in the image above, here is what would be saved to each variable.
Drive: C:
Path: \Program Files\Macro Express3\
Filename: MacExp
Extension: .exe
Variable Set from Miscellaneous

The Variable Set from Miscellaneous command is used to retrieve a variety of information about your computer, your
macros, or Macro Express.
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set from Miscellaneous
Variable to receive information

Select the text string variable to store the information retrieved. The variable can then be used later in the macro.
Value to retrieve
Select the information needed from the drop down list. This information will be stored in the variable that you choose.
You can obtain the path information to various folders on the computer, such as My Documents shown in the example
above. You may also obtain various Macro Express information such as the macro file in use, the installation path, where
the Macro Express preference settings are stored, etc. Machine specific information may also be retrieved, such as owner
name, machine name, etc.
Variable Set to ASCII Character
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set to ASCII Character
This command allows you to convert a numeric value into its ASCII character equivalent. For example the number 65
represents the letter A. Or in the example above, the number 123 represents the character {. The range of values
allowed is from 0 to 255.
In Variable
The numeric value can be assigned using an integer value (N variable) specified previously in the macro.
Constant
This option allows you to directly assign the numeric value.
Place Character in:

The ASCII character that matches the numeric value will be placed in a text string variable. In the example above it is
saved to variable T1. If you were to later have the macro play back the value of T1, the character { would be displayed.
Variable Set to ASCII Value
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set to ASCII Value
This command is essentially the inverse of the Variable Set to ASCII Character. It converts an ASCII character to its
ASCII numeric equivalent. For example, the letter "a", converts to a numeric value of 97. The letter "A" converts to a
numeric value of 65.
In Variable
The ASCII Character may be assigned using a text string variable value (T variable) specified previously in the macro.
Character
This option allows you to directly assign the ASCII Character.
Place Value in:

The ASCII character selected will be saved as a numeric value and placed in an integer variable. In the example above
the ASCII character "a" is saved to variable N1. If you were to later have the macro play back the value of N1, the
character "a" would be displayed.
Controls
The use of the Control commands can be a very powerful addition for building macros. We'll attempt to explain some of
the benefits of using these commands in this page and subsequent topics. But first, here is a definition of controls from
Microsoft:
"A control is a child window an application uses in conjunction with another window to perform simple input and output
(I/O) tasks. Controls are most often used within dialog boxes, but they can also be used in other windows. Controls
within dialog boxes provide the user with the means to type text, choose options, and direct a dialog box to complete
its action. Controls in other windows provide a variety of services, such as letting the user choose commands, view
status, and view and edit text."
For our purposes, controls refer to the identifiable parts of a specific application window. Controls may include such
things as a button, an edit box, a toolbar, a window title bar or other items. The control may be part of the main
application window or be part of a child window (a window within a window).
Assigning Controls to Variables

A "C" type variable contains the control information. There are two commands that can be used to obtain the control
information and assign it to a "C" variable. The first choice would be to use the Get Control command. This launches a
small utility that allows you to get the control information and assign a variable. The control information is assigned while
building the macro. The other option is to use the Capture Control command. This allows you to grab the control
information during the playback of a macro. The control is assigned based on the position of the mouse at the time of
capture.
Manipulating the Variable

After the control information has been saved to a "C" variable, there are a number of options available for using this
information.
If Statements - You can set up conditional If statements, such as if the Control is visible, has focus or is enabled. Or
you can base the statement on if the Control is not visible, doesn't have focus or is disabled.
Mouse Click - You can have the mouse click on the Control at some point during the macro. This is a good way to
make sure the correct button is pressed, the right edit field has focus, etc.
Set Focus - You can have the macro give focus to the control you defined during playback of the macro.
Set Control Text - This Set Control Text option allows you to define the text for the "C" Variable. This is helpful
when the control you captured is an edit box containing text.
Modify the Controls - The Variable Modify Controls options allow for copying the variable to another variable or to
modify the top level window for more macro flexibility.
Post Message - The Post Message command allows the user to send a Windows message to the specified control.
Wait for Control - You can instruct a macro to wait for the Control to gain focus, become visible or become enabled.
Or you can have the macro wait for their opposites - wait for control to lose focus, become invisible or become
disabled.
In summary, the Controls open up a lot more possibilities for creating macros. You can more reliably work with Child
Windows (windows within windows). Directly click on a button or go to a specific edit box without having to Tab through
fields or position the mouse just right.
Microsoft's programs seem to have fewer controls than programs from other manufacturers. How the controls work
depends on the way the program you are trying to control works.
Related Topics
Control Tutorial
Control Activated Macros
Using Controls
Let's run through an example of how to use the Window Controls. To begin, we first need to start the Windows calculator
program. To start Calculator, click on the Windows Start button and enter calculator in the search box. When found, click
on the file to open the calculator program. On older systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter calculator and click the
ok button. Leave the program running and return to Macro Express.
Selecting the Activation

We'll create a macro using a hotkey. From the Macro Express Explorer menu click on Macros | Add Macro to open the
Add Macro window. HotKey should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is
not in the edit box, click on the edit box to place the text cursor in this field.
Next, press the F3 key and release it. F3 should appear in the edit box and will be the hotkey used to run the macro.
Creating the Macro

We can choose to create the macro by entering the macro command directly, by using the scripting editor or capturing
the macro. For this exercise click on the Scripting Editor button to activate the Scripting Editor.
In the Scripting Editor first click on the Properties tab. In the Nickname box, enter "Clear Calculator". Then click on the
Scope tab and make sure Global is selected. Now click on the Script tab to return to the screen displayed above. Scroll
down the list of commands and click on the Window Controls command category to expand this listing. Double click on
the Get Control command found in this group to activate the Get Control window as shown below.
Select the Hide Macro Express option. Make sure that the Save Control In option is set to variable C1 and select Exact
Match. Now click on the Launch Get Control Utility button.
This activates the Capture Window Control screen and hides Macro Express. Now click on the target (crosshairs) at the
bottom of this window. Hold down the left mouse button and drag it over top of the "C" button on the calculator. Release
the mouse button. This should insert some information into the Capture Window Control. Class Name should read
"Button". Click the save button to save the information and return to the Get Control Window.
This window should have the information stored to the variable C1 as shown above. Click OK to save this command and
return to the Scripting Editor. Scroll down the list of commands and click on the Window Controls command to expand
this listing (if not already open). Double click on the Mouse Click on Control command to open the Mouse Click on Control
window.
In the General Tab, select Single Click, C1 as the variable and Left Button. This instructs the macro to perform a single
left mouse click on the variable C1, which we have defined as the "C" button on the Calculator. We can ignore the
Advanced Tab, so click OK to save your changes. This returns us to the Scripting Editor. The script should look like the
following:
Get Control %C1%
Mouse Single Left Click on Control %C1%
Click on File | Save to save the macro and return to the Macro Explorer. Our F3 macro with a nickname of Clear
Calculator should now be listed in this window.
Running the Macro

To test the macro, open the calculator window and enter some numbers into the calculator. With numbers displayed in
the Calculator edit box, press the F3 button. This simulates clicking on the C button of the calculator and clears the
display.
Capture Control
This will create a C-type variable (i.e. C1) that contains the information to use with other Window Control commands.
You can use this to get the control that currently has focus, is underneath the mouse cursor or at a specific location on
the screen. The control information is captured during playback of the macro.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > Capture Control
Beneath Mouse
During playback of the macro, this command will look to where the mouse cursor is pointed. The control that is
underneath the mouse cursor will be captured and saved to the variable you specify.
Control Focused
During playback of the macro, this command will recognize the control that has focus. The control information will be
captured and saved to the variable you specify.
Specific Coordinates
During playback of the macro, the mouse will move to the X and Y coordinates of the screen. The X coordinate
represents the number of pixels from the left edge of the screen. The Y coordinate represents the number of pixels the
mouse is positioned from the top of the screen. If necessary, click on the Mouse Locator to find the screen coordinates.
The control that exists beneath these coordinates will be captured. This control information is saved to the variable you
specify.
Capture using text

This is a way to make the capture of a control more specific. With this option selected the text that is in the control will
also be captured. So for example, if you capture an edit box with the word Test in it, the macro will be looking for the
specific edit box with the word Test. If during the playback of the macro the edit box is changed to something else, such
as Reset or left blank, then the control (C1) that was captured will not match the actual control in the window - edit box.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Get Control
This command will create a C type variable, such as C1, that contains the information to use with the other Window
Control commands. A capture utility is launched that allows you to select buttons, edit boxes, etc. that can be used later
in the macro.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > Get Control
Launch Get Control Utility

Below is an image of the window that appears when you launch the control utility. Essentially you just place the mouse
cursor on the crosshairs image, hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse over the control you want. You can
drag this over title bars, buttons, edit boxes, forms, toolbars, etc.
As you drag the mouse over these different controls, you'll see the Class Name and Window Text fields populated with
the corresponding information. Once you have selected the control you want, release the left mouse button. Click on the
Save button to return to the Get Control Window. The control information will be saved in the Get Control Window.
Get Control Using Text

This is a way to make the capture of a control more specific. With this option selected the text that is in the control
will also be captured. So for example, if you capture an edit box with the word Test in it, the macro will be looking
for the specific edit box with the word Test. If during the playback of the macro the edit box is changed to something
else, such as Reset or left blank, then the control (C1) that was captured will not match the actual control in the
window - edit box.
Display Details
This option displays a window that will show the details of the control that you have captured. See the Control
Details window shown below.
Display Control Info

This option displays a window that will show the details of the control that you have captured. The image below shows
the details for the Clear button on the MS Calculator program.
Hide Macro Express

With this option selected, Macro Express will hide once you press the Launch Get Control Utility. This makes it easier to
get to the application where you want to capture the control.
Save Control In
The control name and information is saved in a "C" variable. This variable can then be used with a number of other
control commands.
Control Class
This is the name assigned to the control you have captured.
Top Level Window Caption

This is what appears in the Windows Title of the application where you captured the control.
Partial Match
This allows the Control variable to find a Window Title that partially matches the name defined in the control.
Exact Match
This requires that the Control variable find the Window Title that matches exactly - letter for letter.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Post Message
The PostMessage command allows the user to send a Windows message to the specified control.
Note: This command is designed for experienced users of Windows messaging. We are unable to provide support for
explaining how Windows messages work, what are the various messages available and what they do, etc.
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > PostMessage
Use Constant Name

The user specifies an ini file containing a list of constant names and their values. The "Message to Post" field should
contain a constant name from this file.
An example would be the WM_LBUTTONDOWN message in the PostMessage.ini file. In the file, the following line
appears:
WM_LBUTTONDOWN=513
This means that when the user specifies WM_LBUTTONDOWN as the message, message 513 is actually sent.
Use Constant Value

The user specifies in the "Message to Post" field a message number to send to the specified control.
Offset from WM_USER

WM_USER is a Windows constant that marks the beginning of the messages that programmers can use for anything. In
this case, the user specifies either a positive or negative number that is added to WM_USER. Currently, Windows defines
WM_USER as 1024.
WParam - LParam
These fields allows the user to specify the WParam and LParam parameters. The contents of these parameters
depend upon the message being sent. These values can be found in the Platform API library at
http://msdn.microsoft.com.
Use RegisterWindowMessage
This command allows the user to enter a constant string that can be used by Windows to generate a message. This is
primarily used to communicate with other applications that have registered the same message.
Microsoft Definition of RegisterWindowMessage
The RegisterWindowMessage function defines a new window message that is guaranteed to be unique throughout the
system. The message value can be used when sending or posting messages.
The RegisterWindowMessage function is typically used to register messages for communicating between two cooperating
applications.
If two different applications register the same message string, the applications return the same message value. The
message remains registered until the session ends.
Only use RegisterWindowMessage when more than one application must process the same message. For sending private
messages within a window class, an application can use any integer in the range WM_USER through 0x7FFF.
Note: When Macro Express is installed, three .ini files ( PostMessage.ini, PostCommCtrl.ini and PostRichEdit.ini ) are also
installed into the Macro Express folder. The default path is C:\Program Files\MacExp3.0. These .ini files contain message
definitions that you can use for reference. Double click on the files to open and view in Notepad or Wordpad.
Additional Window Message Information

The following quotes from Microsoft provide additional information about Windows Messages.
"The system passes input to a window procedure in the form of messages. Messages are generated by both the system
and applications. The system generates a message at each input event for example, when the user types, moves the
mouse, or clicks a control such as a scroll bar. The system also generates messages in response to changes in the system
brought about by an application, such as when an application changes the pool of system font resources or resizes one of
its windows. An application can generate messages to direct its own windows to perform tasks or to communicate with
windows in other applications.
The system sends a message to a window procedure with a set of four parameters: a window handle, a message
identifier, and two values called message parameters. The window handle identifies the window for which the message is
intended. The system uses it to determine which window procedure should receive the message.
A message identifier is a named constant that identifies the purpose of a message. When a window procedure receives a
message, it uses a message identifier to determine how to process the message. For example, the message identifier
WM_PAINT tells the window procedure that the window's client area has changed and must be repainted.
Message parameters specify data or the location of data used by a window procedure when processing a message. The
meaning and value of the message parameters depend on the message. When a message does not use message
parameters, they are typically set to NULL. A window procedure must check the message identifier to determine how to
interpret the message parameters."
Note: Do not confuse the PostMessage command with the Windows SendMessage command. The Windows SendMessage
command allows several different types of data to be sent to an application. For example, a message parameter may
contain an integer, packed bit flags, a pointer to a structure containing additional data, and so on.
In addition, the SendMessage command allows a value to be returned to the program that sent the message. However,
the Macro Express PostMessage command is patterned after the Windows PostMessage command. PostMessage only
supports integer values in these parameters and does not support a returned value.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Set Focus
Scripting Editor > Window Controls > Set Focus
This is similar to the "Window Activate" command, but uses a control instead. It will bring the window that contains the
control you selected to the front and then set focus to the control. This is most useful for edit box controls because you
can then perform a Text Type command in the box. You would first need to use the Get Control or Capture
Control command to save the control to a "C" variable.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Variable Get Control Class
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Get Control Class
This command will place the class name of the control into a text string variable. In the example below, when you select
a control, a class name for the control is listed. In this image the class name is "Button" because the control captured
was a button. The class name of Button would be saved as a text string variable.
Variable Get Control Text
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Get Control Text
Variable Get Control Text

If the control exists on the system, this command sets a T-variable to the text contained in a control. This is useful for
edit boxes to determine what's currently in them.
In the example above we want to see what information has been saved to Variable C3. So we are copying the contents
to a Text variable, T2. To actually view the contents, you would then need to use a Text Box Display command. Insert
%T2% into the Box Content field. When playing back the macro, the message box will display and show what has been
saved to T2. Or you could open an application such as notepad and have the contents of T2 typed into the application.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Variable Modify Control
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Modify Control
Copy contents of control variable

This option simply copies the information saved to one control variable to another. In the example above, the contents of
variable C1 will be copied to variable C4. This may be useful if you want to retain the value of the original variable, but
also manipulate the value. You can make a copy of the variable and now do both.
Copy control from activation

This command can be used only if the macro is a Control Activated macro. It's possible that later in the macro you may
want to modify the control that activated the macro. Rather than use the Get Control function and capture the control
again, you can have the activation control saved to a "C" variable.
Modify top-level window title of Control Variable

When the Get Control or Capture Control commands are used, Macro Express saves a description of the Window Controls
in the control variable (C1). This information is used to identify the control. The information includes the name of the
program and the name of the top-level window that contains the control.
Note: The Modify Top-Level Window Title of Control Variable command modifies the content of a control variable. It
does not modify the control itself.
Many programs, including, but not limited to, Internet Explorer, will change the title of the top level window depending
on what is happening within the program. By using the Modify Top-Level Window Title command, you are able change
the Control Variable so you do not have to use the Get Control or Capture Control commands again.
Example
Let's say that you have a program that has Edit and View modes. When in Edit mode,
the title bar may say Edit Sample #5 and when in View mode, the title bar will show View
Sample #5. There is an OK button on this form.
If you are in Edit mode when the macro is created to access the OK button on the form,
the macro will not work when in View mode, even though it is the same control. There are
two choices. You can use two Get Control commands to capture the control in both Edit
and View modes. Or, you can use one Get Control command and use the Modify
Top-Level Window Title of Control Variable command to change the Window title.
When using controls, the top-level window is the main window that contains the control. This command allows the user
to adjust what window title the control will look for. For example, Internet Explorer changes its window title often. This
option allows the user to define one control variable and use it to work with different windows in order to perform actions
with the desired control.
Partial/Exact Matches
The window title can be either a partial or an exact match. For example, if there is a control in Internet Explorer that
you wish to use, despite what the window title is, you would use "Internet Explorer" as the window title and specify a
partial match.
Using the Partial Title option of the Modify Top-Level Window Title of Control Variable command you can modify the
window title (stored in the Control variable) to work with either Edit or View modes. In this example, you could set
the title to Sample #5. To make this even more flexible, you could change it to Sample # so it will work in Edit
and/or View modes and with all items in the database.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Variable Set Control Text
Scripting Editor > Variables > Variable Set Control Text
Variable Set Control Text

Getting a control is dependent upon what text is in the control. For example, if you used "Get Control" while building the
macro to capture an edit box, Macro Express will not be able to find the edit box if the text in it has changed. This
command allows you to change the text in the "C" variable in order to look for the control using different text.
For example, if we captured an edit box that had the word "Testing" in it and that word was changed to the word
"Macro" the macro would not find the edit box. But, if we knew that the edit box could contain the word "Macro" we
could use the Variable Set Control Text command to set our "C" variable to "macro" and then we could locate the edit
box if it has the word "macro" in it.
This command affects the Control Variable only. It does not affect the control in the application.
Note: Macro Express uses two different methods to identify a control. One method identifies the Class name of the
control and the Text contained in the control. For example you may have an OK button with a class name of Button and
the text will be "OK". The second method to identify the control is to use the Class name and something called the Z
index. Basically the Z index is the order that the control appears on the form. For example you may have two buttons,
"OK" and "Cancel". Macro Express will identify the OK button as class name Button and Z index of 12, but will identify the
Cancel button as class name Button and Z index 13.
So, the second method is the only one that you can use with the Variable Set Control Text. You select which method to
use when you capture a control. Leave the Capture Using Text option unchecked to capture using the Index method.
Related Topics
Control Overview
Controls Tutorial
Activate or Launch Programs

It is possible to switch to an active window in the middle of a macro and have the new window receive the keyboard
output of the macro. You can also launch a program in the middle of a macro. Four options are available for activating
windows or launching programs from within a macro.
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Activate Launch
Activate Window Only

This option instructs the macro to change to a specified window that is running on your computer. If the window is not
running on the computer, the macro will terminate. This option requires a windows title.
Launch Program Only

This option instructs the macro to launch a specified program that is located on your computer. If the program cannot be
found then the macro will terminate. This option will not necessarily display the program you run on top of other
programs that are running. You will need to use the next option below if you want to guarantee this action.
Launch Program and Activate Window

This option instructs the macro to launch a specific program that is located on your computer. Insert both the program
window title and the program name.
When the macro is run the program loads and the program window title is activated (given focus). If the program cannot
be found or the window title specified after the program is launched cannot be found, then the macro will terminate.
Activate Window if Running, Otherwise Launch Program and Activate Window

This option instructs the macro to change to a specified window that is running on your computer. If the window is not
running on the computer, then the specified program will be launched. If the program cannot be found or the window
title specified after the program is launched cannot be found, then the macro will terminate. This option requires the
window title and the program name.
Below are some of the options that may appear depending on the command selected.
Window Title
This is where you enter the title of the Window that you want to switch to. The window title is typically the text in
the caption bar of a window. Macro Express examines all window titles running on the computer in an attempt to
find a match.
The window title does not need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you wanted to
switch to the Windows Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful as some
window titles change based on whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required. For example, "NOTepad"
will work as well as "notepad".
Normal
Program Path/Name: This is where you enter the path and name of the program. You may optionally click on the
Button to the right of this field to search for the program desired. You may place any type of file extension that has
been defined on your computer as the Program Path/Name. As long as there is a file type association set up in
Windows for that particular file type, the corresponding program will be loaded and the document specified will be
loaded into it. For example, if you insert C:\My Documents\ test.doc in the file path, and .doc files are associated
with Microsoft Word, then Microsoft Word will start and load the file test.doc.
Run: You can choose to have the program launch and either maximize, minimize, hide or display the window as it
would normally at program launch. These options may not be available if the application you are launching does not
support them.
Program Parameters: Some programs can have values following the name of the program that can make the
program behave in a specified manner. These are called Program Parameters and can be set here if desired.
Advanced
Delay: The delay is the time to wait after executing the program and attempting to switch to the window specified in
the Window Title field. For many programs, this will simply be zero as no wait is required. For others, it may require
a second or two delay. A little experimenting may be required.
Max Seconds to Wait for Program to Activate: This specifies the maximum time the macro should wait for the
window title of the launched program to appear. Some programs may take a little while to load before the final
window appears that has the correct window title. The default value for this field is 12 seconds. This used to be a
value hard coded into the program. We have made it a user option because we have found that some larger
programs take longer than 12 seconds to load, especially on a fresh reboot of Windows where many common DLL's
have not yet been loaded.
If the time allotted is exceeded, Macro Express will come back with an error message indicating it could not find the
Window Title to activate the program. We simply could not let the wait be indefinite as the macro would be stuck
looking forever if an invalid Window Title was entered. If we had bumped the wait internally to something like 30
seconds, then it would be a full 30 seconds before you would be notified if you had keyed in an invalid Window Title.
We therefore felt it best to put this value into the hands of the user. When in doubt, use 12 seconds for this field
(the default).
If Program Fails to Launch in the Specified Time: You have three choices if the program or window does not
load within the time frame you designated. You can instruct the macro to terminate at this point. Or you can have
the macro continue even though the program or window did not load. The last option is to have a message pop up
asking you if you would like to cancel the macro or continue.
Set Window Order
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Set Window Order
This option allows you to place the window as the top most window or send it to the bottom of the list of windows open
on the screen. The Window Title does not need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you
wanted to size or position the Windows Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful
as some Window Titles change based on whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required. For example,
"NOTepad" will work as well as "notepad".
Current Window
This refers to the window that has focus when the Set Window Order command is run in the macro.
Specific Window
Enter the title of the specific window. Or click on the Browse button to see a list of all windows currently running.
Select the window you want and it will be inserted in the edit box.
Always on Top
This will set the window so that it is always on top. If you open other windows, the window you selected will still display
on top of all others.
Remove Topmost Status and Place on Top

If you had previously set the window to always be on top, this option will remove the always on top status and leave the
window on top of all others. Otherwise this option will place the window on top of all others, but not set the always on
top status.
Place on Bottom
This will send the window to the bottom of the list of windows open on your computer.
Size or Position a Window

Macro Express allows a window to be resized and repositioned on the Windows desktop. This allows you to set up
automated sequences for rearranging your windows on your desktop. If you are using mouse moves and clicks in your
macros, this is a good way to ensure that the windows that the mouse works in are in the same position and are the
same size each time the macro runs.
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Resize Window or Reposition Window
Resize Commands
Three options are available for changing the size of a window..
Specify Exact Size
This option will allow you to size the window to the scale that you want. A resize dimensions box will appear when
using this option. If you select the Value option, type in the sizes that you want the window to be. The values are
based on pixels. So if you type 500 in the width box and 400 in the height box, the window will be resized to a width
of 500 pixels and a height of 400 pixels. Or if you have saved decimal values to the N variable, then you can have
the window resized to the values of the variable(s).
Enlarge/Decrease in Pixels
This option allows you to enlarge or decrease the size of the window by a fixed number of pixels. If you select the
Value option, type in the number of pixels in the width and height boxes. Negative numbers (place a " -" sign before
the number) will decrease the size of the window. Positive numbers will increase the window size.
In the example above, a window size of width 500 and height 400 pixels, entering in values of width -100 and a
height of 200 will change the window size to width 400 and height 600 when the macro is run. Similarly, if you have
saved decimal values to the N variable, then you can have the window enlarged or contracted by the values of the
variables.
Enlarge/Decrease by Percentage
This option allows you to enlarge or decrease the size of the window proportionally, on a percentage basis. If you
select the Value option, enter the percentage values that you want the window size to increase or decrease. Negative
numbers (place a " -" sign before the number) will decrease the size of the window. Positive numbers will increase
the window size.
In the first example, a window size of width 500 and height 400 pixels, entering in values of width -10 and a height
of 25 will decrease the window width by 10% and increase the height by 25% when the macro is run. Similarly, if
you have saved decimal values to the N variable, then you can have the window enlarged or contracted by the
values of the variables.
Position Commands
Twelve options are available for repositioning a window on the desktop. Nine of these options are essentially
self-explanatory. Clicking on the Center of Screen option will place the window in the center of the screen. The Move to
Top Left command will move the window to the top left corner of the screen, etc. We'll discuss the other three choices
below.
Specify Exact Location
This option allows you to place the window anywhere on the screen based on the coordinates that you provide. If
you select the Value option, type in the coordinates for positioning the window. In the example window illustrated
above, the left edge of the window would be positioned 100 pixels to the right of the left side of the screen. The top
edge of the window would be positioned 100 pixels down from the top of the screen. If you have saved decimal
values to the N variable, then the window will move to the coordinates stored in the decimal variables.
Clicking on the Launch Mouse Locator button activates the Mouse Locator utility. This will allow you to obtain the
exact pixel coordinates. Hover the mouse pointer over the position you want and the coordinates will be listed in
the Mouse Locator. Use the screen position coordinates for this command.
If this window pops up in an area of your screen that covers important data, click on the window, hold the left
mouse button down on the blue bar at the top of the window and drag to another area of your screen.
Move in Pixels
This option allows you to move the window by a fixed number of pixels. If you select the Value option, type in the
number of pixels in the left and top boxes. Negative numbers (place a " -" sign before the number) will move the
window to the left or up. Positive numbers will move the window to the right or down.
Take the example of a window already positioned at left 400 and top 500. The left edge of the window is 400 pixels
from the left edge of the screen and the top of the window is 500 pixels down from the top of the screen. If we put
in the coordinates of left -150 and top 250, the window would move to the following coordinates - left 250, top 750.
Now the left edge of the window is only 250 pixels from the left edge of the screen while the top edge of the window
is now 750 pixels from the top of the screen. If you have saved decimal values to the N variable, then the window
will move the number of pixels that are stored in the decimal variable values.
Move by Percentage
This option allows you to move the window proportionally, on a percentage basis. If you select the Value option,
enter the percentage values that you want the window to move. Negative numbers (place a " -" sign before the
number) will move the window to the left or up. Positive numbers will move the window to the right or down.
Take the example of a window already positioned at left 400 and top 500. The left edge of the window is 400 pixels
from the left edge of the screen and the top of the window is 500 pixels down from the top of the screen. If we put
in the coordinates of left -10 and top 25, the window would move 10% of the available distance to the left and 25%
of the available distance up towards the top of the screen. If you have saved decimal values to the N variable, then
the window will move proportionally, based on the values stored in the decimal variables.
Window
This option allows you to choose the window that you want to size or position on the screen. The Window Title does not
need to be an exact match. A partial match will work. For example, if you wanted to size or position the Windows
Notepad program, you could use "notepad" or "notep". This is particularly useful as some Window Titles change based on
whether a given file is open. Case sensitivity is not required. For example, "NOTepad" will work as well as "notepad".
Current Window
This refers to the window that has focus when the size or position command is run in the macro.
Specific Window
Enter the title of the specific window that the sizing and positioning will work with. Or click on the Select Window
button to see a list of all windows currently running. Select the window you want and it will be inserted in the edit
box.
Terminate Process
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Terminate Process
These two options are alternative ways to have a macro close a window or program. The other options are part of the
Window Commands set of commands. The Terminate Process command goes through several routines to make sure that
the window or program is completely closed.
Close Window
Insert the name of the window you want to close. Or click on the button to get a list of windows currently open on your
computer.
Exact Match - This requires that the window name you enter matches exactly with the name of the window that you
are trying to close. For example, if you inserted Notepad as the window name, but the actual window you were
trying to close was Notepad - Untitled, then the macro would not close the window.
Close Program
Insert the program file name (normally .exe file) that you want to close. Or click on the button and select the program
name from the list of programs currently running on your computer. There is an optional button to retrieve the file names
of all programs installed on your computer. This command is especially useful for closing applications that may run in the
System Tray and not have windows to close.
Timeout After:
This option uses several methods to attempt to close the window or program. The Timeout After setting determines how
long Macro Express waits before trying the next method.
Window Commands
Macro Express allows you to manipulate Windows that are running on your desktop.
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Select Option
Commands
Maximize Window
This instructs a window to be resized so that it fills the entire screen.
Minimize Window
This instructs the window to shrink down to a button on the Task Bar.
Restore Window
This instructs a window to be resized to its original size before a maximize or minimize command was issued.
Close Window
This instructs a window to be closed. If the window happens to be the main window of a program, this will have the net
result of shutting the program down.
Hide Window
This instructs a window to be hidden from the screen. It will still be running, but it will be invisible. You will not be able to
see it again until you use the "Show Window" command to display the window.
Show Window
This instructs a window to be shown when it has been hidden. It will normally bring the Window to the front of the
screen. If you want to bring a Window to the top of the screen, then you should use the "Activate Window" macro
option.
Shut Down Program
This will shut down a program based on the window title name. While the Close Window can be used to shut down a
program if the window specified is the main window, this option will shut the program down no matter what window in
the program is specified.
Note: Another option for closing programs is the Terminate Process command. This option will also close applications
where you may not ever see a window title, such as applications on the System Tray that run in the background.
Window
Current Window vs. Specific Window
For each of the above commands, you can specify the Window Title of the window that you would like the action to take
place on. The window title can be a partial match. If you would like the action to take place on whatever window is active
when the macro is run, then choose the "Current Window" option. Otherwise you can enter the name of the window title
when using the Specific Window option.
Note: For any of these Window Commands you can click on the Select Window button to get a list of all Windows
currently running on your computer. Highlight the window you want and click on the OK button to insert this as your
Window Title selection.
Window Move and Size

The Window Move and Size command provides an easy method for sizing and positioning a window on the screen. Set up
automated sequences for rearranging windows on the desktop. Or standardize the window position and size during each
macro run to ensure that mouse moves and clicks work correctly.
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Window Move and Size
Window
Current Window
This refers to the window that has focus when the Window Move and Size command runs.
Specific Window
Enter the title of the specific window to be moved and resized. Or click on the Select Window button to see a list of all
windows currently running. Select the window needed and the title is inserted in the edit box.
Coordinates
Specify Exact Size
Enter the coordinates directly into the edit box. The Left and Top options determine the location of the window. The
Height and Width options determine the size of the window. The values are expressed in pixels.
Coordinates Example
Left Top Height Width -
100
200
750
850
Consider the above example coordinates:

1. The left edge of the window is positioned 100 pixels to the right of the left edge of the
screen.
2. The top edge of the window is positioned 200 pixels down from the top of the screen.
3. The window is sized at 750 pixels tall and 850 pixels wide.
Launch Size/Position Tool

Use the Launch Size/Position Tool for a simple way to select the size and position of the window. Clicking on this button
opens the Window Tool window. Stretch this window to the size needed and drag to the location desired. Click ok to
save. The pixel coordinates are automatically filled out.
When the macro is run, the window selected in the Window Title field is moved and sized to the same location and
dimensions as drawn in the Window Tool window.
Scripting Editor > Windows/Programs > Window Move and Size > Launch Size/Position Tool
Capture Macro - Introduction

The simplest type macro to make is a recorded macro. The macro will record each keystroke, mouse click or mouse
movement that you make. After saving the macro, play back the macro and watch it repeat each of the steps that you
just recorded. If you made a mistake in the recording, you can either re-record the macro or edit the macro with the
Scripting Editor or Direct Editor.
The first thing you will need to do before capturing a macro is to select some capture options, such as whether to record
mouse movements, playback speed, base mouse position relative to the position of the window or entire screen, etc. Use
the Options | Preferences | Capture menu to define your default capture settings.
Each time you begin a capture, the options you have selected will be set as the default values. If you need to change one
of the settings for the particular type of capture you are doing, it should be done before the capture starts.
There are three different ways to initiate a macro capture. Examples for two of these methods is explained in the
Tutorial. These examples are also displayed in this section so that you can try a sample capture using each of these
methods.
1) Assign Macro Activation First - Click on the Capture Icon or click on Macros | Add Macros and select the Capture
button option. This method requires you to select the macro activation and review or change the default capture
options before starting the capture.
2) Assign Macro Activation After Capture - The second method uses the System HotKey, Ctrl Alt Shift X. While in
another application, you can press the System HotKey to begin capturing a macro in that application. This
method uses the capture default settings that were defined in the Preferences section. When the capture is
complete, you will be asked to assign a macro activation.
3) Capture Quick Wizard - This process steps you through the settings you would like to make for the capture. Then
the capture process begins.
Note: Scheduled macros will not start while you are capturing a macro.
Capture Settings
Macro Express allows you to record macros. It does this by capturing what you do and saving this information for later
playback as a macro. Options are available to determine what you want to capture and how much. You can optionally
capture keystrokes, mouse movements and clicks and actual time between actions.
There are three methods for starting a macro recording. One is to select the activation (hotkey, shortkey, etc.) you wish
to assign to the macro before recording. Another is to select this information after recording the macro. The last option is
to use the Capture Quick Wizard.
Macro Express Explorer > Options > Preferences > Capture
When running Macro Express, you will note that there are six hotkeys automatically assigned. These six hotkeys are
System hotkeys (Scope indicates SYSTEM). One of these System hotkeys is called Start / Stop Capture and is defined as
CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X by default. Pressing CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X will start the recording of a macro and pressing it a
second time will stop the recording. The actual hotkey used here can be changed to anything available in Macro Express
(i.e. you can make ALT+F1 be the Start / Stop Capture hotkey).
When the recording stops, a Capture Complete window opens allowing you to assign what you have captured to a
hotkey, ShortKey or other activation. While recording, a "movie camera" icon appears in the Windows system tray to
indicate that you are recording. You can also right click on this icon to stop recording. To not have the camera display, go
to Options | Preferences | Appearance.
Before recording a macro using this System hotkey, you want to make sure that the default settings have been defined.
Select Options | Preferences | Capture from the Macro Explorer to define your capture settings. These are the default
settings when the System Start / Stop Capture hotkey is used. These are also the default settings that appear when
doing a macro recording by assigning a hotkey first.
Scope
Capture Keystrokes
Record all keystrokes made during the capture process.

Use of the <ALT> key may not always work properly for activating menu commands in certain programs. (Example:
used. (Example: "<ALT><ALT>f") Selecting this option will capture a double <ALT> whenever the ALT key is pressed.
You would want to use this option if you are going to be capturing keystroke commands that activate window menus.

Record all mouse clicks and movements made during the capture process. You have several mouse options to choose
from.
monitor.
using.
Relative to Position option captures the mouse clicks or movements based on the last position of the mouse cursor.

be recorded.
Capture At
This option refers to how fast the macro will play back in relation to your recording speed.
Actual Speed - Play back at the same speed that you recorded the macro. Any hesitations, etc. will play at the
same speed as you recorded.
Half Speed - Slow down the macro playback to half of the recording speed.
Double Speed - Speed up the macro playback to twice the actual recording speed.
Quadruple Speed - Speed up the macro playback to four times the actual recording speed.
Fastest Speed (no delays) - Play back the macro with no hesitations, delays, etc. Remove the check next to the
Capture At box to select this option. Caution: Selecting this option may cause the macro to play back too fast
and throw off the timing of the macro.
Prompt on Capture
Display a prompt message to indicate that the capture is starting.
Capture a Macro
Macro Express Explorer > Capture Icon > Select Activation > Capture Macro Button
This option requires that you define your macro activation and other information before you begin recording your
keystrokes and mouse moves. There is another option that allows you to record first and then assign macro information
after the capture. The third capture option is to use the Quick Wizards.
Macro Information
Nickname
Optionally assign a nickname to the macro to help you later identify what the macro does.
Scope
Capture Settings
These settings default to what you have defined in the Options | Preferences | Capture settings. You may override the
defaults for this capture by changing any of the settings listed here.
Capture Keystrokes
A check placed in this option will record all keystrokes made during the capture process.
Use of the <ALT> key does not always work properly for activating menu commands. (Example: "<ALT>f" for activating
the file menu command). To ensure that a menu command will always work, a double <ALT> is used. (Example:
"<ALT><ALT>f") Selecting this option will capture a double <ALT> whenever the ALT key is pressed. You would want to
use this option if you are going to be capturing keystroke commands that activate window menus.
A check placed in this option will record all mouse clicks and movements made during the capture process. You have
several mouse options to choose from.
monitor.
using.
Relative to Position option captures the mouse clicks or movements based on the last position of the mouse
cursor.
be recorded.
Capture At
This option actually refers to how fast the macro will play back in relation to your recording speed.
Actual Speed - This will play back at the same speed that you recorded the macro. Any hesitations, etc. will
play at the same speed as you recorded.
Half Speed - This will slow down the macro playback to half of the recording speed.
Double Speed - This will speed up the macro playback to twice the actual recording speed.
Quadruple Speed - This will speed up the macro playback to four times the actual recording speed.
Fastest Speed (no delays) - This will play back the macro with no hesitations, delays, etc. Remove the check
next to the Capture At box to select this option. Caution: Selecting this option may cause the macro to play back
too fast and throw off the timing of the macro.
Program to Start Capturing In
This is the program in which you will start recording your macro. Click on the button to the right of the edit field for a list
of programs currently running. Once you press the Start Capture button, the program you selected will be brought to
the foreground so that you can begin capturing.
Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey First

In this tutorial we will capture the macro in the Windows Paint program. To start we first need to run the Windows Paint
program. To do so, click on the Windows Start button and enter mspaint.exe in the search box. When found, click on the
file to open the Paint program. On older systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter "mspaint" and click the ok button.
Once Paint is running, we want to switch directly to Macro Express. If you are running Macro Express in the system tray,
left click on the Macro Express icon in the system tray; otherwise, click on Macro Express in the taskbar.
Assign a Macro Activation

From the Macro Express Explorer window click on Macros | Add Macro or click on the Capture icon. The Add Macro opens
as shown below.
The HotKey option should already be selected and the blinking cursor should be in the edit box. If the cursor is not in the
edit box, click on the edit box to place the text cursor there. Next, hold down the SHIFT key, the CTRL key and the Z key
all at the same time and release them. CTRL+SHIFT+Z should appear in the edit box. This is the hotkey we will be
assigned to the macro we record.
Capture Settings
Next click on the Capture Macro to open the capture settings window.
A number of capture options are available depending on what you are needing to capture. Default settings for each of
these options may be set in the Capture preferences panel. Those defaults would display in this window each time you
started a capture. They may be temporarily overwritten as needed for each individual capture, which we will do now for
this capture.
1. Enter My Paint Drawing in the Nickname field.
2. Select the scope setting of Program. This indicates that the recorded macro will only play back in the program we
record it in.
option is checked.
be unchecked.
7. We want to start capturing the macro inside of the Paint program. Under Choose the program to start capturing in,
we want to select the Paint program. It should display in the dropdown list as "untitled - Paint".
Capturing the Macro

With all settings in place, click on the Start Capture button which will minimize the Macro Express window. The last
program running prior to Macro Express should appear, which is the Paint program.
When the masterpiece is complete press the hotkey we assigned to the macro - CTRL+SHIFT+Z. A dialog appears that
the capture is complete.
Running the Macro

Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey Last

When running Macro Express, you will note that there are five hotkeys automatically assigned and displayed in the Macro
Explorer. These five hotkeys are System Macros (Scope indicates System). One of these System Macros is called Start /
Stop Capture and by default is defined as CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. Pressing CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X will start the recording of
a macro and pressing it a second time will stop the recording. This hotkey combination may be changed to another
available in Macro Express.
Capture Settings
Before we record any macros using this System hotkey, we want to make sure we have our default settings in place.
From the Macro Explorer click on Options | Preferences and select Capture to display the Capture default settings as
shown below.
These are the settings that are used when the System Start / Stop Capture hotkey function is invoked. These are also the
default settings that appear when doing a macro recording by Assigning HotKey First (see prior example) or when using
the Capture Quick Wizard.
1. Select the Scope setting of Program. This indicates that the recorded macro will only play back in the program we
record it in.
option is checked.
be unchecked.
6. Select the Prompt on Capture option which will display a message indicating that the capture is starting.
Click on the OK button to save the defaults. We are now ready to record.
An important thing to remember when recording a macro is to make sure that the program you plan to start recording in
is active and on top.
Our example recording will be in the Windows Paint program. To start the Windows Paint program, click on the Windows
Start button and enter mspaint.exe in the search box. When found, click on the file to open the Paint program. On older
systems, click on Start and then Run. Enter mspaint and click the ok button.
Capturing the Macro

With the Paint program open and on top, press CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. A notice may appear warning about the use of the
ALT key. Click OK. Then a notice appears stating that the macro is about to start recording. Click the OK button to start
the capture.
When the masterpiece is complete, terminate the macro capture by pressing the same SYSTEM hotkey we started with,
CTRL+ALT+SHIFT+X. This action open the Capture Complete window as shown below.
Assigning Macro Activation

At this point we assign a hotkey or another type of macro activation to the macro we just recorded. We also give the
macro a nickname and we can also override the Scope default setting at this point.
1. Enter My Paint Drawing #2 in the Nickname field.
2. Make sure Program is still selected as the Scope.
3. Select HotKey as the Default Activation. Now move the cursor to the hotkey edit window, press CTRL+SHIFT+S and
release. CTRL+SHIFT+S should appear in the edit box. Click on the Save button and the capture process is complete.
Running the Macro

Tutorial - Quick Wizard Capture

Using the Quick Wizards may simplify the process of creating a macro. The wizard prompts you step by step through the
creation of a macro. In this tutorial well create a message to pop up at a specific time to remind us of a task that needs
to be done.
Well start by clicking on the Quick Wizards icon to open the wizard welcome page.
1. This page displays types of macros that can be created using Quick Wizards. To create a reminder, select Text and
click on the Next button.
2. Choose the Create a Reminder option and click on Next to proceed.
3. This panel shows a few things that can be done with the Reminders. Click next to continue.
4. Enter a reminder message into the edit field. We can also choose to have a sound play back to alert us of the
message. For this example well just use the beep sound.
Also select the Delete this macro after displaying the reminder option to delete the macro after it runs. In this example
the message is to only be displayed once, rather than on a recurring schedule. So we want the macro deleted. Its
simpler than remembering later to manually delete the macro.
Click next and now well set the schedule for the macro.
5. We only want it to play back one time, so select the Once schedule option. Set it to run a couple of minutes from now
so that you can see it run. Click next to continue.
6. Now we need to assign a Nickname to the macro. Enter a nickname to help remember what the macro does. Then
click the Finish button to return to the Macro Explorer window. Our quick wizard macro is now listed as a Scheduled
macro.
7. The last step is to wait for the reminder message macro to run at the time you scheduled.
Quick Wizards
The Quick Wizards are a convenient way to guide you through the macro creation process. The steps are essentially the
same for each of the wizards and are basically self explanatory. We'll briefly discuss the basic steps that the wizard
guides you through.
Wizard Steps
1. Select the category or type of macro that you want to create and then click on the Next button.
2. The second step asks you to select the specific type of macro that you want to create. Click Next to advance.
3. A window will appear listing the functions of the wizard you have selected as well as giving some examples of
macros you can create with this wizard. Click Next to advance to the next screen.
4. Depending on the wizard selected, you will be asked what you would like to do with the macro or you will be
given instructions to begin building the macro. Input the necessary information and click next to proceed.
5. After entering the necessary information for the macro, you are asked to select a method for executing the
macro - hotkey, scheduled macro, etc. Select your choice and click Next.
6. You are then asked to define if the macro will play back in all programs, a single program or only in a specific
window. Click Next to proceed.
7. Give the macro a nickname and optionally assign an icon with your macro.
8. Click Finish and the macro has been completed.
These are the basic steps of the Wizard. Depending on which wizard you select there may be several additional steps,
each of which is self explanatory. You may click Cancel to exit out of the Wizard at any time. Each step has a cancel
button if you decide you don't want to proceed. You can also backtrack to make any changes by clicking on the Back
button.
The Wizards have been divided into categories based on their functionality. Each of the links below will lead to brief
explanations of each of the wizards and some of the types of macros that can be created. The Tutorial section includes
an example of creating a macro with the Wizard.
Text Wizards
Create a Reminder
Create a reminder to be displayed at a specific time.
Remind
Remind
Remind
Remind
yourself
yourself
yourself
yourself
of
of
of
of
an appointment or meeting.
birthdays or anniversaries
a chore
an upcoming event
Paste Text and Graphics

Have Text or Graphic images pasted into your programs automatically.
Insert commonly used phrases, paragraphs or boilerplate into your Word Processor, E-Mail and other programs such as:
Answers to frequently asked questions
Sales quotes
Legal, Medical, Real Estate, etc documents
Insert graphic images into your documents.
Type Date or Time

Type the current, future or past date or time into your programs.
Time stamp your documents with today's date and time
Date and time stamp your email
Place yesterday's or tomorrow's date into your document
Type a Symbol
Place an international character or a symbol in your programs.
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
Insert
Western European Language characters including and more

Western European Language punctuation such as
Math Symbols such as
Currency Symbols such as $
Legal Symbols such as
Type Text or Keystrokes

Have Text, Keystrokes and Symbols typed into your programs automatically.
Insert commonly used phrases into your Word Processor, E-Mail and other programs such as:
Name, Address, Phone
Headers & Footers
E-Mail Taglines
Insert common keystrokes such as tabs or ALT commands to invoke menu options.
Internet and Networking Wizards

Send Email
Send Email and attachments to one or more recipients.
Send
Send
Send
Send
a set of instructions to a user. Prompt for user.

a message to a specific set of friends or associates. Prompt for message.
favorite pictures or other attachments.
data captured in the clipboard.
Go to a Web Page
Go to a web site or initiate an ftp download.
Go to your favorite web site.
Download the latest version of a software program
Connect Network
Connect, Disconnect or Toggle Network drives.
Access the network server or another computer
Make network connections temporary
Bypass Network Neighborhood
Web Sweepstakes
Enter sweepstakes on the Internet.
Automatically fill out a sweepstakes form on the Internet
Potentially win free prizes
Dial-Up Networking
Connect and Disconnect to the Internet and other computers using Dial-Up Networking.
Quick one keystroke access to dialing up the Internet and hanging up the phone
Macro Wizards
Capture a Macro
Capture all mouse clicks, movements and key presses into a macro.
Capture a repetitive set of commands
Capture pressing buttons on forms
Capture a drawing in a paint program
Create Menu of Macros

Build a popup menu of macros.
Group all your common macros into one menu
Activate the menu with a hotkey, shortkey or system tray icon
Display menu as a set of icons, macro names, or first part of macro contents
Build from Other Macros

Build a macro from other macros.
Combine macros together to perform lengthy operations
Multimedia Wizards
Play Audio CD-ROM
Play an Audio CD.
Play your favorite music CDs
Pause your CD to answer the phone
Repeat a favorite song (go to previous, next or specific track)
Open and close CD Tray
Play a Video Clip

Play a Video Clip.
Display and watch a favorite video clip
Sounds and Volume

Play a sound or set audio volume, treble and bass controls.
Play an audio clip to alert you of an event
Adjust volume down or up depending on music being played
Mute the volume when on the phone
Adjust treble and bass volume depending on music being played
System and Files Wizard

Launch or Activate Programs
Launch a program or a document. Or switch to a program that is already running.
Switch to your E-Mail program if it is running; otherwise, launch and run it.
Open a Word Document
Open a spreadsheet document
Launch your database program
Reboot or Shut Down

Logoff, Reboot or Shut Down your computer.
Bypass explorer, task manager, etc.
Shut down and power off with a single command
Copy, Delete, Rename

Copy, Delete, Rename Files. Change current folder.
Backup files
Delete temporary files
Change folder prior to using an open dialog box
Set Display Resolution

Change the display resolution.
Maintain screen resolution preferences among multiple users
Develop presentations or html that is optimized for all screen resolutions
View graphics in high color resolutions
Maintain multiple settings for laptop and desktop
Choose a Printer
Choose a Default Printer.
Switch between color and non color printers
Maintain printer preferences among multiple users
Quickly fax documents
Change Desktop Wallpaper

Change the desktop wallpaper.
Place your favorite images on the desktop
Place a family picture on the desktop
Tile the image (multiple copies spread over the desktop)
Stretch, Center or Position the image on the desktop
Move or Size a Window

Resize or Position a Window.
Automatically position windows where you want them
Resize windows to allow perfect alignment of Windows
Position the top most window in the center, top corner or where ever you want.
Maximize, Minimize Windows

Maximize, Minimize, Restore, Hide, Close Windows.
Maximize or Minimize the Top Most Window with a keystroke
Temporarily hide windows and then restore (unhide) them when needed
Shut down the Top Most program with a keystroke.
Open an Explorer Folder

Open up an Explorer Folder.
Go directly to a specified folder in Explorer
Clean up your cookie folder
Clean up your temp folder
Rearrange your start menu folders
Desktop Goodies
Cascade, Tile, Minimize or Restore All Windows. Undock and suspend computer.
Quickly unclutter your desktop
Align all windows on your desktop with a keystroke
Undock your computer from a docking station by pressing a key
Screen Saver Options

Set Screen Saver Settings.
Deactivate (set to "none") your screen saver with a keystroke
Change the screen saver activation time
Turn on your screen saver instantly
Run Control Panel

Open up the Control Panel or run a Control Panel applet.
Quickly
Quickly
Quickly
Quickly
Quickly
go
go
go
go
go
directly
directly
directly
directly
directly
to
to
to
to
to
Internet Settings to make changes.

Display properties to make changes.
Network Options to make changes.
System Properties to make changes.
Accessibility Options to make changes.
Building Popup and Floating Menus
Macro Express Explorer > Macro > Add Macro > Floating Menu or Popup Menu
The Build Macro Menu lets you create popup menus or floating menus of your most frequently used macros or any other
combination of macros that you want. The completed popup menu can be activated by pressing a hotkey of your choice
or designating a system tray icon. The floating menu always stays on top of the desktop, allowing easy access to the
macros in your menu.
Available Macros
The available macros section displays all macros available to place in the menu. To add a macro in the menu, highlight
the macro to include and click on one of the two insert buttons or the add button. This places the macro in the Macros in
Menu section and is now part of the menu.
Insert the macro above or before the macro that is highlighted in the Macros in Menu section. If you do not have
a macro highlighted from this column, the macro will be placed as the first or uppermost macro in the list.
Insert the macro below or after the macro that is highlighted in the Macros in Menu section. If you do not have a
macro highlighted from this column, the macro will be placed below or after the first or uppermost macro in the list.
Insert the macro as the last item in the list or below all other items.
Highlight an item in the menu and click on the Remove button to remove the macro from the menu.
Macros in Menu
This section lists all macros included as part of the popup or floating menu. This is the order that they will be displayed in
the popup menu or the floating toolbar. To rearrange the order, highlight the macro you want to move and then click on
the Up or Down buttons. The highlighted macro will be moved up or down in the list depending on the button you
selected.
To remove a macro from the menu, highlight the macro and click on the Remove button. The macro will be removed
from the Macros in Menu list and returned to the Available Macros list. This macro can now be assigned to another menu,
left alone or returned to the popup or floating menu at a later date.
Note: There is a limit of 36 macros that can be placed in a single Popup or Floating menu. You may create multiple
popup menus, but only one menu may be activated at a time.
Floating Menu Hint: If you somehow happen to drag the floating menu far enough off the edge of the screen so that
you cannot drag it back into position, here is how you can correct this problem. From the Macro Explorer, find the
Floating Menu macro and double click on it to open the Floating Menu Builder. Click on the Properties Tab and uncheck
the Active box. Click on the Save icon. Then go back and place a check next to the Active box. Click on Save. This will
restore the Floating menu so that it is visible on the screen again. It places it at the 0,0 screen coordinates in the upper
left hand corner.
Menu Builder Properties
Nickname
In the edit box to the right of Nickname, you can type in a name that will help you identify the popup menu or floating
menu. This field will hold up to 50 characters and will be displayed on the Main menu in the nickname column. If you do
not want to name this menu you can leave the field blank.
Icon
You can associate an icon with this menu. Click on the Change button to display the Select an Icon window. This
window displays the icon currently assigned to the or menu. If no icon has previously been selected, then the default
Macro Express icon is displayed as the current icon.
To change the current icon, click on the Browse button in the Select an Icon window to display libraries of icons to
choose from. Highlight the icon that you want and click on the OK button to load in the icon. Or you can browse through
your system to load in icons from another source. The primary use of this icon is to display it in the System Tray with a
popup menu. A left click on the icon in the System Tray opens the menu.
Active
This check box shows the status of the macro. With the box checked, the macro (menu) is active and will run. With the
box not checked, the macro (menu) has been deactivated and will not run.
Place in System Tray

This option is only available for the popup menu. If you have this item checked, the icon you associated with your popup
menu will be placed in the system tray - on the bottom right of your screen near the clock. Clicking on the icon will
display the list of macros in your popup menu. Note: If this option is selected, the scope of the menu will be set to
Global.
X, Y
Enter the X and Y screen coordinates where you would like the popup menu to display on your screen. The default is to
display in the upper left hand corner of the screen with coordinates of 0,0.
How To Display Menu

You can select what information to have displayed in the popup window. To help you more readily identify your macros
placed in the popup menu, you can have the macro information displayed in several different ways - Icons Only, First
Part of the Macro, Nickname and Scope and Windows Default. Clicking on each of these options will display a sample
menu to show you what each type of menu looks like.
Icons only
This option will just display the icon that is associated with each macro. Select from the drop down menu the size that
you want the icons to appear in the popup window. The sizes are listed in pixels. The icon size options are 16x16, 24x24,
32x32, 48x48, and 64x64 pixels.
Horizontal - Select Horizontal if you want the icons displayed in rows.

Vertical - Select Vertical if you prefer the icons be displayed in columns.
Maximum Items Per Row/Column - With this option you can select how many icons to place in each column
or row. The maximum number of icons that can be displayed in a single row or column is 20.
Double click on the icon to run the macro associated with that icon.
First Part of the Macro
With this option the menu will display the first few words or commands of the macro script. When the popup window
appears, either double click on the macro or press the number or letter associated with the macro to have it play back.
Nickname and Scope
The menu will display the name you have assigned to the macro and the macro scope, such as a global, or program or
window specific macro. When the popup window appears, either double click on the macro or press the number or letter
associated with the macro to have it play back.
Windows Default
The Windows Default menu displays the icon associated with the macro and the macro nickname. Click on the macro to
have it play back. When possible, Windows will also assign accelerator keys to each of the macros. So in the example
above, pressing the M key will activate the My Address macro. Pressing the Y key runs the My Address macro.
Use HotKey Activation

Select this option if you want to assign a hotkey to the popup menu or to change the hotkey already assigned to another
combination. After checking this option, click on the Set HotKey button to activate the Set HotKey Activation window and
assign the hotkey.
Note: If you opt to have the macro displayed in the system tray, the scope is automatically Global. The icon in the
system tray will display regardless of which program or window you have open. It will behave as a global macro. If you
have also assigned a hotkey to your popup menu, you can assign the hotkey to a scope.
For example, let's say you have selected a popup menu icon to display in the System Tray. You have also assigned a
hotkey (CTRL Q) to the popup menu. In the scope tab you selected Program Specific with the menu to only work with
Wordpad. So if Wordpad is active and you press CTRL Q, the popup menu appears. If Notepad is open and Wordpad is
closed, the menu will not open after pressing CTRL Q. But since you also selected to display an icon in the system tray,
click on the icon to open the menu, no matter what program you have open. If displayed in the System Tray, it is always
a global menu.
Menu Builder Scope
Note: If you opt to have the macro displayed in the system tray, the scope is automatically Global. The icon in the
system tray will display regardless of which program or window you have open. It will behave as a global macro. If you
have also assigned a hotkey to your popup menu, you can assign the hotkey to a scope.
Let's look at an example. In our example, we'll say you have selected a popup menu icon to display in the System Tray.
But you have also assigned a hotkey (CTRL Q) to the popup menu. For the scope you select Program Specific and select
the menu to only work with Wordpad. So if you have Wordpad active and you press CTRL Q, the popup menu appears. If
you have Notepad open and press CTRL Q, nothing happens. But since you also selected to display an icon in the system
tray, this icon will be available to use, by right clicking on it, no matter what program you have open. If displayed in the
System Tray, it is always a global menu.
Global
With this option selected, a macro (menu) will play back in any Windows application.
Global Except
This option will allow the macro (menu) to play back in all Windows applications, except the one program you select.
Click on the Select button to activate the Select Programs window. Then you can specify the program that will not accept
your macro.
Select Program(s)
Selected Program(s)
Run if on Top
button.
Window Specific
A window specific macro (menu) will only execute in the window that you designate. If the window is not active the
macro will not play back. To choose this option, click on the Select button to activate the Select Windows screen. Then
specify the window that will accept your macro.
Window Title
You can view and look at all windows that are currently running on your computer. If the window you want is
currently running, you can scroll through the list to find it. Click on the window title you want to place it in the list of
acceptable windows in the right hand column. You may add more than one window to have the macro play back in.
Selected Window(s)
In this field you can type in the name of the Window title and press the Add button to have the title added to the list
of windows that will work with the macro.
Run Macro if Window on Top
This option will play the macro back only if the window is the current top-most window (the one that is showing on
Exact Match
This option requires that the Window title match exactly before the macro will play back. With this option not
checked, partial matches will work. For example, "notep" would be sufficient to find the "notepad" window.
To remove a window title from your list, highlight the title located in the right hand column and click on the Remove
button.
Program Specific
A program specific macro (menu) will only execute in the program that you designate. If the program is not active the
macro (menu) will not play back. To choose the program specific option, click on the Select button to activate the Select
Programs window. Then specify the program that will accept your macro.
Select Program(s)
Selected Program(s)
Run if on Top
button.
Note: Since specific programs may be assigned to a hotkey, it is possible to assign the same hotkey to multiple
programs. You will only be able to assign one Global Macro to any given hotkey.
Menu Builder Notes

From the Macro Explorer, locate an already created Popup Menu in your list of Macros. Double click on the menu to open
the Menu Builder. Then click on the Notes tab.
This tab opens the Notes field. This is a free form text editor for you to keep notes about the popup menu. You may
want to make some notes about what the menu does, when to use it, what it contains, etc. Essentially this field can be
used to input any information about the menu that you want to track.
Icons
You may optionally assign an icon to each macro or popup menu you create. The icon assigned to the popup menu is
displayed in the System Tray. Clicking on the icon opens the menu so you can select the macro you want to play back.
Macro Express allows you to place macros on Windows desktop. The icon assigned to the macro is placed on the
desktop. Click on the icon to run the macro. Or assign icons to each individual macro to use with popup and
floating menus. One of the menu display options just shows the icons for each macro. Click on the icon in the menu to
run the macro.
Macro Icons or Popup Icons

The "Select an Icon" window (as shown above) may be activated from the Properties Tab of the Scripting Editor or Direct
Editor. Click on the Change button located next to the displayed icon. If using an icon for a popup menu, click on the
Change button in the Properties Tab of the Popup Menu Builder. This window displays the icon currently assigned to your
macro or menu.
If no icon has previously been selected, then the default Macro Express icon is displayed as the current icon. To change
the current icon, click on the Browse button to open the Choose an Icon File window as shown below.
You can select from over several hundred different icons supplied with the program. Or you can browse through your
drives to find other icons or icon libraries located elsewhere on the computer. Highlight the icon you want and then click
the Open button.
The icon you selected will now display as the current icon. Press OK to finish assigning the icon to your macro. The icon
should now display in the Macro Explorer next to the macro, if you have the Show Macro Icons option selected.
Macro Recycle Bin
Macro Express - Explorer > Macro Recycle Bin Button
The Macro Express Recycle Bin works similar to the Windows Recycle Bin. If you delete a macro from the Macro Explorer,
the macro is removed from the macro file that you currently have open. The deleted macro is sent to the Macro Express
Recycle Bin. It will be displayed in the list of macros that have been deleted from active macro files.
Three options are available in the Recycle Bin - Restore Macros, Delete Macros or Empty Recycle Bin.
Restore Macro(s)
Highlight one or more macros in the Deleted Macro list. To highlight a block of macros, click on the first macro you want
restored, hold down the Shift Key and then click on the last macro in the block. Next click on the Restore Macro(s)
option. This will place your deleted macros back into the macro files from which they were deleted. If you accidentally
deleted a macro, this is how you can restore the macro.
Delete Macro(s)
Highlight one or more macros in the Deleted Macro list. To highlight a block of macros, click on the first macro you want
deleted, hold down the Shift Key and then click on the last macro in the block. Then click on the Delete Macro(s) option.
This will permanently remove the selected deleted macros from the Recycle Bin and they cannot be retrieved.
Empty Recycle Bin

Click on the Empty Recycle Bin option to remove all deleted macros from the Recycle Bin. These macros cannot be
retrieved once they are removed from the Recycle Bin.
Backing Up and Restoring Macros

Macro Express allows you to create multiple files of macros. When installing the program, two macro files are loaded.
They are samples.mex and macex.mex. The samples.mex file contains a number of sample macros that may be used for
reference. The macex.mex file is the default file to use for creating and saving macros.
At installation the macex.mex file only contains five System Macros. Or you can create a new macro file by clicking on File
| New Macro File from the Macro Explorer window. The macro file name and path of the file you currently have opened is
displayed in the Macro Explorer window.
Backup
There are several ways to back up the macro file currently open.
1. Use the automatic backup routine found in Options | Preferences | Backup. Backups can be created at scheduled
intervals and saved to specific locations.
2. Click on File | Backup Macro File(s). The file is backed up to the default location defined in Options | Preferences
| Backup.
3. Click on File | Save Macro File As. In the Save Macro File As window that appears, select the location where you
want to save and name the file.
4. Click on File | Export | Export Macros. This activates the Export Macros window. All macros in the file are
displayed. You may select all or some of the macros and save to a new macro file.
5. Use the Copy and Paste options of Windows Explorer or My Computer. The file path and name are displayed in
the Macro Explorer window. Navigate to the file, copy and save to a different location.
Restore
1. From the Macro Express - Explorer window, click on File | Restore. A Windows dialog will open prompting to
select the backup file. The dialog opens to the folder designated in the Backup preferences panel for file backups.
If the backup options were recently changed, then it may be necessary to browse to the location where previous
backups were stored.
Performing the restore closes the file currently open and replaces it with the backup file selected.
2. Click on File | Open Macro File to load in the backup macro file or a copy of the file. Navigate to the location
where the backup or copy resides and open the file.
3. Click on File | Import | Import Macros to activate the Import Macros window. All macros in the .mex file selected
are displayed. Highlight all or some of the macros in the file and import them to the macro file currently open.
Networking
How can I deploy Macro Express across a network?
There is an option to use a silent install to install Macro Express from a network server. Read the Advanced
Installation topic for more information about this process and the command line options available during the install.
How do I run the program over a network?

Click on Options | Preferences | Network from the Macro Explorer and choose the "File Locking of Macro Files" option.
This will enable the networking capabilities of the program. File locking will be performed preventing overwriting of data
by 2 or more users. If a user attempts to change any data in the Macro Express file and the data they currently display
has been altered by another user, the user will be notified that the data has been changed and the new data will be
loaded and displayed.
The Automatic Synchronization Updating option is available to allow automatic synchronization of data files between
users on a network. This updating can be set to occur every minute, every two minutes on up to every 999 minutes. For
example, if the interval is set to 5 minutes and another user makes a change to the same macro file that you have open,
then within 5 minutes, the macro data will automatically be synchronized between the networked computers without you
doing anything.
How do I prevent my network users from changing the macro data?

Use the command line option /B which places Macro Express in a browse only mode. All macros still function, but they
cannot be changed by the user.
Note: Please note that multi-user networking of this product requires multi-user licensing.
Command Line Parameters

Command Line Parameters are commands that can be passed to the program when the program is first run. The
following command line parameters apply to the Macro Express player (macexp.exe). A command line parameter follows
the name of the program and is separated by a single space from the program name and other command line
parameters.
The /A and /MXE command line parameters listed below are used for launching macros.
The command line parameters may also be used with another program supplied with Macro Express called MEPROC.EXE.
This program is designed to speed up the playing back of macros. The advantage of using meproc.exe is that if Macro
Express is already running the macro will launch much quicker. This is because meproc.exe is so much smaller that it
does not take as long to load and execute the macro.
Not all command line parameters can be combined on a single command line. For example, the /IC option will import the
program configuration, including the macro file. This cannot be combined with the /F option used to load a macro file.
/A<nickname> (Activate Macro)

This allows you to specify a given macro to run when Macro Express is invoked. <Nickname> is the nickname of the
macro you want to run. For example, if you have a macro nicknamed "My Address", you would use the command line
parameter of "/AMy Address" (without quotes). This command can be particularly useful if you wish to run macros from
batch files. If Macro Express is already running, it will not launch a second copy of the program yet the macro will still be
executed. Note: This command allows spaces in the nickname.
/B (Browse Mode)
This places Macro Express in a browse mode where the macro data cannot be modified. The Macro Express editor cannot
be invoked when this option is used. This option can be especially helpful in administrating uniformity of macros over a
network.
/EN (Do Not Run Editor)

This option instructs the Macro Express editor to not run when the Macro Express player first runs.
/EY (Run Editor)

This option instructs the Macro Express editor to run when the Macro Express player first runs.
/F<FileName> (Load Macro Express File)

This allows you to specify a specific Macro Express file for loading on startup of Macro Express. <Filename> is replaced
with the Macro Express file name. A full path along with the "MEX" extension on the file name must be used. Example:
"/Fc:\program files\macro express\mymacros.mex" (without the quotes). Note: This command allows spaces in the file
name and the path.
/H (Hide Program)
This completely hides the Macro Express player program. You may invoke the Macro Express editor by using the system
"Activate Macro Express Editor" hotkey.
/IC<FileName> (Import Program Configuration)

This option will load in the program configuration settings on startup of Macro Express. If you have more than one user
at a computer, each user could have their configuration settings loaded in when they start up Macro Express. Each
individual user would need to create their own startup shortcut in order to do this.
/MXE (Run .MXE file)

This allows you to run a macro that is contained in a playable macro file (.MXE file). Example: "/MXEc:\program
files\macro express\mymacro.mxe" (without the quotes).
/N (Network)
This option forces the program to use the Network Mode.
/NQS (No Quick Start)
This option prevents the Quick Start program from running for the current session.
/S (Synchronize Network)
This option is only useful if the Network Mode is active. This option forces the network synchronization option to be used.
/SMxx (Synchronization Minutes)

This option is only useful if the Network Mode is active. "xx" should be substituted with the number of minutes that
macro file synchronization should take place. Valid values are from 1 minute to 99 minutes.
/T (System Tray)
This option places an icon in the System Tray.
/V (Variables)
This option is used for passing variable information into Macro Express and is really only useful when used in conjunction
with one of the other commands that launches a macro. This way you can launch a macro and provide some input for
the macro. Following the /V, you would either specify a T, N, or D for a Text, Integer or Decimal type variable. The
variable number follows immediately after the letter which is followed by a colon. The data to use comes last. The data
can contain spaces in it. Some examples are shown below:
/VT2:Now is the time - This will place "Now is the time" (without quotes) into variable T2
/VN34:150
- This will place the value 150 into the variable N34
/VD6:22.25
- This will place the value 22.25 into the variable D6
This command actually places the values into the "Saved Variable Locations". This means that your macro will have to
use the "Variable Restore All", "Variable Restore Text", etc. commands first before it can access the data.
Note: Most of these options allow for a quick and easy setup for network considerations. For example, users can be
restricted from changing Macro Express data using the browse mode, allowing manageable uniformity across the
network. Users can all access the same Macro Express file using the "Load Macro Express File" option so no configuration
is required by first running the program. Network usage can be enforced using the "Network" option, etc.
Support
Important: Before requesting support, please make sure that you are using the latest version of Macro Express, as the
problem may have been fixed in a later update. Information about the latest release may be found at
www.macros.com/download.htm.
Also check for answers in the Help File, the Frequently Asked Questions or the web based Knowledgebase for Macro
Express. For questions or comments regarding Macro Express please visit our support page at
www.macros.com/support.htm.
If you are experiencing an issue with Macro Express for which you can not find a resolution, please provide the following:
The product name and version number. (Click on Help | About for version information.)
The version of Windows you are running (XP, Vista, 7, etc.) including service packs.
The sequence of actions that produces the problem.
Any other relevant details.
Frequently Asked Questions

How do I place a macro in an endless loop?
The best way to place a macro in an endless loop is to use the Repeat Until Command. Basically, you would assign a
value to a variable. You would then use the Repeat Until condition and test the variable against a different value. As long
as you never reset the variable value, the macro will repeat indefinitely. Here is a brief example of what the code would
look like in the Scripting Editor:
Set Integer Variable N1 to 0
Repeat Until N1 = 1
.... (your macro code here)
Repeat End
Note: Please do not have one macro call another macro (via the "Macro Run" command) and in turn have the second
macro call the first macro. Putting two macros in an endless loop in this fashion will eventually end up in a system crash.
The system resources used by Macro Express for each macro never get freed in this instance because the macro never
actually finishes executing before calling the other macro.
How do I stop a running macro?

There are several ways to do this. If you have selected to display the Running icon when a macro is running, right mouse
click on the icon in the System tray to stop the macro. Or you may press the Scroll Lock and Pause keys to stop the
macro. This is the default hotkey. You can change the default to Win + ` or the Pause key by going to Options |
Preferences | Playback.
Any of these options will cancel a macro that is playing. Please note that macros that consist of a lot of keystrokes can
send the keystrokes rather quickly and Windows will buffer up the keystrokes. Once such commands have been buffered
up in Windows, aborting a macro will not cancel them. In these cases, it may appear that the abort command did not
work when in reality the macro has already finished issuing its commands and Windows is now processing them.
How do I click on a button on a web page?

Once you position the cursor over a button (via the tab key), you issue a space command. You can use either the
<SPACE> option or just hit the space bar when entering your macro. For example, if you had a form that requested your
name, street address, city, state and zip code followed by a submit button, you could create a macro as follows: "Fred
Smith<TAB>123 AppleLane<TAB>Small Town<TAB>UT<TAB>80000<TAB><SPACE>". When invoked, this would tab
through the fields filling them in and then trigger the submit button. The space will work equally well with checkbox and
radio type buttons on web page forms.
How do I ensure the CTRL, ALT or SHIFT keys are held down in a macro?
There are 2 methods that you can employ. They are listed below.
1. The first method is to use the CTRL, ALT and SHIFT Keys that can be accessed in the "Entering Keystrokes". By
default, anything that follows <CTRL>, <ALT> or <SHIFT> is acted upon as if it were being held down. For example, if
your macro contains <CTRL>a, then this is the same as holding down the CTRL key and pressing the "a" key. If your
macro contained <CTRL><ALT>a, then this would be the same as holding down the CTRL key and the ALT key at the
same time and then pressing the "a" key. The same works with the SHIFT key. There are a couple things to keep in
mind: 1. If you use an upper case letter (i.e. <CTRL>A), then you may not get the results you expect. 2. There are
certain system keystroke commands that are built into the operating system at a low level such as CTRL+ALT+DELETE.
Placing these commands in macros will not be recognized by Windows at this low level and will not work as intended.
2. The second method is to use the specific functions for "Alt Key Down", "Alt Key Up", "Ctrl Key Down", etc. Here you
would choose the macro command "Alt Key Down" and the following command would be a text command containing the
letters you want to be associated with the ALT key. You would follow this with an "Alt Key Up" command. Again, make
sure that you use lower case letters. The "WIN" key available on the Microsoft keyboards is also available for down and
up usage.
How do I dynamically change the contents of a macro?
There are actually a variety of ways to accomplish this. The first method available was the "Text Insertion" option. This
allows your macro to load in a text file at any point during the macro and execute the text as part of the macro. Your
dynamic portion of the macro will be stored in the text file. Any time you want to programmatically change the macro,
change the text file that is inserted into the macro. Another method is to use "Variables". Place the variable where you
want to use it in your macro. Populate the variable in any number of ways including being prompted, loading from a text
file, loading from the clipboard and many others.
How do I get Macro Express to not display when I first start the program? I just want the icon
in the System Tray.
From the Macro Explorer, click on Options | Preferences | Startup. Make sure the Start Editor on Startup of Macro
Express option is not checked.
If the Macro Express icon does not display in the System Tray, click on Options | Preferences | Appearance and select the
Show in System Tray option.
How do I remove the samples Popup menu icon from the system tray?
Macro Express allows you to create multiple macro files. The file you currently are using is the Sample file that contains
the sample macros we created. One option for removing the popup menu icon is to open or create a new macro file. Click
on Macros | Open Macro File or Macros | New Macro File. Then if you need to look at a sample macro, load the sample
file back in - samples.mex. This would be the best option.
Or look through your list of macros in the Macro Explorer. Locate the macro with a nickname of Samples: Popup Menu
Using Nicknames or an activation of Ctrl+Alt+G. You can highlight this macro and then click on the garbage can icon to
delete the Popup Menu. Or double click on the popup menu macro to activate the Popup Menu Builder. Click on the
Properties tab and remove the check next to Place Menu in System Tray.
How can I not have any delays between keystrokes when capturing a macro keystrokes?
Before capturing the macro make sure your Capture options are set to correctly. Remove the check next to the "Capture
At" option. This will capture your macro without any delays or capturing hesitations. You need to be careful when doing
this. Selecting this option may cause the macro to play back too fast and throw off the timing of the macro.
Can I use macros in DOS programs?

Macro Express currently only works with Windows programs. You cannot paste keystrokes into a DOS program. The
global Windows "keyboard hooks" that we tap into are not relayed on to DOS programs even if they are running under
Windows.
Can I auto repeat keystrokes?

This question references the "Why can't I hold down the CTRL key and continue to press and release the "a" key for
multiple CTRL+A macros to be played?". The real answer deals with the "global" nature of our program--that is our
macros will work in any program at any time. For this to occur, we actually send the keystrokes through the Windows
internal keystroke processing system just as if the key were pressed from the keyboard. Because of this, all keys must be
released before the macro plays back. This is to ensure that no adverse keyboard effects will affect the playback of the
macro. Let's take an example. Suppose you assigned your company name of "My Company, Inc." to the hotkey "Alt-A".
You hold down the ALT key and press the "A" key. If the macro were to start playing immediately upon doing this, the
ALT key would still be held down by you and the macro would play back as ALT-M, ALT-y, etc until you released the ALT
key. To prevent this from occurring, we require all keys to be released before the macro will start.
My macros do not play back.

There are a couple of possibilities here.
1. The simplest and sometimes overlooked by new users is that Macro Express Player needs to be running for the macros
to work.
2. We really dislike this last situation because we have little control over it. It is possible that you have loaded another
program, after Macro Express was loaded, that installs itself improperly into the Windows Keyboard Hooks. When this
happens, our program never sees the keystrokes and therefore does not work (The last program run gets first look at the
keystrokes). Your recourse here is to try one of the following:
A. Unload the program that is causing the problem

B. Make sure that Macro Express is run after you run the offending program
C. Use the Tools | Restore Keyboard Hooks menu option.
D. Choose Options | Preferences | Miscellaneous and then select Auto Restore Keyboard Hooks. In the latter three
cases both Macro Express and the offending program will work as Macro Express properly handles the situation.
Ultimately, you would want the vendor of the offending program to fix the problem.
My macro does not seem to invoke my menu commands.

Some programs appear to interpret ALT keystroke sequences as something other than menu commands. This exhibits
itself when certain menu commands work from Macro Express and others do not. To work around this problem, a double
ALT (<ALT><ALT>) should be used. Two ALTs in a row is the equivalent of pressing the ALT Key and releasing it. Doing
so activates the menu and the next letter will activate the appropriate menu option. For example, to open the File menu
(used on most programs), you would enter "<ALT><ALT>f" as your macro. If the double ALT doesn't seem to work
either, then use the ALT Key Down and ALT Key Up commands. This option will hold the ALT Key down and then allow
you to press another letter. Afterwords you would issue an ALT Key Up command to release the ALT key. The syntax
would look like the following in the Direct Editor if trying to execute an ALT f - <ALTD>f<ALTU>.
My macro seems to go bonkers or plays out of sequence.

The cause here is going to be a timing issue. It is sometimes possible for the keystrokes themselves to be sent too
quickly for the desired actions. For example, you may have a keystroke that causes a new window to pop up and the
next keystroke is to perform a command in this new window. It's possible that the new window may not be ready to
receive the keystroke when it is sent. The solution to this dilemma is to place a short delay ( second or so) right after
the keystroke that invokes the new window. Or you can use one of the Wait For commands to instruct the macro to wait
until ready to proceed.
If you don't find the answer to your question here, go to our Macro Express Knowledgebase at www.macros.com.
Backing Up and Restoring Macros

Macro Express allows you to create multiple files of macros. When installing the program, two macro files are loaded.
They are samples.mex and macex.mex. The samples.mex file contains a number of sample macros that may be used for
reference. The macex.mex file is the default file to use for creating and saving macros.
At installation the macex.mex file only contains five System Macros. Or you can create a new macro file by clicking on File
| New Macro File from the Macro Explorer window. The macro file name and path of the file you currently have opened is
displayed in the Macro Explorer window.
Backup
There are several ways to back up the macro file currently open.
1. Use the automatic backup routine found in Options | Preferences | Backup. Backups can be created at scheduled
intervals and saved to specific locations.
2. Click on File | Backup Macro File(s). The file is backed up to the default location defined in Options | Preferences
| Backup.
3. Click on File | Save Macro File As. In the Save Macro File As window that appears, select the location where you
want to save and name the file.
4. Click on File | Export | Export Macros. This activates the Export Macros window. All macros in the file are
displayed. You may select all or some of the macros and save to a new macro file.
5. Use the Copy and Paste options of Windows Explorer or My Computer. The file path and name are displayed in
the Macro Explorer window. Navigate to the file, copy and save to a different location.
Restore
1. From the Macro Express - Explorer window, click on File | Restore. A Windows dialog will open prompting to
select the backup file. The dialog opens to the folder designated in the Backup preferences panel for file backups.
If the backup options were recently changed, then it may be necessary to browse to the location where previous
backups were stored.
Performing the restore closes the file currently open and replaces it with the backup file selected.
2. Click on File | Open Macro File to load in the backup macro file or a copy of the file. Navigate to the location
where the backup or copy resides and open the file.
3. Click on File | Import | Import Macros to activate the Import Macros window. All macros in the .mex file selected
are displayed. Highlight all or some of the macros in the file and import them to the macro file currently open.
End-User License Agreement (EULA) for Macro Express

Agreement
The use of this Software indicates your understanding and acceptance of the following terms and conditions. If you do
not understand or accept these terms you must cease using this product immediately.
Copyright
This product is Copyright by Insight Software Solutions, Inc. This Software is protected by United States copyright law
and various international treaties.
License
You may use an unlicensed copy of this Software for up to 30 days for evaluation purposes only. After the 30 day
evaluation period you must purchase a license to continue to use the Software.
Once you have purchased a license you will receive a license code that will enable you to continue using the Software on
a non-exclusive basis. This license will not expire.
The Software is licensed, not sold. Ownership of the Software, Documentation and all intellectual property rights therein
shall remain at all times with Insight Software Solutions, Inc. In licensing the Software you do not acquire any rights
beyond the right to continue to use the Software on the system for which you purchased the license.
You may transfer the license to another system at any time, provided you do not exceed the total number of licenses
purchased. You may not use a single license to enable usage on more than one system. A valid license must be
purchased for each computer on which the Software is installed.
Restrictions
You may not copy, modify, translate, loan or create derivative works based upon the Software or any part thereof. You
may not reverse engineer, decompile, adapt, or disassemble the Software, nor shall you attempt to create the source
code from the object code of the Software. You may not attempt to unlock or bypass any licensing algorithm utilized by
the Software. You may not distribute the license code you received when purchasing the Software or post this
information to discussion forums, web sites, email messages or servers. You may not remove or modify any copyright
notices. Violations will result in termination of this license.
Limited Warranty
Insight Software Solutions, Inc. warrants that the Software will perform substantially in accordance with the user
documentation for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt. This limited warranty is void if failure of the
Software has resulted from accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any replacement Software will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or thirty (30) days, whichever is longer.
Disclaimer of Warranty
THERE ARE NO OTHER WARRANTIES RESPECTING THE SOFTWARE, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR ENDORSEMENTS REGARDING THE USE OF, THE RESULTS OF, OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT, MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY,
RELIABILITY, OR THAT THE SOFTWARE IS ERROR FREE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS
ASSUMED BY THE USER AND/OR LICENSEE. INSIGHT SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS, INC. DOES NOT ASSUME LIABILITY FOR
THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE BEYOND THE ORIGINAL PURCHASE PRICE OF THE SOFTWARE. IN NO EVENT WILL
INSIGHT SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ADDITIONAL DIRECT OR INDIRECT DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY
LOSS OF PROFITS OR OTHER INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY
DEFECTS, OR THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFTWARE, EVEN IF INSIGHT SOFTWARE SOLUTIONS, INC. HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON
HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO LIMITATIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU
SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY BY JURISDICTION.
Customer Remedies
The entire liability of Insight Software Solutions, Inc. and your exclusive remedy shall be, at the option of Insight
Software Solutions, Inc., either (a) return of the original purchase price paid for the Software, or (b) repair or
replacement of the Software that does not meet the Limited Warranty and that is returned to Insight Software Solutions,
Inc. with a copy of your receipt.
Export Controls
None of the Software, Documentation or underlying information or technology may be downloaded or otherwise exported
or re-exported (i) into (or to a national or resident of) Cuba, Iraq, Libya, Yugoslavia, North Korea, Iran, Syria or any other
country to which the U.S. has embargoed goods; or (ii) to anyone on the U.S. Treasury Department's list of Specially
Designated Nationals or the U.S. Commerce Department's Table of Denial Orders. By downloading or using the Software,
you are agreeing to the foregoing and you are representing and warranting that you are not located in, under the control
of, or a national or resident of any such country or on any such list.
In addition, if the licensed Software is identified as a not-for-export product (for example, on the box, media or in the
installation process), then the following applies: EXCEPT FOR EXPORT TO CANADA FOR USE IN CANADA BY CANADIAN
CITIZENS, THE SOFTWARE AND ANY UNDERLYING TECHNOLOGY MAY NOT BE EXPORTED OUTSIDE THE UNITED
STATES OR TO ANY FOREIGN ENTITY OR "FOREIGN PERSON" AS DEFINED BY U.S. GOVERNMENT REGULATIONS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANYONE WHO IS NOT A CITIZEN, NATIONAL OR LAWFUL PERMANENT RESIDENT
OF THE UNITED STATES. BY DOWNLOADING OR USING THE SOFTWARE, YOU ARE AGREEING TO THE FOREGOING
AND YOU ARE WARRANTING THAT YOU ARE NOT A "FOREIGN PERSON" OR UNDER THE CONTROL OF A FOREIGN
PERSON.
High Risk Activities

The Software is not fault-tolerant and is not designed, manufactured or intended for use or resale as on-line control
equipment in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe performance, such as in the operation of nuclear facilities,
aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic control, direct life support machines, or weapons systems, in
which the failure of the Software could lead directly to death, personal injury, or severe physical or environmental
damage ("High Risk Activities"). Insight Software Solutions, Inc. specifically disclaims any express or implied warranty of
fitness for High Risk Activities.
Terms
This license is effective until terminated. You may terminate it by destroying the Software, the documentation and copies
thereof. This license will also terminate if you fail to comply with any terms or conditions of this agreement. You agree
upon such termination to destroy all copies of the Software and of the documentation, or return them to Insight Software
Solutions, Inc.
Other Rights
No amendments or modifications may be made to this Agreement except in writing signed by both parties. If one or
more provisions of this Agreement are found to be invalid or unenforceable, this Agreement shall not be rendered
inoperative but the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect.
No Insight Software Solutions, Inc. dealer, distributor or agent is authorized to make any modification or addition to this
Agreement.
All other rights not specifically granted in this license are reserved by Insight Software Solutions, Inc.
Governing Law
This agreement shall be governed by the laws of the State of Utah. The application of the United Nations Convention of
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded.
Licensing the Evaluation Copy

Macro Express is available for download as an evaluation copy. The evaluation copy is fully functional for a fixed period of
time. To use the program beyond the evaluation period requires purchasing a license.
To purchase a license, open the Macro Express - Explorer window and click on Help | Buy Macro Express. Or right click on
the Macro Express icon in the system tray and left click on Buy Macro Express. Either method opens the order page on
our web site to display several purchasing options.
After purchasing the license for Macro Express you will receive a license code. From the Macro Express - Explorer click on
Help | License Macro Express to activate the License Information window. Enter the name and code exactly as they
appear on the license instructions received after purchase. Press OK to save the license information. The license status
will now display in the lower left corner of the Macro Express - Explorer window.
After successfully entering the license code, the program is fully licensed and will not expire. The Buy Macro Express links
mentioned above now change to License Information.
It is recommended that the program be licensed while logged on as the administrator. See the Advanced License
Information topic for consideration of Administrator and non-Administrator login rights and Macro Express licensing.
Upgrade Policy
When you purchased Macro Express, you were supplied a License Key. It is important that you keep this key in a secure
place as you will need it whenever reinstalling Macro Express.
This license key is valid for any version 3.x of Macro Express. Future revisions that bear the "3.x" identifier version, will
generally be for minor enhancements and bug-fixes. Any release containing major new functionality will bear a different
version identifier (e.g., 4.x) and an upgrade fee will be chargeable.
The prime location for new releases of Macro Express 3 is our web site download page at http://www.macros.com/download.htm.
If you do obtain a newer version of the product, install it on top of your existing version (into the same folder).
Note: Uninstalling and then reinstalling Macro Express will not affect your macro file(s). Your macro file(s) will remain
intact. However, as always, we recommend that you backup your macro (.mex) file(s) before uninstalling or reinstalling.
Index
A
Abort Macro, 79, 130
Activate Macro, 54, 57, 60, 59, 72, 74, 73, 75, 76, 77, 98
Activate Window, 342
Add Macros, 92
Addition, 300, 302
Alarm, 132
Alt Key, 116, 216
And, 218
API Macro Activation, 54
Appearance, 111
Append Clipboard Text to End of Text File, 173
Append Text to Clipboard, 173
ASCII Character, 324
ASCII Delimited Text File, 191
ASCII Value, 325
Audio Balance, 250
Audio Controls, 250
Audio File, 251
Audio Volume, 250
Automatic Macro Backups, 113
AVI File, 252
B
Backing Up Macros, 113, 390
Balance, 250
Bass, 250
Beep, 251
Break, 259
C
Caching, 115
Cancel Macro, 124
Caps Lock, 130
Caps Lock On or Off, 217
Capture, 352
Capture a Macro, 355
Capture Control, 331
Capture Preferences, 116
Capture Using Menu or Capture Icon, 27
Capture Using System Macro, 30
Quick Wizard Capture, 35
Recapture Macro, 99
Cascade, 177
Case, 231
Categories, 106
Customize Categories, 155
CD-ROM, 171
Change Default Folder, 188
Character Separator, 154
Check Box Menu, 178

Clear Error Messages, 124
Clear Variables, 298
Clipboard, 220, 313, 304, 124, 311, 315, 173
Clipboard Delays, 118
If Commands, 220
Save String Variable to Clipboard, 304
Set Decimal Variable from Clipboard, 311
Set Default Clipboard Delay, 124
Set Integer Variable from Clipboard, 315
Set String Variable from Clipboard, 313
Close Program, 347, 348
Close Window, 347, 348
Comma Delimited Text, 191
Comma Delimited Text File, 191
Command Line Parameters, 124, 392
Comments, 241
Completely Hide Macro Express, 111
Configuration Settings, 144
Control Activation, 77
Control Class, 337
Control Key, 216
Control Panel, 263
Controls, 326
Capture Control, 331
Get Control, 332
If Control, 224
Post Message, 270
Set Focus, 336
Using Controls, 46
Variable Get Control Text, 338
Variable Modify Control, 339
Variable Set Control Text, 341
Convert File Name, 187
Copy a Macro, 97
Copy and Paste Routine, 50
Copy Files or Files, 188
Copy Graphic File to Clipboard, 173
Copy Text File to Clipboard, 173
Copy to Clipboard, 173
Copyright, 399
Create Folder, 188
Create Registry Key, 256
Cut from Clipboard, 173
D
Date, 279, 280, 315
Debug, 161
Decimals, 300, 311
Modify Decimal Variable, 300
Set Decimal Variable, 311
Default Case, 231
Default Printer, 264
Default Web Browser, 215
Delay, 288, 289, 292

Delete File or Files, 188
Delete Folder, 188
Delete FTP File, 205
Delete Macros, 102, 236
Delete Registry Key, 256
Desktop, 177
Place an Icon on Desktop, 103
Dial a Phone Book Entry, 198
Dial Up Networking, 198
Direct Editor, 168, 170, 148, 162, 124, 164, 152
Menu Items, 161, 148, 158, 159, 155
Disable Macro, 100
Display Categories in Macro Explorer, 111
Display Category Icons in Editors, 111
Display Gridlines in Macro Explorer, 111
Display Icon when Macro Runs, 111
Display Icons in Macro Explorer, 111
Display Settings, 273
Divide, 300, 302
Double Alt, 119
Duplicate a Macro, 97
E
Else, 220
Email, 121, 122, 123, , 211
View Email Log, 121
Empty Clipboard, 173
Empty Recycle Bin, 389, 242, 265
Enable Macro, 100
Encrypted Text, 282
End Case, 231
End Clipboard Copy, 173
End If, 220
End Switch, 231
Error Log, 123, 141, 176
Error Messages, 124
Explorer - Macro, 80
Explorer - Windows, 184, 185
Export, 89, 90, 91, 144
External Editor, 148
F
FAQ, 395
File Associations, 119, 145
File Attributes, 197
File Date, 321
File Locking, 128
File Manipulation, 188
File Name Convert, 187
File Paths, 123, 321
File Time, 321
File Version, 190
Files - Copy, 188
Files - Delete, 188

Files - Move, 188
Files - Rename, 188
Find a Command, 159
Folder - Repeat With, 260
Folders - Change Default, 188
Folders - Create, 188
Folders - Delete, 188
Folders - Open, 185, 186
Folders - Rename, 188
FTP Commands, 201, 202, 209, 206, 205, 203, 204, 208, 207
G
Get Control Class, 337
Get Mouse Position, 245
Global Except Scope,
H
Hang Up, 198
Hibernate, 268
Hidden Mode, 111
Hide Categories in Macro Explorer, 111
Hide Category Icons in Editor, 111
Hide Gridlines in Macro Explorer, 111
Hide Icons in Macro Explorer, 111
Hide Macro Express, 111
Hide Script Command Categories, 111
Hide Window, 348
Hooks, 124, 146, 147
Hot Keys, 18, 57,
I
Icons, 386
Place Icon on Desktop, 103
Recording (Capture) Icon, 111
Running Icon, 111
Idle Time, 68
If Clipboard Contains, 220
If Clipboard Text Equals, 220
If File Does/Does Not Exist, 220
If Folder Does/Does Not Exist, 220
If Macro Enabled/Disabled, 220
If Program Is/Is Not Running, 220
If Program On/Not On Top, 220
If Registry, 229
If Statements, 227, 230, 218, 225, 231, 224, 198, 228, 220
If Window Is./Is Not Running, 220
If Window On/Not On Top, 220
Import Macros, 86
Import Playable Macro, 88
Import Program Configuration, 143
Import Text Files, 87
Index method, 341
Installing Macro Express, 11
Advanced Installation, 12
Integers, 302, 315

IP Address, 200
K
Keyboard Remapping, 138, 140
Keyboard Repeat Speed/Delay, 275
Keyboard Shortcuts,
Keystroke Speed, 291
L
Launch Program, 342
Launch Web Site, 215
Left Control Key, 284
License Agreement, 399
License Macro Express, 399,
Licensing Issues, 15
Load Macro Text File, 234
Load New Macro File, 235
Load Text File, 234
Lock Workstation, 269
Log Errors, 176
Log Messages, 176
Logoff, 272
M
Macro Activation, 54, 72, 59, 74, 60, 75, 57, 73, 76, 77, 98
Macro Delete Command, 236
Macro Disable, 100, 236
Macro Enable, 100, 236
Macro Explorer, 80
Macro Return Command, 238
Macro Run Command, 236
Macro Speed, 291
Macro Stop Command, 238
Macro within a Macro, 236
Mathematics, 300, 302
Maximize All Windows, 177
Maximize Window, 348
Memory Allocation, 115
Menu, 178
Menu Styles, 111
MIDI, 250
Minimize All Windows, 177
Minimize Window, 348
Miscellaneous Preferences, 124
Miscellaneous Variable Info, 323
Mouse, 245
Creating a Mouse Activation Macro, 75
Mouse Click Activation Settings,
Mouse Click on Control Command, 244
Restore Mouse Hooks, 147
Wait For Mouse Click, 292
Mouse Cursor, 220, 292
Mouse Locator, 137
Get Pixel Color, 266
Mouse Commands, 245

Mouse Speed, 291
Move File or Files, 188
Multiple Choice, 178
Multiply, 300, 302
Mute, 250
MXE Files, 88, 91
N
Navigation, 10
Network, 128, 198, 254, 391
Notes, 170, 385
Num Lock On or Off, 217
O
Open Explorer To, 184
Open Folder, 186
Open Folder in Explorer, 185
Or, 218
Order
Overview, 9
P
Parameters, 392
Passwords, 129, 168, 239, 282
Pause, 289, 292
Pause Macro, 130
Ping, 210, 228
Ping Site, 210
Playable Macro, 88, 91
Popup Menu, 32, 74, 376, 378, 381
Power Off, 272
Pricing
Printer Command, 264
Process ASCII Delimited Text File, 191
Process Text File, 195
Program Specific,
Q
Quick Wizards, 368
R
Radio Button Menu, 178
Random Letter, 313
Random Number, 315
Random Value, 315
Read from Registry, 257
Read Only Prompt, 119
Reboot, 272
Recapture Macro, 99
Record a Macro, 352
Capture Macro Introduction, 352
Capture Preferences, 116
Capture Using Menu or Icon, 27
Capture Using System Macro, 30
Quick Wizard Capture, 35

Recapture Macro, 99
Recycle Bin, 389, 242, 265
RegisterWindowMessage, 270
Registry Commands, 257, 229, 256
Remarks, 241
Rename File or Files, 188
Rename Folder, 188
Rename Macro, 104, 162
Repeat, 260
Reposition Window, 345, 350
Reset Hooks, 146, 147, 242
Resize Window, 345, 350
Restart Macro Express, 243
Restore File Associations, 145
Restore Keyboard Hooks, 146
Restore Mouse Hooks, 147
Restore Program Defaults, 142
Restore Window, 348
Resume Macro Express,
Return Command, 238
Right Control Key, 284
Run a Macro, 236
Run Macro in Variable, 308
S
Sample Macros, 44
Save Clipboard Graphic to Graphic File, 173
Save Clipboard to Text File, 173
Schedule, 60
Schedule Macro to Run Monthly, 67
Schedule Macro to Run At File Load, 71
Schedule Macro to Run at Miscellaneous Times, 70
Schedule Macro to Run At Startup, 62
Schedule Macro to Run at Time Out, 68
Schedule Macro to Run Daily, 65
Schedule Macro to Run Hourly, 64
Schedule Macro to Run Once, 63
Schedule Macro to Run Weekly, 66
Scheduled Macro Tutorial, 23
Set Schedule,
Scope, 41, 164, 381, , ,
Screen Saver, 275
Screen Settings, 273
Scripting Editor, 168, 149, 148, 164, 162, 170
Menu Items, 155, 158, 159, 161
Scroll Lock On or Off, 217
Search Explorer, 101
Session ID, 278
Set File Attributes, 197
Shortcuts,
ShortKeys, 20, , 59, 133
Show Icon when Macro is Recording, 111
Show Script Command Categories, 111
Shut Down Computer, 272

Shut Down Program, 347, 348
Silent Install, 12
SMTP Server, 121
Sort Macros, 108
Sound, 251
Speed, 116, 275, 291
Start Clipboard Copy, 173
Start Up Group, 136
Startup, 136
Step Through Macro, 161
Stop Macro, 130, 238
String, 304, 313
Subtraction, 300, 302
Support, 394
Suspend Computer, 277
Suspend Macro Express,
Switch, 231
Symbols, 283
System Date, 274
System Macros, 82
System Time, 274
System Tray, , 249
T
Tab Delimited Text, 191
Tab Delimited Text File, 191
Terminal Services, 278
Terminate a Macro, 79
Terminate Macro Express Command, 242
Text Box Close, 181
Text Box Display, 181
Text File, 191, 195, 234
Text Strings, 304, 313
Text Type, 284
Text Type Delays, 118
Tile Horizontally, 177
Tile Vertically, 177
Time, 280, 286, 315
Timing, 116, 288, 289, 292
Toggle, 217
Treble, 250
Tutorial, 17
Type Out Text from Clipboard, 173
U
Undock Computer, 277
Uninstall Macro Express, 16
Upgrading, 401, 402
V
Variables, 296
Get Control Text, 338
If Variable, 230
Modify Decimal Variable, 300
Modify Integer Variable, 302

Modify String Variable, 304
Save or Restore Variables, 310
Set Control Text, 341
Set Decimal Variable, 311
Set Integer Variable, 315
Set String Variable, 313
Variable Modify Control, 339
Version Number, 190
Video, 252
View, 110
Volume, 250
W
Wait, 288, 289, 292
Wait For Commands, 292
Wallpaper, 275
Wav file, 251
Web Site, 215, 292
Win Key, 216
Window Order, 344
Window Reposition, 345, 350
Window Resize, 345, 350
Window Sizing Border, 275
Window Specific,
Window Title Activation, 72
Windows API Activation, 54
Windows Explorer, 184, 185
Windows Key, 216
Write to Registry, 229
X
XOR, 218

Macro Express Help

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Macro Express Help

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Macro Express 3

Copyright Insight Software Solutions, Inc.

Installing Macro Express

Playing Back Macros

Using the Macro Explorer

System Macros .................................................................................................................... 82

Restore Program Defaults ............................................................................................ 142

Building Macros with the Editors

Editor Menu Items

Macro Command Categories

FTP Directories................................................................................................................ 203

Repeat Options ............................................................................................................... 260

Variable Get Control Text ................................................................................................. 338

Capture (Record) a Macro

Create a Macro with Quick Wizards

Using Popup and Floating Menus

Macro Recycle Bin

License and Support Issues

About Macro Express

Playing Back a Macro

Starting Macro Express

Player and Editor

Installing Macro Express

Licensing Macro Express

Sample Text File

Silent Install with Options

Advanced License Information

Uninstalling Macro Express 3

Macro Playback Options

Assigning the Macro Activation

Creating the Macro

1. Type your address into the Macro Text field.

Running the Macro

Assign the Activation

Creating the Macro

Run the Macro

Tutorial - Scheduled Macro

Setting the Schedule

Creating the Macro

Testing the Macro

Delete or Disable the Macro

Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey First

Assign a Macro Activation

Capturing the Macro

Running the Macro

Tutorial - Capture a Macro - Assigning HotKey Last

Capturing the Macro

Assigning Macro Activation

Running the Macro

Tutorial - Popup Menu

Setting the Activation

Setting the Menu Properties

Building the Menu

Testing the Menu

Tutorial - Quick Wizard Capture

2. Choose the Create a Reminder option and click on Next to proceed.

Tutorial - Macro Scope

Program Specific Macro

Window Specific Macro

Floating Menu Using Icons

Maximize and Minimize

Menu and Question

Open Explorer Folder

Popup Menu Using Nicknames